51 0 6MB
Cambridge IGSCE and O Level Physics matches the requirements of the Cambridge IGSCE and O Level Physics syllabus (9702). It is endorsed by Cambridge International Examinations for use with their examination. The first 17 chapters cover the material required for AS Level, while the remaining 16 chapters cover A2 Level.
Also available: Teacher’s Resource CD-ROM
ISBN 978-0-521-17915-7
Completely Cambridge – Cambridge resources for Cambridge qualifications Cambridge University Press works closely with Cambridge International Examinations as parts of the University of Cambridge. We enable thousands of students to pass their Cambridge exams by providing comprehensive, high-quality, endorsed resources. To find out more about Cambridge International Examinations visit www.cie.org.uk Visit education.cambridge.org/cie for more information on our full range of Cambridge International A Level titles including e-book versions and mobile apps.
Skinner, Stacey, Turner, Skinner & Crafer
The accompanying CD-ROM includes animations designed to develop a deeper understanding of various topics. It also contains revision questions with answers for each chapter.
Coursebook
• Each chapter begins with a brief outline of the content and ends with a summary. • Throughout the text there are short test yourself questions for students to consolidate their learning as they progress, with answers at the end of the book. • Worked examples illustrate how to tackle various types of question. • At the end of each chapter there are more short questions to revise the content, and a series of exam style questions to give practice in answering longer, structured questions. Answers to these questions are available on the accompanying Teacher’s Resource CD-ROM. • Three chapters on Sensing, Medical imaging and Communications systems cover the Applications of Physics section of the syllabus. • Appendices will help students develop the practical skills tested in examinations, as well as providing other useful reference material and a glossary.
Cambridge AS and A Level Environmental Management
Cambridge International AS and A Level Environmental Management Coursebook Gary Skinner, John Stacey, Melissa Turner, Ann Skinner and Ken Crafer
Peter Lucantoni
Cambridge IGCSE®
English as a Second Language Teacher’s Book Fifth edition
Peter Lucantoni
Cambridge IGCSE®
English as a Second Language Teacher’s Book Fifth edition
University Printing House, Cambridge CB2 8BS, United Kingdom One Liberty Plaza, 20th Floor, New York, NY 10006, USA 477 Williamstown Road, Port Melbourne, VIC 3207, Australia
4843/24, 2nd Floor, Ansari Road, Daryaganj, Delhi - 110002, India 79 Anson Road, #06 -04/06, Singapore 079906 Cambridge University Press is part of the University of Cambridge. It furthers the University’s mission by disseminating knowledge in the pursuit of education, learning and research at the highest international levels of excellence. www.cambridge.org Information on this title: www.cambridge.org/9781316636589 (Paperback) © Cambridge University Press 2017 This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception and to the provisions of relevant collective licensing agreements, no reproduction of any part may take place without the written permission of Cambridge University Press. Printed in Italy by Rotolito Lombarda S.p.A. A catalogue record for this publication is available from the British Library ISBN 978-1-316-63658-9 Paperback Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or accuracy of URLs for external or third-party internet websites referred to in this publication, and does not guarantee that any content on such websites is, or will remain, accurate or appropriate. ®IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations. All exam-style questions and sample answers have been written by the authors. In an examination the way marks are awarded might differ from the way the author marked the sample answers in this material.
NOTICE TO TEACHERS IN THE UK It is illegal to reproduce any part of this work in material form (including photocopying and electronic storage) except under the following circumstances: (i)
where you are abiding by a licence granted to your school or institution by the Copyright Licensing Agency;
(ii) where no such licence exists, or where you wish to exceed the terms of a licence, and you have gained the written permission of Cambridge University Press; (iii) where you are allowed to reproduce without permission under the provisions of Chapter 3 of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988, which covers, for example, the reproduction of short passages within certain types of educational anthology and reproduction for the purposes of setting examination questions. Videos are not representative of exam conditions. Teachers should refer to published material on how to conduct oral tests for precise details
Contents Introduction Assessment criteria for writing and speaking
iv v
Part 1: Leisure and travel Unit 1: Free time Unit 2: Television Unit 3: Food Unit 4: Transport Unit 5: Holidays
Focus on reading: skimming Focus on reading: multiple matching Focus on writing Focus on listening: short extracts Focus on speaking and listening: personal questions and note-taking
1 8 14 21
30
Part 2: Education and work Unit 6: Learning Unit 7: Jobs Unit 8: Communication Unit 9: Interviews Unit 10: Education
Focus on reading: note-making Focus on reading and writing: note-making and summary writing Focus on writing Focus on listening: short extracts and multiple-choice questions Focus on speaking: topic cards
38 45 52 60 69
Part 3: People and achievements Unit 11: Achievements Unit 12: Organisations Unit 13: Famous people Unit 14: Medical care Unit 15: Healthy living
Focus on reading: multiple matching Focus on writing Focus on writing Focus on listening: multiple-choice questions and completing notes Focus on speaking: topic cards
76 82 90 97 104
Part 4: Ideas and the modern world Unit 16: Social media
Focus on reading: skimming and scanning and multiple matching Unit 17: The environment Focus on reading and writing: note-making and summary writing Unit 18: Hunger Focus on writing Unit 19: Fashions Focus on listening: Questions 1–8 Focus on speaking: topic cards Unit 20: Technology
116 122 129 138
Workbook answers Acknowledgements
145 179
111
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Introduction This Teacher’s Book supports the Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language Coursebook, fifth edition. The Teacher’s Book provides the following: ■ full guidance on how to approach all the tasks in the Coursebook ■ suggestions for differentiated activities to use with mixedability classes ■ answers to the exercises in the Coursebook ■ sample answers to exam-style questions ■ marking and grading criteria for Core and Extended writing and speaking
iv
The Coursebook is divided into 16 units, with each one focusing on particular aspects of the Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language syllabus. Speaking skills are integrated throughout the book and are practised through discussion work, role play and specific tasks. While it is probably best to follow the units consecutively, there is no reason why teachers should not focus on a particular language skill or exam question. Videos are not representative of exam conditions. Teachers should refer to published material on how to conduct oral tests for precise details. When practicing speaking tests it is best if the same person is not the examiner all the time. The material becomes progressively more demanding, with longer and more advanced reading and listening texts in the second half of the book. The exercises in the ‘Further practice’ section of each unit are particularly useful for homework, for
early finishers or for practice outside the classroom, and the exam-style questions at the end of each unit could be used in class to give students a feel for the examination itself. Note that the word limit for writing activities is 100–150 for the Core curriculum and 150–200 for the Extended curriculum. Throughout this resource, you will find sample answers for most of the exam-style questions, including examples from both the Core and Extended curricula. The author is wholly responsible for the answers to the exam-style questions. The progressive step-by-step approach of Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language – including Top Tips that focus on key areas and Language Tips that highlight specific vocabulary and grammar items – will help to build students’ confidence in all the main skill areas, while also developing the techniques and additional skills necessary for success. For each activity, suggestions are made about whether students should work on their own, in pairs, in small groups or as a whole class. These are offered as a guide only – the amount of time available and the number of students in the class will determine the best approach. However, it is a good strategy to include activities with different group sizes within each lesson; this offers variety and gives students the opportunity to interact in different ways. To promote confidence, try not to interfere too much when students are working together (whether in pairs or in small groups), but monitor and provide support if requested. You can, of course, make notes to deliver as feedback once students have completed the activity. Peter Lucantoni
Assessment criteria for writing and speaking Below are the criteria for Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language writing and speaking. For full details, go to the Cambridge International Examinations website.
Writing Marks
Content (maximum 8 marks)
Marks
Language (maximum 8 marks)
7–8
Relevance • Instructions are followed. • Consistently appropriate style and tone for the text type. • Excellent sense of purpose and audience.
7–8
Range and accuracy • A varied range of high and low frequency vocabulary used competently. • A varied level of complex and simple sentence structures used appropriately. • A considerable level of language accuracy throughout. Some errors may remain, but these do not hinder communication of ideas or meaning. • The errors present relate to low frequency vocabulary and more complicated structures.
Development of ideas • Writing is very well developed, at an appropriate length. • Meaning is communicated skilfully and effectively.
Organisation • Consistently well-organised and ordered. • A varied range of connecting words and other cohesive methods, used consistently well. 5–6
Relevance • Instructions are followed. • Generally appropriate style and tone for the text type. • Generally good sense of purpose and audience. Development of ideas • Writing is developed, at an appropriate length. • Meaning is generally communicated clearly.
5–6
Range and accuracy • A good range of high frequency vocabulary used competently. Attempts to use some lower frequency vocabulary. • A good range of simple sentence structures used competently. Attempts to use some more complex sentence structures. • A good accuracy level throughout. Some errors are present, but these usually do not hinder communication. • The errors present usually relate to low frequency vocabulary or more complex sentence structures. Organisation • Often well-organised and ordered. • A varied range of connecting words and other cohesive methods, used appropriately.
Marks
Content (maximum 8 marks)
Marks
Language (maximum 8 marks)
3–4
Relevance • Instructions are generally followed. • Reasonably appropriate style and tone for the text type, but this may not be consistent. • Some sense of purpose and audience.
3–4
Range and accuracy • Mostly uses high frequency vocabulary, reasonably appropriately. • Mostly uses simple sentence structures, usually appropriately. • Reasonable accuracy level throughout. Some errors may hinder communication. • Errors are present when using some high frequency vocabulary or simple sentence structures.
Development of ideas • Some development of writing, but it may be repetitive or insufficient in some areas. • Meaning is communicated, but may lack clarity in places
1–2
Relevance • Instructions may only be partially followed. • Style and tone for the text type may be inappropriate. • Inappropriate sense of purpose and audience.
Organisation • Reasonably organised and sequenced. • Some connecting words and other cohesive methods, used reasonably appropriately. 1–2
Development of ideas • Limited attempt to develop writing, there may be gaps, irrelevance and/or repetition. • Limited attempt to communicate meaning, it lacks clarity in places.
0
•
No response worthy of credit.
Range and accuracy • Limited use of vocabulary. • Limited use of sentence structures. • Lack of control of vocabulary. Meaning is generally unclear. • Errors occur when using common vocabulary and simple sentence structures. Organisation • Organisation lacks order. • Limited attempt to use connecting words and other cohesive methods.
0
•
No response worthy of credit.
Speaking Give a mark out of 10 for each category (structure, vocabulary, development and fluency), and then add these marks to give an overall total out of 30. Mark
Structure
Vocabulary
Development and fluency
9–10
The student demonstrates their ability to use a range of sentence structures accurately, confidently and consistently.
The student demonstrates enough command of vocabulary to respond to questions with accuracy and understanding. Meaning is conveyed with precision, and some sophisticated ideas are communicated.
The student demonstrates a continued ability to maintain a conversation and to contribute appropriately. The student can respond to changes in the direction of conversation. There is clarity in pronunciation and intonation.
7–8
Sentence structures are usually sound, but are not used entirely accurately or with confidence. There are some errors when more complex sentence structures are attempted.
The student has a sufficient range of vocabulary to convey meaning and ideas with competence.
The student responds relevantly and at length which makes frequent prompting unnecessary. The student can hold a competent conversation, and pronunciation and intonation are generally clear.
5–6
The student can use simple structures efficiently but has some difficulty venturing beyond them.
Vocabulary conveys simple ideas and information with clarity. Errors are somewhat noticeable, and only partial competence is achieved.
The student attempts to respond to questions and prompts. Effort and additional prompting is necessary to develop the conversation. There is some lack of clarity of pronunciation and intonation, but it is unlikely to impede communication.
3–4
Sentence structures will largely be very simple, limited and with some errors, which will hinder communication.
Vocabulary is not particularly varied and there is difficulty in conveying simple ideas. There is hesitation and repetition.
Responses are short and widely spaced. The student has to be encouraged to develop brief responses and continue the conversation. Pronunciation and intonation cause some difficulties in communication.
Some attempt at a response will be made during the conversation. Attempts at structured sentences will rarely achieve satisfactory communication.
Vocabulary will generally be insufficient to convey simple ideas.
Responses are so brief that little is communicated. The student hardly engages in conversation. Pronunciation and intonation patterns cause difficulty for the listener.
Completely limited/no attempt at a response.
Completely limited/no attempt at a response.
Completely limited/no attempt at a response.
1–2
0
Unit 1: Free time Focus on reading: skimming NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 1: In reading activities which assess skimming and scanning skills, students read a text (for example: an article, blog or web page) and answer a series of questions with short/single word answers. This type of activity requires students to identify and select relevant information (R1).
Learning objectives (LOs) There are five LOs in every unit. The first LO always focuses on the video which students watch and respond to at the start of the unit, while the other four LOs highlight the particular skills which students will use and develop throughout the unit. It is essential for students to understand the purpose of the unit, so the LOs box is important. Suggested activity: Start every unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
time. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Differentiated activities Note: Use differentiated activities to both support and challenge your students. Apply differentiated activities from the earlier units as you progress through the book. Just because an activity appears in Unit 1 does not mean that you cannot use it somewhere else. Support
i
Provide a list of five‒six possible answers. Students listen for the ones which the speakers actually mention (or do not mention).
ii
Give students a couple of minutes to read the video script in of the Coursebook before they watch the video. This will give them an idea of what to expect, which will support them while they watch and listen.
Challenge
i
Allow stronger students to listen to but not watch the video during the first playing. This will increase the challenge and encourage students to listen more carefully. Make sure these students are allowed to watch the video during the second playing.
ii
Students expand on their notes, adding one or two extra details for each speaker.
A Watch, listen and talk Note: In this new fifth edition, Section A in every unit is called Watch, listen and talk. Students will watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about the unit’s main topic, and carry out a task. These tasks will be quite broad in scope, asking students to make notes rather than answer comprehension questions. Then, after watching and listening, students have the chance to talk to each other about the task they completed, and to introduce their own ideas about the topic. This section provides an important introduction to the unit, and links directly to Section B Speaking and vocabulary.
1a Whole class then alone Explain that your students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about their free time. The videos are unscripted, i.e. the students were asked to respond to some prompts and to speak freely, without any help. As your students watch and listen, they should make notes about three things that the speakers enjoy doing, and three things that they do not enjoy doing in their free
1
Answers a Things that the students enjoy doing (any three from): drawing, painting, engraving, arts and crafts, creative writing, laying on the beach, laying on the grass, reading books (includes comic books and reading novels), swimming, playing tennis, watching a band perform. Three things that the students do not enjoy doing: going on the computer, playing video games, shopping.
1b Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about the things that they like and do not like doing in their free time. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits,
1
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary Note: In this new fifth edition, Section B in every unit is called Speaking and vocabulary. There is a specific link to Section A, and the unit topic is expanded further. Students are introduced to key vocabulary, and are given the opportunity to not only talk more about the topic, but also move into other areas of discussion relating to the topic. Very often, there are no right or wrong answers and it is worth pointing this out to students. Encourage them to speculate, to discuss their ideas and to give reasons for their choices.
1 Pairs or small groups With this type of question, when students write down their words or phrases, do not worry too much about language accuracy, as this may create a barrier to creativity. Use the question: What do these pictures show? to promote discussion in English. You could offer help to students with derivatives of words, for example: relaxing – relax, relaxed, relaxation. 2
When students have finished, gather class feedback. Again, remember that there are no right or wrong answers, so encourage all your students to participate – even the ones who need more support. Possible answers having fun, playing sport, meeting up with friends, surfing the internet and so on
When students have written down their ideas, get them to compare their lists in pairs, identifying similarities and differences. In class feedback, encourage students to talk not only about their own ideas, but also their partner’s, to give them some practice in using the third person singular.
Differentiated activities Support
i
Reduce the number of ideas they need to write – perhaps ask for just two or three.
ii
Get them to copy any ideas from Activity B1.
Challenge
Ask them to write complete sentences as in the Language Tip, rather than just notes.
C Reading 1 Pairs These pre-reading discussion questions are designed to get students thinking about how they read a text, and there are no right or wrong answers. The purpose is to encourage students to discuss in English (as much as possible), and they should not be corrected if they make mistakes. During feedback, establish that when we read for pleasure, we often read in a different way to when we are trying to find something quickly in a text (for example in an examination situation).
LANGUAGE TIP
TOP TIP
Throughout the Coursebook, you will find Language Tip boxes. The aim of these is to draw students’ attention to areas of language that may cause them problems. The tip in Unit 1 ‒ B Speaking and vocabulary will help students with Activity B2, so make sure you focus on it immediately after students have finished Activity B1.
Throughout the Coursebook, you will find Top Tip boxes. The aim of these is to draw students’ attention to areas of the examination, or particular examination-taking skills, that are especially important. Top Tip boxes can be useful for revision nearer to the examination and can be used by students to test each other on key areas. The first one in Unit 1 ‒ C Reading will provide more guidance and feedback to Activity C1.
In this new fifth edition, at the end of some Language Tips, there is a note directing students to an accompanying activity in their Workbook. You could use the Workbook for early-finishers to keep them busy, or for any student who needs extra support, or for whole class homework.
2 Alone
2 Alone, then pairs or small groups
This activity gives students an example of how important skim reading is. Give students 10 seconds to answer questions a and b.
Again there are no right or wrong answers here. Students work alone and add their own ideas to the table, using the previous activities for help if necessary.
Answers a six,
b
Datasource NewsFeed
Unit 1: Free time
3 Whole class
d
a million
Get students to tell you how they found the answers in the previous activity. Encourage them to be specific about the reading skill/s they used.
e
three of
4 Alone Make sure students understand what the question is asking for, so they know what they should be looking for in the text (the % sign). They do not need to write anything yet.
Answers Datasource Trainer
5 Alone The purpose of this activity is to show students that they do not need to write long answers for this type of question. While all the options a–e are correct, the best answer here is probably d (Datasource Trainer), because it is short and concise. No time would be wasted in writing a long answer. Make sure students understand that they simply need to include all the necessary information – which may only be one or two words. Complete, full sentences are not normally necessary.
TOP TIP
The second Top Tip in Unit 1 ‒ C Reading reinforces the point about students not having to write long answers for this type of question. It also draws students’ attention to the importance of including symbols or units of measurement in their answers, if required.
i
get a voucher for $5,
ii
21-day money-back, no-questions-asked guarantee,
iii monthly newsletter, iv membership card and number f
NewsFeed
g
Comic Fun
Differentiated activities Support
Tell/Show students in which part of the text they can find the answers to the questions. Challenge
Get them to work alone when they write their answers to Activity C6. If they finish quickly, ask them to write two or three more questions about the Datasource text, then give them to a partner to answer.
8 Alone Knowing where a text comes from can help students to understand more about its layout and content. Students quickly look at the text and then choose one of the options in the box. There is no right or wrong answer – the important thing is to encourage students to give a reason for their choice. However, because of the internet address at the top of the text, hopefully students will identify this text as coming from a website.
9 Pairs 6 Pairs Before they begin this activity, remind students not to write anything yet. Give them time to work through the exercises a‒g, asking and answering.
7 Pairs
Students need to have an effective strategy for approaching all types of examination exercises and reading the question carefully before doing anything else saves a lot of time.
Answer b, d, c, a
Working together, students write the answers to the questions in Activity C6. Then they exchange their answers with a different pair and check for similarities and differences. During class feedback, you can provide the answers if students have missed anything.
10 Alone
Answers a three (Puzzle Finder, Trainer, Comic Fun) b by signing-up to the Datasource loyalty scheme c Datasource NewsFeed
Suggested answers Different students may choose different key words. They can check their choices when they come to write their answers in Activity C11.
You can follow a similar approach to Activities C6 and C7, but this time students work alone. They do not need to write the answers to the questions yet, but should identify and note down the key word/s in each question.
3
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
a
Who
1b Pairs
b
When / next publication
c
How many / sections
d
maximum number / creative story
Highlighting or comparing with L1 can help students to remember things in L2, so use this activity to do exactly that.
e
Which section / angry
f
Which section / how many words
g
What / finished / do
h
How long / title
i
final box / not receive
2 Alone, then pairs The purpose of this activity is to encourage students to notice language in context, so that they can focus on both form and meaning. Allocate two to three minutes for students to skim the two texts (Datasource & You Write!) and to find at least three more examples. Then they can compare their answers with a partner.
TOP TIP
The Top Tip next to Activity C10 introduces students to the idea of key words in questions.
11 Alone, then pairs
4
Students write their answers in their notebooks. Remind them to keep their answers brief, but to include all the information that the questions ask for. When they have finished, students discuss and check their answers. Words in brackets below are optional; words separated by / are alternative answers.
Answers a teenagers (who want to share their writing) b 31st July c four / 4 d 275 e My Opinion f My Poem g complete and submit the form (electronically) h (maximum) five / 5 words i information about other products
D Language focus: Adjective + noun 1a Alone Focus on the position of the adjective before the noun in the examples. Point out that other languages may use a different word order. Also mention that it is possible – and quite common – to have more than one adjective. Then students complete the short definition about adjectives in part a.
Answer Adjectives are used to provide more information/details about nouns. In English, adjectives usually come before the noun.
Answers Datasource text: new + apps, special + discount + price, normal + download + price, amazing + app, up-to-date + app, online + puzzles, discount + price, amazing + images, amazing + price, incredible + app, fantastic + app, free + minutes, favourite + movies, new + releases, delightful (but) + simple + app, huge + number, next + purchase, monthly + digital + newsletter You Write! text: amazing + online + webzine, next + issue, funny (or) + serious + original + creative + stories, interesting + person, unusual + place, funny + pet, extreme + weather, inspired + writing, new + cinema, local + team, recent + match, other + products, such + information
Differentiated activities Support
i
Tell them to only look at one of the two texts.
ii
Provide students with a list of the answers and ask them to find these in the two texts
Challenge
i
Get them to find more than three examples.
ii
Students work in pairs, with each student looking at only one text. They then tell each other an adjective (without the noun) from their text, to see if their partner can remember the noun. Then they change roles.
3 Alone, then pairs Tell students to copy the table into their notebooks, then to fill in as many gaps as possible. Make sure they understand that not all the gaps can be filled, and that more than one answer may be possible in some cases. When they have done as much as they can, pair them up to
Unit 1: Free time
check their answers. Allow them to use different reference sources for help. Adjective
Noun
Adverb
Challenge
Ask students to write more complex sentences – perhaps with adjective + adjective + noun combinations.
Verb
amazing
amazement
amazingly
amaze
WORD TIP
special
speciality, specialisation, specialist
specially
specialise
incredible
incredulity
incredibly
This is a new feature in the fifth edition, which focuses on commonly confused pairs of words which students will have come across in the unit’s listening or reading texts. The Word Tip box includes contextualised examples for the words, and a request for students to complete an exercise in their Workbook.
delightful
delight
delightfully
funny
fun
funnily
serious
seriousness
seriously
original
origin,
originally
delight
originate
originator creative
creation, creator
creatively
create
E Speaking: Showing preferences and making suggestions Speaking is an important part of many English as a Second Language examinations. In this section, students have the opportunity to listen to and use language to express preferences and make suggestions.
4 Alone, then pairs
1 Alone
Students choose at least five more adjectives from the texts they have read and add them to their table. Then they add the corresponding noun, adverb and verb for each one. They can use different reference sources for help, then check their answers with a partner.
Tell students they are going to listen to a short exchange between two teenagers, which includes expressions showing a preference or making a suggestion. Ask students to give you some examples of both, and write these on the board. Then students listen to Maria and Christos, and count how many expressions they use that show a preference or make a suggestion. They can also check if any of their suggestions were used by the two teenagers.
5 Alone, then pairs There are many possible adjective endings. From the previous activities, students should be able to identify the following: -ing, -al, -ible, -ful, -y, -ious, -ive, -ent, -ed, but there are others too. Students then write three words for each adjective ending.
6 Alone
CD1, Track 2 Maria: Christos: M:
This activity gives students the opportunity to use adjective + noun combinations in their own writing.
Hi Christos, how are you? Hey Maria, I’m really great, what about you? Everything’s fine! Why don’t we go to the shopping centre later? I want to see if I can get some new trainers.
C:
Yes, we could do that, but I’d rather go at the weekend. Can you wait until then?
Support
M:
I suppose so, but why?
i
Reduce the number of sentences students need to write.
C:
ii
Tell students to use the adjective + noun combinations from the text in their own sentences.
Well, I get paid for my part-time job tomorrow, so I’ll have some money to spend.
M:
Fair enough! So let’s go at the weekend instead. But what are we going to do today?
Differentiated activities
5
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Answer three (underlined)
2/3 Alone, then pairs After listening, students look at Appendix 3 in their Coursebook and identify the three underlined phrases. Then, with their partner, they think of more ways to show a preference and make a suggestion and add them to a copy of the table in Activity E3. Do not worry about corrections at this stage.
This is quite a demanding activity, but it is extremely useful. The purpose is for students to prepare a short speech, which they will deliver to their class, then respond to any questions the class may have about the content of the speech. Allow sufficient planning and preparation time, and provide plenty of guidance where needed – particularly for students who need more support.
Differentiated activities
4 Alone
Support
Make sure students understand that giving a reason is an important part of showing a preference or making a suggestion. In this activity, they need to identify the reasons given by Maria and Christos.
Students work in small groups (maximum three students), made up of one stronger and two other students. They could all be involved in the preparation – writing down ideas, making a mind map, thinking of reasons for suggestions and preferences, and so on. The speech itself could be delivered by all members of the group, with different students taking on more or less, depending on their abilities. If there are visuals to support the content, students could be involved by displaying and/or explaining these. During the questions at the end, one student could field (but not answer) the questions.
Answers Maria – she wants to get some new trainers; Christos – he’ll have some money to spend
6
6 Alone, then whole class
LANGUAGE TIP
This is an important tip, because it highlights the structures used after showing a preference or making a suggestion. Show students that there are three possibilities: phrase + infinitive, phrase + ‘to’ infinitive, phrase + -ing.
After students have looked at the information in the box, you could get them to close their books and try to remember which phrases are followed by which ending. Stronger students could work with all three endings, while for weaker students, you could allocate just one phrase + ending.
5 Pairs Before students do Activity E5, make sure they read carefully the information in the Top Tip box in the Coursebook. This gives some general advice on how to approach a speaking assessment. You can pair students in various ways for this activity. To give support to students, you could pair them with someone stronger, but make sure the more confident student does not dominate the conversation. You could also give the role of the person suggesting to a weaker student and the person responding to a stronger student. There are no ‘right’ answers, so allow students to speak freely without interruptions and corrections. You can gather class feedback once students have finished.
F Reading 1 Alone, then pairs Students work alone and look at the headings for the six sections and decide in which section they think they will read the information (a‒f). Encourage them to have reasons ready for their answers, which they can then share with a partner.
2 Pairs In pairs, students think about other information they might read in each of the six sections. There are no right or wrong answers, but students should be encouraged to give reasons for their choices.
3 Alone Students read the text quickly and check their answers to Activities F1 and F2.
4 Whole class, then alone Go through questions (a‒j) with the class, checking that students understand what information each question is asking for. Then students write their answers.
Unit 1: Free time
a
Give students a few minutes to decide what type of information leaflet they are going to design. There are some suggestions in the Coursebook.
b
Next they need to decide what information sections the leaflet will contain. These could be the same as or similar to the ones in the Achileas Sports Centre leaflet, or completely different.
c
Students write about 50 words (depending on their level) for each section.
This activity could be done individually or with support, depending on the level of your students and the time you have available. Students are going to design their own information leaflet, loosely based on the one they have just looked at.
d
Finally, they write eight questions, two for each section, and exchange these and their information leaflet with another student (or group). Students then read the information leaflet and answer the questions they have been given.
Reflection
Exam focus
This is a new feature in the fifth edition, which reinforces the LOs given at the start of the unit by reminding students of what they have achieved.
Each unit contains at least one exam-style question since some contain more than one, which helps students to practise and develop specific exam-taking skills. In this unit, the focus is on answering questions through skim reading.
Answers a monthly, b 20:00, c $600, d two (Olympic pool and children’s starter pool), e The Achileas Sports Shop and the Achileas Restaurant, f four (lose weight, tone up, increase your strength or improve your health), g have an initial consultation with staff, h regular reviews, i to motivate you to reach your potential, j state-of-the-art machines and user-friendly equipment
5 Alone or pairs/small groups
They are then asked to self-assess by giving themselves a score from 1‒5 for each of the five LOs. Students will no doubt treat this quite light-heartedly, which is fine, but make sure they complete the task. At the end of the Reflection, students are asked to set themselves a personal goal, based on the scores. As they progress through the book, setting these goals will become easier, but in the early units you may want to guide them and even set the goals for them, after discussing with them. A typical person goal might be: I need to do more speaking practice so that I can make suggestions more confidently, or One area I should improve in is reading texts more quickly.
Reading: Exercise 1, skimming and scanning 1 a
in the main Market Square opposite the City Hall
b
stalls change on a daily basis
c
mending
d
Sunday
e
the arts, craft s and local produce market
f
street traders' market
g
gives them somewhere to sell things
h
trees and purpose-built covers
i
reputation for quality, affordable prices, improved public transport and people can talk to the makers of the products
7
Unit 2: 5 Television Entertainment Focus on reading: multiple matching Y
NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 2: In a multiple matching activity, students read a continuous text divided into sections, or a number of shorter texts, and answer a series of questions that test more detailed comprehension. Candidates match the correct answer to the question. This type of activity requires more intensive reading, and students will need to understand things which are implied but not directly stated (for example: gist, speaker’s purpose, intentions and feelings) (R4). Students also need to identify and select relevant information (R1), understand ideas, opinions and attitudes (R2) and show understanding of the connections between them (R3).
Learning objectives (LOs)
8
but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Pairs or small groups Students should look carefully at the pictures and discuss what type of programme each one shows, and say if the students they watched in the video mentioned any of the programme types. If you think your students may struggle with the types of programmes, supply a list of possible answers for them to choose from. Remember that some will have been mentioned in the video.
Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
2 Pairs or small groups
A Watch, listen and talk
If students have already thought of plenty of different types of television programmes, you could skip this stage.
1 Whole class then alone Explain that your students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about television programmes. As your students watch and listen, they should make notes about three different types of programme that the speakers like, and the programmes that they never watch. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a Types of programme that the students like (any three from): documentaries, history documentaries, biology documentaries, dramas, dance shows. Types of programme that the students never watch: soap operas, sports news, news.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about the television programmes that they like and do not like watching. Do not interfere too much,
Answers 1 cartoons 2 sports news 3 chat show 4 game show 5 dance show
Possible answers drama, soap, sport, news, quiz, talent, lifestyle (e.g. cooking, gardening), documentary, travel, cartoon and so on
LANGUAGE TIP
Make sure you focus students’ attention on the Language Tip before they attempt Activity B3.
3 Pairs In pairs, students discuss questions (a‒c). You could give students a time limit for each question, to make sure they do not spend too long on a single question.
Differentiated activities Support
It is important to make sure that students understand exactly what you want them to do in speaking activities. However, it is even more important to provide them with
Unit 2: Television
the vocabulary and structures they need to complete the activity successfully. This is particularly important for those students who may struggle to find the required language resources independently. In order to support students, do a couple of whole class examples, reinforcing the key structures that students could use, for example It depends on … , It varies … , I usually/sometimes/rarely … , My friends watch the same … , I like/dislike/hate … . Write these structures and vocabulary on the board so that students can refer to them. Challenge
For stronger students, get them to think of additional questions to use in the activity, for example: Do you think we watch too much TV nowadays?; How do you think television programmes will change in the future?; What would your life be like without television?
4/5 Pairs, then class feedback Show students a sample TV schedule, either something online or from a newspaper, so that they understand what they are going to create. Go through each of the stages so that students are aware of what they have to do, and remind students to look back at the previous activities for ideas about what to include. Give a clear time limit based on your knowledge of your students’ abilities. Try not to allow this to overrun. When each pair has created their TV schedule, get them to share with other students and decide which TV programmes they are going to watch next weekend.
6 Alone, then pairs or small groups Refer students back to Unit 1, Activity B2 of the Coursebook, in which they made a list of activities they enjoy and don’t enjoy doing. Now for this activity, they need to copy the table into their notebooks and complete the first two columns for themselves. They should then complete the third column by interviewing their partner and making a note of their responses. Make sure students are confident about asking the question: How many minutes each week do you spend (doing something)?
7 Pairs – Optional Working with a partner, students look at the graph and answer questions (a–e). In some IGCSE exam exercises, students may be asked to show their understanding of information represented in a graph or chart, so this type of analytical activity is useful preparation.
Answers a time spent by young people on activities, b minutes per week, c activities, d left-hand is vertical, bottom is horizontal, e the exact number of minutes
LANGUAGE TIP
This Language Tip includes an activity for students to complete, focusing on adjectives ending in -al and -ar, which describe shape or position.
Answers a cylindrical, b triangular, c diagonal, d hexagonal,
e
symmetrical,
f
three-dimensional,
g
spherical,
h
angular
8 Pairs Students work in pairs and decide which of the activities are represented in the graph in Activity B6. Give an example and/or double-check that students understand what all the data means (although everything should be clear from the previous activity). Make sure students appreciate that there are four extra activities that they do not need to use.
Suggested answers a doing voluntary work, b reading books and magazines, c doing homework, d doing sport, e playing computer games, f using social media
9 Whole class Give students the answers and hold a class discussion. Check if they were surprised by anything. Ask if they think the same data would be true for their country. Find out which four activities they did not choose and ask them why.
10 Alone or pairs The final activity in this section requires students to collect information and then display it in a graph or
9
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
chart. Students can work alone or in pairs if they need support, but whatever the case, you will need to guide students, particularly at the start. Make sure that they understand exactly what the outcome of the activity is (i.e. a graph or chart showing how much time students spend on various activities), and explain how they are going to reach that outcome (i.e. by collecting and recording the necessary information, then deciding on how to represent it). Different students will produce different variations of the outcome. If possible, display students’ work on the classroom wall, or even on a webpage, so that they can look at each other’s work and give feedback.
C Reading 1 Whole class, then pairs Go through the questions (a‒e) checking that students understand everything. Check the meaning of:
10
focal point (question a), transformed (b), provide an experience (c), predicted (d), here to stay (d) multitask (e), before students work in pairs to decide if they agree or disagree. They should not look at the text yet, and they can ignore the paragraph references for the moment. Encourage students during class feedback to give reasons for their choices.
2 Alone, then pairs Students quickly read the text to check if the writer has the same ideas. The paragraph number is provided so explain to students that this will help them to read quickly and efficiently. They should also start to realise that they do not need to read and understand everything in the text to find the information they need.
Answers a the writer disagrees: ‘But nowadays, every screen in the house …’, b agrees, c agrees, d agrees, e agrees
TOP TIP
Read through this Top Tip with your students – it is an important one for students to remember and apply because there will always be words that students (even the best ones) struggle with, and they need effective strategies to deal with them. However, also reinforce the point that we never need to understand every word in a text.
3 Alone, then pairs Your students’ written and spoken language will become more fluent if they can confidently combine adjectives and nouns. This activity focuses on the adjective + noun combinations from the text they have just read. Get students to work alone at first, matching the adjectives and nouns, and thinking about whether or not there are multiple possibilities.
Answers (in the text) a + 7, b + 1, c + 5, d + 8, e + 3, f + 2, g + 6, h + 4. However, there are countless other acceptable combinations, for example: daily + programmes, high-quality + televisions/programmes/viewing/sound systems/ wireless internet, high-quality/high-speed/top-quality/ widespread + wireless internet and so on. Encourage students to give you some examples of these combinations in sentences.
LANGUAGE TIP
This Language Tip highlights the importance of adjective + noun combinations, and there is an exercise in the Workbook to reinforce the language. It is useful for students to record chunks of language rather than individual words, and adjective + noun combinations is a good example.
4 Alone Students read the text again to check their answers to Activity C3.
5 Alone, then pairs Students will need to read the text in more detail for this activity, and you may wish to use differentiated activities for support and challenge.
Unit 2: Television
Differentiated activities Support
i
Allocate the four paragraphs to different students to reduce their reading load;
ii
Tell students in which paragraphs they can find the information.
2/3 Pairs, then whole class This activity works well as a competition, so you might like to set a time limit. If you have time, students could check their answers online or in a dictionary.
Differentiated activities Support
Challenge
i
Allow students to read the text again, but then to cover it while they answer the true/false questions;
ii
Ask students to correct any false information.
Answers a true (paragraph 1), b true (2), c false (2) ‒ usually attached, d true (2), e true 3), f true (4), g true (4)
D Language focus: Adverbs
i
Allow students to choose fewer letters.
ii
Students think of ten adjectives, but not using consecutive letters of the alphabet.
iii
Give students a bank of the first few letters of adverbs for them to complete, for example: com… = completely; fri … = friendly.
Challenge
i
Students write two words for each alphabet letter.
ii
When pairs have completed their ten adverbs, each pair passes its words to a second pair, who have to add other adverbs for each letter. When they finish, once again the words are passed on and the next pair tries to add more adverbs.
iii
Students have to write adverb + adjective combinations. 11
4/5 Alone, then pairs LANGUAGE TIP
Spend some time going through the content of the Language Tip, but also reassure students that they will also be doing practice activities in the Coursebook and the Workbook. Make sure students are clear about the different ways in which adverbs are used.
1 Pairs In this activity students need to apply their understanding of how adverbs are used. Do a couple of examples and then ask students to work alone to decide on the role of the adverbs in italics in each phrase from the text. Make sure they feedback which word the adverb is describing.
Answers a describing the verb transformed, b describing the verb makes, c describing the adjective large, d describing the adjective attached, e describing the verbs looks and sounds, f describing the adverb openly, g describing the adjective widespread
In these activities students need to use adverb phrases to complete (Activity D4) and then make the sentences (Activity D5). Ask them to work alone to start with, but make sure you go through the examples first, and perhaps do one or two further examples if necessary. Explain that there are many possible answers. In Activity D5, students have the chance to create their own sentences, using adverb phrases.
Differentiated activities Support
i
Supply (some of the) possible endings for students to match to the sentence stems.
ii
Give students some adverb + verb, adverb + adverb, or adverb + adjective phrases, which they then use to help them to complete the sentences.
Challenge
i
Ask students to change the linking word that appears in most of the sentences. For example: in a, change but to and and immediately a different ending is required. Students will need to use more of their own adverb choices in order to do this successfully.
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
ii
Even though Activity D5 asks students to make up their own sentences, you could challenge students by asking them to do this as soon as they have finished Activity D4.
Would
Wouldn't
Possible answers activity D4 a … it was incredibly expensive;
I would (I’d) be prepared to clean the car
b
playing really badly;
c
very dirty;
Cleaning the car is something I’d never do
d
absolutely stunning;
Cleaning the car is fine by me
I wouldn’t mind cleaning the car
e
all completely different colours;
I certainly wouldn’t ever clean the car
f
totally unexpectedly;
Cleaning the car is the last thing I’d do
g
really very boring;
I would enjoy cleaning the car
I can’t imagine myself ever cleaning the car
h
completely disagreed;
i
usually prefer to visit smaller shops;
j
really didn’t care.
E Speaking: Would/wouldn’t do 1 Whole class, then alone
12
Answers
Write the paragraph title on the board and get your students’ reaction to it. Find out what their daily expenses are. However, try not to talk too much about the points in Activity E2. Then give students a few minutes to read the paragraph and to check any unknown words or phrases. If you prefer, you could deal with these before the students read.
2 Small groups The paragraph should motivate students to discuss exercises (a‒d). As always, do not allow too much time for students to ask and answer; give them a minute or so for each exercise before asking them to move on to the next one. If you plan on doing whole class feedback (not essential) you might ask students to take some written notes during their discussions.
3 Pairs This activity focuses on useful language for saying would or wouldn’t do something. Do a couple of examples and then get students working with their partner to distinguish between would and wouldn’t phrases.
I’d be quite happy to clean the car
I wouldn’t have a problem with cleaning the car
There’s no way I’d ever clean the car
LANGUAGE TIP
Highlight the expressions to request something in a polite manner, and in particular the different verb forms (e.g. modal + have, to have, if I had and so on.).
4 Pairs Students have now seen plenty of language in order to complete this speaking activity successfully, so remind them to refer back to the previous activities and to use the expressions there. Do whole class feedback and get students to compare their ideas.
F Reading 1 Whole class, then pairs Check students understand what a blog is, and what style a blog is usually written in: A blog is a frequently updated online personal journal or diary. Really, it’s anything you want it to be. Blog is a short form for the word weblog and the two words are used interchangeably (http://blogbasics. com/what-is-a-blog). Then go through the four statements A‒D and quickly check if students agree or disagree with any of them. In the box there are eight phrases, which students need to look at and predict in which of the four blogs they would expect to read them. It does not matter if students are not 100% sure, but encourage them to give reasons for their answers – this is important. Remind them that there are two phrases from each of the four blogs. Do not supply any answers as students will find out for themselves when they read the text in Activity F3.
Unit 2: Television
2 Pairs
4 Alone, then pairs
Students need to carefully read the four conclusions (a‒d) and decide in which blog they would expect to read them, once again giving reasons for their choices. It does not matter if they are unsure. Do not supply any answers as students will find out for themselves when they read the text in Activity F3.
This is a multiple-matching activity, similar to the type found in examinations. There are four texts (the four blogs students have already seen) on the same topic or theme, written by four different people. Then there is a list of exercises (a‒j), all of which begin with: ‘Which person …?’ Students need to decide which blog writer is the answer to each of the exercises. The people may be chosen more than once.
3 Alone, then pairs
Students should do this on their own and then work with a partner to check their responses and to discuss where they found the relevant information to make their choices.
Students now read the four blogs and check their predictions from Activities F1 and F2. As this is a ‘look and find’ activity, i.e. they need to find words and phrases they have already seen, keep the time brief.
Differentiated Activities Support
i
ii
You could provide support by asking some students to work in pairs, rather than alone. Then allocate two blogs to each student, in order to reduce their reading load.
Answers a C,
f B,
b B,
g C,
c C,
h D,
d B,
i D,
e A,
j A
Again in pairs, but this time reduce the number of phrases and/or conclusions the students need to find.
Challenge
Working alone, see if students can look and find without referring back again to Activities F1 and F2.
WORD TIP
These words (obviously, apparently) are sometimes confused or misused, so go through the information and then direct students to Unit 2 of their Workbook to do the practice exercise.
TOP TIP
Multiple-matching activities require students to identify relevant information in one or a number of texts. Often the texts may say similar things, so students need to look for key words to correctly identify the information that is being asked for.
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 2.
Exam focus Reading: Exercise 2, multiple matching This is another multiple-matching activity, in the style of an examination exercise.
Answers a D, b C, c A, d B, e D, f C, g A, h C, i A, j B
13
Unit 3: Food Focus on writing NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 5: Students write approximately 100–150 (Core) or 150–200 (Extended) words of continuous prose, in response to a short stimulus which may take the form of pictures and/or short prompts printed on the paper. The question includes information on the purpose, format and audience, as well as the word count and how the marks are allocated. Specifically, students need to show that they can communicate information/ideas/opinions clearly, accurately and effectively (w1), organise ideas into coherent paragraphs using a range of appropriate linking devices (W2), use a range of grammatical structures and vocabulary accurately and effectively (W3), show control of punctuation and spelling (W4), and use appropriate register and style/format for the given purpose and audience (W5).
Learning ojectives (LOs) 14
Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
A Watch, listen and talk
to each other about the food and their reasons. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Whole class, then small groups Students look at the food pictures and say what the foods are, and which (if any) they like/dislike. Then put students into small groups to talk about Questions 1a and 1b. Remember that with this type of question, there are no right or wrong answers and it is worth pointing this out (again) to students. Encourage them to speculate, discuss their ideas and give reasons, without fear of being corrected if they make language mistakes. This is particularly important for those students who may be reluctant to participate because they are worried about being ‘wrong’ or making a mistake. Your role here is to monitor the discussion and to guide the feedback when students have made their choices. For 1c, check that students know what all the different foods are, and then get them to put the foods into two groups: ‘fast’ and ‘slow/traditional’ food. When they are ready, they can think of more examples of food for each group (1d).
1 Whole class, then alone Explain that your students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about food. As your students watch and listen, they should make notes about three different types of food that the speakers like, and the reasons they give. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a Different types of food that the students like (any three from): fish balls, spicy food, cake, moon cakes, pasta, traditional food from Kazakhstan, sweets. The reasons they give: it’s mostly made of flour, you can choose different sauces [fish balls] because the student is Indian [spicy food] the food is special to the student [moon cakes].
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk
2/3 Small groups, then pairs Explain to students that they are going to read an internet article called Eight things your fast-food worker won’t tell you. In small groups they should discuss what they think these eight things might be. Ask students if they think these things will be positive or negative, and to give their reasons. There is an example in the Coursebook, but you can provide an extra one or two if necessary. When they are ready, students work in pairs (Activity B3) and look at statements (a‒h), and decide if they are true or false. Encourage them to speculate and to give reasons. Do not give any answers at this point as students will find out when they read the text.
4 Alone Students look quickly at the text and check their answers to Activity B3. They should be ready to say in which paragraphs they found the information.
Unit 3: Food
Answers [a] true 8, [b] true 1, [c] false 5, [d] true 4,
[e] false 6,
WORD TIP
[f] true 2,
These two words (insist, persist) are commonly confused and/or misused. Go through the explanations and then direct students to the practice exercise in the Workbook.
[g] true 7, [h] true 3
5/6 Alone, then pairs Put students into A/B pairs. Each student has four words or phrases from the text to check. When they are ready, students share their ideas and check that their partner has the right meanings.
LANGUAGE TIP
The text includes examples of different ways to express if: providing, as soon as, supposing. Ask students to replace the highlighted words with if to notice that the meaning is similar; however, also point out that the highlighted phrases are not always interchangeable. For example, you cannot replace supposing with providing and vice versa, but both could be replaced by if. Go through the examples and then direct students to the practice exercise in the Workbook.
7 Alone Students work on their own and choose six of the eight words and phrases from the previous activities to use in sentences of their own. Give students time to share their sentences and compare how they have used the words and phrases.
C Reading
Differentiated activities
1 Alone, then pairs
Support
Tell students that they are going to read a newspaper article about fast food in Italy and to write down three things that they consider to be Italian fast food. Then, for questions (a–f) in this activity, students work alone, although they can use reference sources for help. Once they have completed all the questions, they can join up with a partner and compare answers. The activity requires students to look in close detail at the text.
i
Reduce the number of sentences, or choose words that you think students will find easier to use in their own writing.
ii
You could also give students some vocabulary to help them write their sentences, for example: cabinet + place, food, stored.
Answers a (i) decade, (ii) arm, (iii) boost, (iv) potential, (v) exploit b set foot = arrive, suspicion = doubt/uncertainty, offensive = campaign/attack, playing to = relying on, commercial = advertisement c a = workforce, b = worldwide, c = market share, d = sector, e = target
Challenge
Ask students to use all the eight words and phrases, and/or ask them to choose two or three more words from the text and to write them in sentences of their own.
d
Noun
Verb
Adjective
finance
finance
financial
investment (thing) investor (person)
invest
invested
culture
cultural
provision (thing) provider (person)
provide
dinner (thing) diner (person)
dine
dining
Adverb
Noun translation/s
financially
culturally
Depends on students
15
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
e
f = supplier/seller/producer, g = close/shut down, h = metres, i = branch/outlet, j = burgers/food/sandwiches
f
i
30% = decrease in foreign investment in Italy since 2007, €350 million = the amount McDonald’s plans to spend in Italy in the coming years, 3,000 = the number of new jobs to be created
ii
450 = McDonald’s restaurants in Italy, €1 billion = estimated annual sales in Italy, 10% = McDonald’s market share in Spain and France, 2% = share of ‘informal eating out’, 3% = target in coming years for ‘informal eating out’
iii 5,000 = number of people who visited McDonald’s on its final day
Students working alone need to match the four common uses (a‒d) of the to-infinitive with the eight examples (1‒8) given. Before they do this, go through the four uses, checking that students can understand the differences.
Answers a 4 and 8, b 1 and 7,
c
3 and 6,
d
2 and 5
2/3 Alone, then pairs
2 Alone, then pairs
Students begin by working on their own to do two things: (1) identify the key word/s in questions (a‒g), and (2) look at text again and identify where the answers to the questions are. They do not need to write the answers yet. For Activity D3, students compare their answers, then together write the answers to the questions.
Do an example and then students work alone to unjumble the letters and make complete sentences which include a to-infinitive form. Allow students to check their answers together before doing class feedback.
Challenge
Answers a She appears to have hurt her head. b My instructions are to write 150 words. c We need to leave immediately. d Would you like to eat anything? e I’m calling to find out about your father. f He asked me not to come with him.
Encourage students not to look back at the text and instead answer the questions from memory.
3/4 Alone, then pairs
Differentiated activities 16
the purpose of something or someone’s opinion about something. The text in the previous section includes several examples: … is opening more than 100 new restaurants to convert pizza lovers to its burgers; This is our way to show we believe …; … which strives to preserve traditional … .
Support
Show students in which paragraph to look for the answers, and also reduce the number of questions they need to do.
Answers a pizza-lovers, b i open more than 100 new restaurants, ii spend €350 million, iii hire 3,000 people, c they were suspicious, d Italy, e made sandwiches with crusty bread filled with parmesan cheese and sliced ham, f a theme park, g to make way for a new fashion shop
D Language focus: to-infinitive 1 Whole class, then alone The to-infinitive (ie, to + base form of the verb) is used in many different sentence constructions, often expressing
Once again students work alone and then pair up to check their answers. All the sentences come from the two texts the students have read, and they can refer back to these in Activity D4.
Answers a + 6, b + 1, c + 2, d + 7, e + 4, f + 3, g + 5
5 Alone In this final activity students can make their own sentences containing a to-infinitive form.
Various possible answers a He arrived too late to see the performance. b Do you understand where to go? c The students need a library to study in. d You brother has gone to see about the meal. e I’d like you to tell me where it is.
Unit 3: Food
E Writing: Informal letters Students are going to write a letter to a friend about a fast-food restaurant they have recently visited. Before they actually write their letters, there is a series of activities which involve planning and preparing for the writing. Depending on the time you have available, and the level of your students, you may decide not to ask students to complete all the activities.
1 Pairs, then whole class Students discuss questions 1a‒c together. You may consider limiting the time for each question so that this first activty does not take up too much time. When students are ready, do whole class feedback, but remember there are no right or wrong answers to the questions.
to fully grasp what the question is asking them to do – if they haven’t spent a minute or two checking it. Questions often use the words explain, describe, write, say, and these two activities ask students to consider what these words mean, then to use them to complete the gaps in an exam-style question.
Answers a write, b explain, c describe, d say
TOP TIP
2 Pairs Working in pairs, students complete a copy of the table, adding their ideas about the advantages and disadvantages of fast-food and traditional restaurants.
Possible answers
5 Pairs, then whole class
Fast-food restaurants Advantages
quick service price availability
The Top Tip next to Activity E4 in the Coursebook helps students understand the way in which exam questions may be written, and the things they should look out for.
Disadvantages
limited choice nutritional value packaging
In pairs, students think of expressions they could use to open and close an informal letter. You could divide the class into groups: one half thinking of expressions to open an informal letter and the other half to think of expressions to close one. During feedback, put all the expressions on the board for students to copy into their notebooks.
Possible answers Traditional restaurants
Opening phrases
Closing phrases
Hi Satish!
Best wishes
Dear Satish
All the best
Hello Satish
See you soon
Thanks for your letter.
Take care
Lovely to hear from you.
Yours
3/4 Pairs
How are you?
Love
We often tell students to ‘read the question carefully’ before writing their answers. We do this because we know that some students may miss the point of the question – or fail
How are things?
Lots of love
Hope you’re well.
Speak to you soon
Advantages
choice atmosphere health value
Disadvantages
more expensive slow service availability
17
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
6 Pairs In this activity, students compare two letters written in response to the previous exam-style question. They do not need to correct the letters, nor rewrite them; the point here is for students to recognise a good answer and a notso-good answer, and to say why.
Answers Letter B is the better of the two because: the layout is easier to follow, the writer has fully responded to all the points in the question, there is no unnecessary content, the level of accuracy is good with a wide range of vocabulary. Letter A is not as effective because: the writer has not used any paragraphs and therefore the content is more difficult to follow, not all the points in the question have been dealt with, there is a lot of unnecessary information, there is a higher level of inaccuracy and a limited range of vocabulary.
7 Pairs This activity asks students to identify specific elements within each letter. 18
Answers a B, b A, c B,
d
neither,
e
A
8 Pairs Having looked at and practised using adjectives and adverbs in earlier units, students should now be reasonably confident about improving Letter A. There is no single correct answer; allow your students to play around with the language, to be creative, to try out different word combinations, and to share their ideas. If time permits, you could do feedback by putting ideas on the board and getting students to decide which are the best improvements. They can then use some of these ideas when they write their own answers in the next activity.
9 Small groups Divide students into small groups to discuss and plan their own responses to the exam-style question in Activity E4. While they will be writing their letters on their own, discussing the content in groups will give students support if needed. Encourage them to use a copy of the mind map supplied in order to make their notes.
TOP TIP
Before students do Activity E10, focus on the Top Tip next to Activity E7 in the Coursebook, which gives important information about how to approach this type of question.
10 Alone, then pairs Set a reasonable time limit for students to write their answers. Remember that this is not a test! The whole purpose of this section is to guide and support students in writing an informal letter, so even at this stage, you should be available to help them. Also, allow students to ask each other for help. If you have Core and Extended students in the same class, remember that they have different word counts (Core 100‒150, Extended 150‒200). Encourage students to look back through the section and make use of some of the opening/closing phrases from Activity E5, as well as their ideas from Activities E8 and E9. They could also refer to Maroulla’s letter (B) as a good model of what is required. When students have finished, they can look at each other’s answers and provide feedback.
TOP TIP
This Top Tip highlights the fact that students will receive marks in two broad areas: content and language. There is a copy of the marking scheme for assessing extended writing in the Assessment criteria for writing and speaking section in this book.
F Speaking: Expressing opinions 1 Alone Students listen to a short exchange. As they listen, they need to decide in how many different ways the two speakers express their opinion. There are four examples, underlined in the audioscript here.
CD1, Track 3 Anna: To my mind, fast food restaurants are here to stay. Terry: If you ask me, people are starting to realise how unhealthy fast food is. Anna: But it’s so convenient! In my opinion, people are not going to give that up. Terry: Know what I think? People are lazy and will always take the easy option!
Unit 3: Food
2 Small groups
3 Pairs, then whole class
Refer students to the audioscript in Appendix 3 of their Coursebook to focus on the four underlined phrases. Then they should work together to think of more phrases to express opinions. Use the Language Tip for feedback and to provide students with more phrases.
Throughout the unit, students have been talking and writing about fast food and traditional food. For this activity, they are going to be involved in a class discussion (led by either the teacher or one or two students) about the advantages and disadvantages of the two types of food. Give students time to plan their ideas before the discussion begins, referring them back to previous activities in the unit for help. Also take time to look at the Top Tip, which gives some advice on considering both content and language. At the end of the Top Tip there is a suggestion for students to look at the speaking-test cards in Appendix 1 of the Coursebook. In doing so, they will understand that the phrases they have practised in this unit will help them to discuss more or less any topic.
LANGUAGE TIP
Point out which expressions are more common in spoken and written English, and encourage students to start using other expressions, to introduce more variety into their spoken and written language. Remember that assessment is on variety and breadth of language, just as much as on accuracy.
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 3.
Exam focus Writing, Exercise 5 There are two extended writing questions which reflect the type of questions students may see in an IGCSE examination. Both require students to write in an informal style (1 = letter to a friend, 2 = email to a cousin), and both could be used with either Extended or Core candidates. When marking your students’ writing, refer to the assessment criteria in the Assessment criteria for writing and speaking section in this book. 1
i
Here are two sample answers written by (i) an IGCSE Core student and (ii) an IGCSE Extended student. Both these attempts would probably score in the top mark band for both content and language. Core
Dear Sebastian, How are you? I haven’t seen you in a very long time! Last night was my dad’s birthday and I made him that pizza recipe that we saw together on television. With my mum’s
help we managed to make three different pizzas, but one of them was a bit burnt. My dad, mum and my sister ate our pizzas outside in our garden and we all agreed that they tasted very nice. My mum and dad liked the Margherita pizza most, but my sister and I liked the one with the tuna and olives. I think our dog enjoyed the pizza most of all, he stole half of the burnt Pepperoni! Lots of love, Martha [117 words] ii Extended Dear Anna, Hi and how are you? It’s been such a long time since we last spoke! I’m so glad that I will get to see you in a few weeks’ time. As soon as we meet up I will cook for you the meal I made for my brother yesterday, moussaka! As you know, it was Alex’s birthday yesterday and instead of giving him a present he asked me to make his favourite meal for him instead. He loves moussaka more than any other food on this planet! Unfortunately, it takes around two whole days to make; it is such a long process! After two long days of preparation and cooking, my whole family, mother, father, brother, aunts, uncles and grandparents, sat in the garden together under the olive tree and enjoyed the deliciously home-made moussaka. I was really proud of myself!
19
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Just in case you don’t know, moussaka is made from aubergines, courgettes, meat and potatoes all placed on top of each other like a tower. It’s really yummy and everyone said I made it perfectly! I hope you will enjoy it as much they did! See you soon, Katerina [192 words] 2
i
Here are two sample answers written by (i) an IGCSE Core student and (ii) an IGCSE Extended student. Both these attempts would probably score in the top mark band for both content and language. Core
Hi Andrew, How are you? You will not believe what happened to me a few days ago! We went with a few friends of mine to this new fast-food restaurant that has opened in town. My cousin visited it a few days ago and he told me to try one of their burgers, he thought they were awesome!
20
So we decided on Saturday to go and have dinner there and I ordered a burger. The restaurant was really cool, there was loud music playing and the waiters were really great! Our food came quickly but as I opened my burger to take out the lettuce (because I hate lettuce), I saw two, dead flies! I couldn’t believe it and I refused to eat the burger! Thankfully the restaurant didn’t make us pay for our dinner but I will not be going back there again! Speak to you soon,
Not long after we were all happily enjoying our meal again and laughing about our unusual experience at the restaurant. In the end we had a great meal! I hope to hear from you very soon. Lots of love, Leila [164 words]
Reading, Exercise 1, skimming and scanning There are two reading exercises which reflect the type of Exercise 1 students may see in an IGCSE examination.
1 Hospitality with dates Answers a coffee and dates b 1.1 million metric tonnes c shops, markets, oases, sides of every major street, every garden and yard d 80% e medicinal properties f they are one of the best sources of food and are easy to grow g cancer h they contain anti-inflammatory properties i it is lost j shade from the sun, thatching/roofing on huts, support pillars in buildings
Anya [149 words]
2 Shellfish in Oman ii Extended Dear Adiba, Last Friday night I went with a large group of friends to our favourite Lebanese restaurant. We were celebrating our graduation from school. What we thought was going to be a normal evening out with friends, turned out to be a very unusual and exciting experience! We arrived at the restaurant and were seated at my favourite table outside in the garden. The food was soon brought to us, but as we were eating, a very large bird landed on our table and started stealing large pieces of bread. Some of my friends got scared of the bird and ran away, but I thought it was very funny! The waiters eventually managed to get rid of the bird and were very apologetic.
Answers a research into marine life is growing stronger b because of the pearls they contain c the shores of Dhofar d produces Omega-3 fatty acid e it has only one shell f young ones live in small groups underneath medium-sized rocks; adults live in groups of up to 12, in cracks in rocks g shallow, cold, nutritious, brightly lit water h because of its environmental requirements for cool water conditions i face mask and knife (not fins) j fins can damage the location
Unit 4: 5 Transport Entertainment Focus on listening: short extracts Y
NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Listening Exercise 1: Students need to demonstrate that they can listen to four short extracts and answer questions on each. Questions require short answers, no longer than three words. Text types are recorded phone messages or brief dialogues (formal or informal). Specifically, students need to show that they can listen and select relevant information (L1).
Learning objectives (LOs) Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that your students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about methods of transport. As your students watch and listen, they should make notes about three methods of transport that the speakers mention, and the reasons they give. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a Methods of transport that the students mention (any three from): walking, bicycles, cars, planes, taxis, buses, trains. The reasons they give: because it’s faster, you are treated well, you get food [planes] there are a lot, it’s free [buses] they are fast, they are efficient [trains].
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Pairs Focus on the four pictures in the Coursebook and quickly check that students can tell you what the types of transport are (from top left clockwise: train, balloon, camper van, plane). Then give students a few minutes to confirm their favourite method of transport and their reasons.
2 Alone, then pairs Students work alone to identify ten different methods of transport in the word snake. This activity is good for checking spelling and for recognising word boundaries. After finding the ten words, students check with their partner and then see how many of the methods of transport in the word snake they thought of in Activity B1.
3 Pairs Students discuss with their partner which of the methods of transport they would prefer for going on holiday – and give reasons. They should also discuss if their choice depends on the type of holiday. You may need to prompt them: skiing holiday, sightseeing holiday, shopping holiday and so on. Allow students plenty of freedom to do this activity – monitor them, but do not interfere in their discussions. Take a note of anything particularly interesting you hear. Also note down any errors that you feel need to be dealt with in feedback.
4 Alone, then pairs Students copy and complete the table with their own ideas. They should choose five or six methods from the previous activities, but this will depend on how much time you have available. To challenge students, they could make notes about more methods. There are no right or wrong answers. Try to get students to write two or three ideas for each method of transport, then compare their answers.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about the methods of transport that they prefer and their reasons. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
5 Pairs Students decide together which method of transport is the most expensive, then make a ranked list. They need to consider all the factors that could make a method of transport more or less expensive. For flying by plane, for example, they might also consider the cost of getting to the airport. If going by car, they should consider the cost of 21 petrol and parking fees.
21
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
C Listening 1 1 Pairs Students discuss which of the methods they think they will hear about and try to give reasons for their choices. There are no right or wrong answers.
2a‒c Alone, then pairs This activity requires students to answer three questions, which are designed to give them a reason for listening and to test basic comprehension. Make sure students understand what they have to do and that they are ready to listen before you start the CD. Allow students to check their answers together before you give feedback.
CD1, Track 4
22
Speaker 1 Well, of course, we had booked everything well in advance, because in Britain these services get full very early, and we didn’t want to be disappointed. Anyway, we got to the terminus in central London in plenty of time and we stood on platform 13E for Edinburgh. It was a beautiful summer’s day. There was me, my wife Julia and the three children. They were still quite young then: three, six and eight, I think. We were supposed to leave at 8.30 in the morning and, as it got closer to our departure time, we all began to get quite excited. By 8.30, we had started to get a little bit anxious because the platform was completely empty, apart from us five with all our luggage. At 9.00, Julia told me to go and find out what was happening, so I went to the booking office to make enquiries. And yes, you can guess what was wrong – we were 12 hours early! Our departure time was 8.30 p.m., not a.m. I had misread the time on the tickets. Speaker 2 They call it an airport, but it’s really just a field. My sister had booked me a flight as a treat for my 13th birthday, which was May 20th, three years ago, and I must admit that I was absolutely dreading it! I’ve never really enjoyed flying, and the thought of going up in the air for 30 minutes in a basket really didn’t appeal to me. I couldn’t understand how the thing was driven and steered, and I think that’s what put me off. But once we got up in the air, at 9 o’clock in the morning, it was spectacular – the most beautiful views of the hills, fields and villages below, with the sun sparkling on the river. We didn’t want to come down!
Speaker 3 I had investigated all the different options available to me and, in the end, this was by far the cheapest, at only $275. Of course, it wouldn’t be nearly as fast as going by plane, but the cost was far less and I would be able to see something of the countryside. Some friends had travelled the same route the previous year and had said how brilliant it had been, so I wasn’t really worried. What they hadn’t told me was how uncomfortable these vehicles are when you’ve been in one for almost two days. It’s very difficult to sleep, and there are no toilets or washing facilities, so you’ve got to hang on until the scheduled stops, usually every four to five hours. When I finally arrived in the south of Spain, after nearly 48 hours on the road, I slept for over 19 hours! Speaker 4 We set off in the afternoon, as the sun was starting to drop, and with it the temperature, although it was still incredibly hot and humid. We knew the journey would take about two hours, so we had time to reach the oasis before dark, and before the temperature plummeted. With me was my twin sister, Amelia. She was used to riding horses, so this wasn’t as difficult for her as it was for me. Even so, she said that riding without a saddle was very uncomfortable, and I had to agree with her! She also complained about not having a riding hat, but I told her she’d look pretty silly if she did! We moved at a leisurely pace – these wonderful animals won’t be rushed – and we had time to be amazed by the beautiful scenery all around us and, as dusk fell, in the sky as well. We arrived, made camp, ate and fell into a deep sleep under the stars. Answers a 1 = train, 2 = balloon, 3 = coach, 4 = camel b 2 and 4 c 2 and 4
2d Alone, then pairs This activity encourages students to think about how they identified the answers to the three questions by asking them what information they focused on. There are no right or wrong answers, but it is important for students to think about their methods for being successful when they do a task.
3 Alone, then pairs Students listen a second time and answer the questions for each of the four speakers. Allow them to check with
Unit 4: Transport
their partner before you provide feedback. If you think that students may struggle, you could split the listening into smaller sections, letting them hear just one or two speakers, then checking answers before they listen to the next one/s.
Answers Speaker 1 a platform 13E b four c (quite) excited d the platform was empty e went to the booking office to make enquiries f misread the time on the tickets
8.30 a.m.
Length of journey
slowly (at a leisurely pace)
e
beautiful scenery and the sky
Support
Let students look at the audioscript before they listen (but not while they listen). This will provide support by giving students an idea of what to expect. Set a time limit so they do not spend too long on this – the idea is for them to skim the audioscript to get an idea of the content and to build up their confidence before they listen. Students who need more support could read as they listen. Another option is to give them the chance to look at the audioscript after they have listened (but before they answer the questions) to check what they have understood. Challenge
Speaker 3 a cheaper, able to see countryside b four (slow, uncomfortable, difficult to sleep, no toilets, no washing facilities) c every 4–5 hours d nearly 48 hours
Departure time
d
Differentiated activities
Speaker 2 a birthday present b 16 c because she had never enjoyed flying d 30 minutes e exhilarated, delighted (not given – students need to infer)
Speaker 1
Speaker 4 a afternoon b hot and humid c twin sister
Ask students to write two or three extra pieces of information about each speaker (in addition to answering the questions in the Coursebook).
4 Pairs Students copy the table, then work together to complete it. Not all the gaps can be filled. Answers
Speaker 2
Speaker 3
9.00 a.m. 30 minutes
Speaker 4
afternoon 48 hours
2 hours
Arrival time Weather / time of year
beautiful summer day
sunny, May
Speaker’s feelings
excited, then anxious
worried, then happy
Speaker with who?
wife and three children
Cost
hot and humid not worried, tired and uncomfortable
amazed twin sister
free (a gift)
$275
23
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
5 Alone
7c Alone, then same pairs
Students can refer to the audioscript in Appendix 3 of the Coursebook for extra support and to check their answers to Activities C3 and C4.
If you can supply dictionaries, or if your school has digital resources, then this activity will work well. The idea is for students to work alone, researching the meaning of the words in either column A or B. Once they have an idea about their words, students should work together and discuss what they have found out. All the words appear in the next listening text.
6 Alone, then pairs There are several stages for this final activity in Section C. Firstly, students need to choose a method of transport (not one of the four they have just been hearing about). They should not tell their partner their choice. Next, each student writes a paragraph of around 80 words about their method of transport, including the information listed in the Coursebook, but not giving away the method of transport (the same as in the listening activity C1). Next, students write four or five questions about the content of their paragraph for their partner to answer. Finally, students exchange their writing and the questions, then answer the questions and try to guess the method of transport.
Differentiated activities Support
Reduce the number of words and/or get them to write five or six individual sentences, rather than a complete paragraph. 24
Challenge
Increase the number of words students have to write and get them to include more details, for example, in which country the journey took place, the arrival time, people who travelled with the speaker, etc.
C Listening 2 7a Whole class, then pairs/small groups Focus on the picture of the motorbike near to Activity C7 of the Coursebook and ask students what they can see and what they think might have happened. Then refer them to Activity C7 and go through the information about the boda-boda motorbike taxi. Next, working with a partner, students discuss questions a (i)‒(iv). Make sure students understand that there are no right or wrong answers.
7b Different pairs Put students with a different partner for this next activity, then get them to read the information b (i)–(v) and the numbers in the box, and ask them to complete the gaps. Once again, it does not matter at this stage if they are right or wrong. The point is to provide them with some information and key vocabulary relating to the information they are about to hear – and to engage their interest in the subject. Do not provide any answers yet.
8 Alone Students listen for the first time and check if their answers for Activity C7b were correct. If you want to make this less challenging, you could tell the students to call out when they hear the part of the text that confirms the information in Activity C7b. As all the information in C7b contains a number – (i) 40%, (ii) 62%, (iii) twice, (iv) 3343 and 2011, (v) 1800 – you could tell students to listen out for these particular numbers.
Answers i 40%, ii 62%, iii twice,
iv
3343,
v
1800
CD1, Track 5 For many years, boda-bodas have been called Uganda’s silent killers. Boda-bodas, our country’s ubiquitous motorbike taxis, snake through traffic jams, navigate potholed roads and provide much-needed employment for young people. They are also injuring and killing thousands every year, monopolising hospital budgets and destroying livelihoods. Since they appeared on the streets of Uganda in the 1960s, the number of boda-bodas has swelled. One recent news report estimated that there were more than 300 000 bikes operating in the capital, Kampala. As a result, the number of motorbike accidents has increased dramatically. According to the Injury Control Centre, there are up to 20 boda-boda-related cases at Mulago National Referral Hospital in Kampala every day and the strain on the country’s limited health budget is growing. About 40% of trauma cases at the hospital are from boda-boda accidents. The treatment of injured passengers and pedestrians accounts for almost twothirds of the hospital’s annual surgery budget. While boda-bodas are helping to reduce youth unemployment – one recent study estimated that 62% of young people in Uganda are jobless – the impact of a serious injury can be catastrophic for riders and their families. Ali Niwamanya, 25, a boda-boda driver, spent three months in Mulago hospital and another five at home recovering after a collision with a car in the capital in September. Niwamanya
Unit 4: Transport
is now in debt after taking out a 3 million Ugandan shilling loan (that’s about 1200 US dollars) for a new bike. While the human impact of the boda-boda craze is evident in the packed hospital wards, the strain that road fatalities could have on the economy is worrying politicians. The death toll on Uganda’s roads is twice the average across the rest of Africa. There were 3343 road deaths in 2011, but the World Health Organization believes the figure could be more than double that. Some people are warning that, in the very near future, the death toll from Uganda’s roads will be higher than that from diseases such as malaria. Some measures are being taken to try to halt the problem. Last month, the government announced that more money would be available to improve and maintain roads. Even though road safety measures were not specifically included within the budget, the government is establishing a national agency to run campaigns and manage roads. In Kampala, the Capital City Authority is introducing regulations, including registration of drivers, first-aid training, reflector jackets and helmets, and a monthly fee of 20 000 Ugandan shillings paid by the city’s 250 000 motorbike taxis. Other initiatives are also springing up. The Global Helmet Vaccine Initiative is holding a one-day workshop for 100 riders, part of a national scheme under which it has trained 1800 boda-boda riders in basic road safety. On completion, each participant receives a yellow helmet bearing the slogan: ‘Your life is your wealth.’ Adapted from www.theguardian.com
LANGUAGE TIP
Recognising suffixes can help students in decoding unknown words. Point out the different verbs which are formed from -ion nouns. There is an exercise in the Workbook for students to complete.
D Language focus: Tenses 1 Alone, then pairs Getting students to recognise aspects of grammar in context is an effective learning strategy. Activity D1 asks students to look at four sentences from the audioscript and decide which verb time (tense) is referred to by the underlined verbs. Let them work alone and then check their answers with a partner.
Answers a present perfect, b past simple,
c
present continuous,
d
‘will’ future
2 Pairs With a partner, students complete the rules for the four tenses and decide what the function is for each one, as they are used in the listening text. Remember that structures/tenses can have more than one function – for example, one function of the present continuous is to describe actions happening at the moment of speaking, but in 1c, the function is different.
WORD TIP
At IGCSE level, we should be helping students to become more selective about the words they use. The words catastrophe and disaster are quite similar in meaning, but the former is stronger and more extreme, and is more descriptive. There is an exercise in Unit 4 of the Workbook for students to complete.
9 Pairs Using the numbers in the box, students work together and complete the gaps in a–f. Then they listen again to check their answers. If students need practice in saying numbers and dates in English, get them to try saying aloud the completed sentences in Activity C9. Answers a (i) 1960s, b (ii) 300 000, c (iii) 20,
d
(iv) 25,
e
(v) 20 000, (vi) 250 000,
f
(vii) 100
Answers b past simple regular verbs add -ed, many irregular forms Function = to talk about a complete action in the past c present continuous am/is/are + verb -ing Function = something happening around this time, a trend d ‘will’ future will + infinitive Function = making a prediction based on evidence
3 Alone, then pairs In this activity, students decide which is the most suitable tense for the verbs in brackets, in order to complete sentences a–g. In some cases, there might be more than one possible answer, so make sure students are able to
25
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
give reasons for their choices. Let them work alone and then share their answers with their partner.
Answers a will get, b have seen, c are thinking, d told, caught,
e
is trying,
f
will be,
g
has had
E Speaking 1/2 Alone These two activities focus on giving students some clear models of structures to show surprise. Get students to listen once, then to listen again and write down the four phrases that show surprise: What surprised me more than anything was … The last thing I expected to hear about was … I can’t believe … I had no idea about …
26
CD1, Track 6 i Male teenager:
The thing that surprised me more than anything was the number of boda-bodas on the roads.
ii Female teenager:
What surprised me most was the number of injuries and deaths.
iii Male teenager:
I couldn't believe how long Ali Niwamanya was in hospital for.
iv Female teenager:
I had no idea about the rate of unemployment.
3 Small groups Students discuss the three questions a–c. Encourage them to use the phrases from the previous activities during their discussions. As with all speaking activities, make sure you provide feedback and do not just focus on students’ errors. Give them positive feedback about their ideas and the way in which they practised the key phrases.
look at the table and check they understand what it shows. Then, in small groups, they can answer the questions. There is no need for any writing – this is a speaking activity. For the final question (g), students need to create a graph based on some information from the table. This could be a bar graph, a pie chart, a line graph or similar. Help students to select information from the table (e.g. the statistics for dangerous driving from January to November, or all the statistics for one particular month such as June), then create a graph or chart that displays the information.
Answers a the information is still being checked and is not final b (i) deaths; (ii) everyone has to pay the same amount c RTA = Road Traffic Act and detention is when the police take charge of a vehicle d an offence is something done against the law, so this refers to illegal actions by road users (drivers) e ‘Careers’ f leaflets, papers, books, articles
5 Pairs Students now discuss the information in the table by asking each other five questions. Go through the example in the Coursebook first, making sure students understand that they need to ask a follow-up question (What surprises you most … ?) in order to practise the key phrases from earlier in this section. Monitor and give feedback.
6 Small groups This activity extends the speaking practice for this section. If time permits, you could turn this into a class debate, with students offering different responses to the question: If you were in charge of solving traffic problems and reducing the accident rate, what would you do?
F Listening
4 Alone, then small groups Many exams require students to look at information given in a table or other graphic format and to show that they have understood certain elements. This is also an important life skill, as we often need to look at graphs and interpret the data shown. The table in this activity contains a lot of information, both in words and numbers. Before students attempt the questions, give them a few minutes to just
TOP TIP
The Top Tip near Activity E6 of the Coursebook advises students to read the questions and underline key words in listening activities, and it is worth reinforcing this. Give students plenty of opportunities to practise thinking about the type of answer that a question requires – for example: a number, a nationality, a street name, and so on.
Unit 4: Transport
1 Pairs After focusing on the Top Tip, students should practise identifying what information questions a–d require in their answers.
Answers a (i) an article, something (ii) a number b (i) type of weather (ii) a number of degrees c (i) location, somewhere (ii) activity d (i) name of sport (ii) price
to sunny spells in the early morning and there will be high clouds by the end of the morning. Heavy showers are forecast for the late afternoon and evening. The top temperature is expected to be 18 °C.
C Marina: College secretary:
Of course. Are you interested in anything in particular, or do you want details of everything we offer?
M:
I’m interested in learning a new language. I want to learn Italian!
CS:
If you look over there, behind those bookshelves, you’ll find leaflets about all our evening classes, or you could use one of the computers to check online.
2 Alone Students work alone and decide which of the answers given could match the questions in Activity F1. Answers a d (ii) price b c (i) location c b (i) type of weather d a (ii) a number
e
a
(i) something
f
b (ii) a number of degrees
g
d (i) sport
h
c
(ii) activity
3 Alone Prepare students for listening and answering the questions in Activity F1. Remember that they have already decided what type of answer is required and seen some possible answers for all the questions.
CD1, Track 7 A Woman:
Good morning, Mega Music Store, how can I help you?
Gregory:
Hi, I’d like to know if I can order something from you.
W:
Yes, of course – we can help you with DVDs and MP3 downloads, as well as other soft ware and tablets, and so on.
G:
Actually, I don’t want any of those; I just want to order a power cable. The product number is CD39 dash 2BK. Can you do that?
W:
Certainly. Let me take your details …
B Here is the weather forecast for tomorrow for your local area. There will be some light rain overnight, turning
Hello, could I have some information about your evening classes, please?
D Thank you for calling the Health and Fitness Sports Centre, the home of tennis, squash, badminton, futsal and swimming. The Sports Centre management has just introduced new prices for using the tennis facilities, so for non-members a weekend court will now cost €12 an hour, while during the week, the daytime price is €8 and €10 after 6 p.m. For members, the price is €9 at any time during the week, and €11 at the weekend. Answers a (i) power cable, (ii) CD39-2BK b (i) high clouds, (ii) 18 °C c (i) information office/library, (ii) learn Italian d (i) tennis, (ii) €9
4 Pairs Students compare their answers and then look at the audioscript in Appendix 3 in the Coursebook to check.
LANGUAGE TIP
This Language Tip highlights the importance of linking words and phrases in listening activities. Make sure students understand that linking words and phrases can provide important clues about what the speaker is saying, as well as what the speaker is going to say. There is an exercise for students to complete in Unit 4 of the Workbook.
27
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 4.
Exam focus
D:
Isn’t there anywhere closer than the bus station?
S:
Let me think … Oh yes, the supermarket across the road from here.
Question 3 Jason:
Reading, Exercise 1, skimming and scanning
28
Answers a because they are more vulnerable b need to concentrate on the road and other traffic c identifies you to other road users d after dark and in poor conditions e keep clear of the kerb and do not ride in the gutter; give space on the left, and don’t hug the kerb if a car behind you gets impatient; don’t weave between lanes or change direction suddenly; show drivers what you plan to do in plenty of time; always look and signal before you start, stop or turn f make eye contact with drivers and let them know you have seen them g on the tyre itself h all road users i cycle on pavements; cycle the wrong way up a one-way street; ride across a pedestrian crossing
Listening, Exercise 1, Part A, short extracts CD 1, Track 8 Question 1 And now for the prices and opening times at the Star Cinema. All tickets are priced at $10 for adults and $6.50 for students and children. Our weekend opening time is two o’clock in the afternoon and on weekdays we open one hour later, at three. Question 2 Daniela:
Do you sell street maps?
Shopkeeper:
Well, yes, we do, but I’m afraid we’ve sold out.
D:
Do you know where I can get one?
S:
Try the newsagent’s on the other side of the park. Or the shop at the bus station will have plenty.
Excuse me! Sorry to trouble you but I’m completely lost! This is my first day working here and I can’t find where I need to go!
Woman:
You must be the new part-time helper, right? Don’t worry, you’ll soon find your way around. This is the staff room. But where do you want to go?
J:
I’m trying to find the supervisor’s office. I need to give him my contact details.
W:
Well, you’re not too far away. Look, you see the lift over there? Go up to the second floor and when you get out of the lift, turn left and left again at the end of the corridor. The supervisor’s office is the first door on the right.
J:
Thanks so much.
Question 4 Welcome aboard our city sightseeing bus. First, let me tell you about the tour. We’re going to travel through the most historic parts of the city for about an hour, with lots of opportunities for you to take photos, or just admire the wonderful buildings and scenery. Then we’ll drop you off near the market place. You can visit the museum, which is very interesting, or why not buy some fruit and cheese from the market and have a snack in the park next to the museum? But please please please come back promptly to the bus after one hour – we can’t wait for any latecomers! Now for some safety information … .
Answers 1 a Star Cinema b 3.00 p.m. 2 a street map b supermarket, nearby 3 a part-time helper b supervisor 4 a get a snack b one hour
Unit 4: Transport
Listening , Exercise 1, Part B, short extracts CD 1, Track 9 Question 1 Adult man:
Everything half price before we close today. Fruit, vegetables, lovely flowers, you can get everything you need here, in your local market. Come to the front and take a good look. You won’t believe my prices today. Potatoes and carrots for lunch tomorrow, apples and melons, everything 100% fresh and half price. Yes, madam, what can I get for you?
Adult female:
Just some fruit please … hmmm I’ll take a kilo of oranges please.
Adult man:
Certainly madam, no problem. How about some strawberries? They were grown locally, just down the road. Or some lovely pears?
Adult female:
Yes, they look delicious, but not today thanks. But on second thoughts, I’ll take 5 kilos of potatoes.
Question 2 Hi Fatma, this is Muna. How are you? I don’t know if you remember me, but we were in sociology class together during summer school. We were so pleased to see each other in the classroom after meeting at the registration day in April. Anyway, I’ll be working in Bahrain next month and I’d love to see you and go for a coffee. I was supposed to be coming in September, but my trip was postponed. So, I’ll be coming in November instead. Can you let me know if you have any free time? Hopefully, we’ll meet again soon. Question 3 Teenage girl:
Teenage boy:
Hi, Ali, how are you? Last time I spoke to Uncle Fahad he said you were going away with your school basketball team. Yeah, we were supposed to go for two weeks but it was cut short.
TG:
So when did you get back?
TB:
In the end the trip was just one week, which was kind of disappointing.
TG:
I suppose so, but did you win your matches?
TB:
We played two warm-up matches, which we lost, and six competitive matches. We won four of those, which wasn’t bad I suppose. We didn’t win the competition cup, but we all got a medal for taking part.
TG:
Excellent! Well done!
Question 4 Adult male:
Hello, do you have a table for three, please? I have a young baby so perhaps somewhere not too noisy? We didn’t make a reservation.
Adult female:
No reservation? For three, let me just check … . Unfortunately, we are fully booked but I think I might have a table for two somewhere. We can add a highchair for the baby, if that’s ok?
AM:
It depends where the table is …
AF:
Just there, by the window.
AM:
Hmmm it might be too cold there for the baby. Do you have anywhere else?
AF:
As I said sir, we are fully booked, so that’s all I can offer you at the moment, unless you can wait until after eight o’clock.
Answers 5 a in the market b oranges, potatoes 6 a summer school b September 7 a a week b four 8 a somewhere quiet b too cold
29
Unit 5: Holidays Focus on speaking and listening: personal questions and note-taking NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Listening Exercise 2 and Speaking: Students need to demonstrate that they can listen to a formal talk and complete gaps in notes/sentences based on what they hear. Specifically, students need to identify and select relevant information (L1) and understand ideas, opinions and attitudes (L2). Furthermore, for speaking, students need to communicate ideas/opinions clearly, accurately and effectively (S1), develop responses and link ideas using a range of appropriate linking devices (S2), use a range of grammatical structures and vocabulary accurately and effectively (S3), show control of pronunciation and intonation patterns (S4) and engage in a conversation and contribute effectively to help move the conversation forward (S5).
Learning objectives (LOs) 30
Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that your students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about holidays. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of the three favourite types of holiday that the speakers mention, and the reasons they give. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a Favourite types of holiday that the students mention (any three from): beach holidays, shopping holidays, self-tour holidays, lone holidays, inactive holidays, Edinburgh, Spain (Madrid) [cities]. The reasons they give: it’s a tradition, the student discovered famous destinations, the student tried famous cuisines, the student bought traditional clothing, the student got to explore the city, the city had an appealing culture, the student is studying the language, to broaden knowledge about the culture, to improve language skills.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about the types of holiday that they prefer and their reasons. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Pairs Students focus on the seven pictures of different types of holidays, and discuss what they think each holiday involves. This is a speaking activity so do not worry too much about language errors – allow students to discuss freely and without correction to help them build up their confidence. There are no right or wrong answers. Encourage students to say two things about each holiday.
2 Pairs There are many possibilities with this matching activity, so make sure students are not too worried about getting things ‘right’. The aim is for them to think and discuss possible combinations to create the names of seven holidays, and finally to match them to the pictures in B1.
Answers a 6, b 1, c 5, d 2,
e
7,
f
3,
g
4
3 Pairs, then whole class For a‒e, students work in pairs, discussing each question. You may decide to limit the time available for each question, so that the activity does not take longer than is necessary. Once again, there are no right or wrong answers, to encourage fluency. Challenge students by encouraging them to give reasons for their answers. Provide some time for whole class feedback and to reveal to students that all the holidays are ‘real’ except for ‘Chocolate cake baking in Hawaii’. Finally, focus on question f, which asks students
Unit 5: Holidays
to think of another unusual type of holiday and agree on a name for it. Anything goes! Display all of their answers and allow some time for students to choose which of these holidays they would like to go on.
CW:
What is a normal workday for you?
WY:
Well, it depends very much on the time of year, because obviously the weather impacts greatly on when I can fly, and to which sights. But on a summer’s day I need to be at the airfield a couple of hours before that day’s sightseers are ready to board the helicopter, so usually I’m there around seven in the morning.
Tell students who they are going to listen to, and what the speaker is going to be talking about. Then get them to answer questions a and b with you, all the while referring them to the map, which will provide them with some clues.
CW:
Where exactly do you take the tourists?
WY:
We are very lucky in this part of China to have such stunning scenery. Guilin offers breath-taking lakes and rivers, as well as rolling hills, and spectacular views.
2 Alone
CW:
Students listen once to Wang Yanghua being interviewed about aerial tourism, and check their answers to C1 a and b.
Do sightseers ever want to avoid nature and look down on cities instead?
WY:
Certainly they do. I have a colleague, who flies in Beijing, and she only does city sightseeing tours. She tells me that the most popular attractions are the Beijing National Stadium, known as the Bird’s Nest, and, of course, the Great Wall of China.
CW:
Describe how different it is to see something from a helicopter.
WY:
Well, firstly, ground-level sightseeing is usually static. It’s stationary*. People get off the coach or out of the car and stand in front of something and take a photo or two, or a couple of selfies. Often people sit and admire something and really only see a building or a statue from one static angle. But when you’re in a helicopter, sightseeing becomes more dynamic …
CW:
Which means?
WY:
The angle of view and speed are constantly changing because, obviously, the helicopter is constantly moving. What you see is a panorama, from east to west and north and south, and if you close your eyes for a few seconds, when you open them again the view will be completely different.
CW:
So if you blink you may miss something?!
WY:
Yes! Secondly, how high or low the helicopter is flying …
CW:
… its altitude?
WY:
Exactly. Altitude impacts hugely on how we see something.
CW:
What else is different?
WY:
Well, at ground level, it’s usually very difficult to know what other things are around the sight you are looking at. But from the air, you can see the building or lake or whatever it might be, in a
C Listening 1 Whole class
CD1, Track 10 Chen Wen: Hello everyone, my name’s Chen Wen, and today we are very lucky to be talking to someone who has an amazing job! Please welcome Wang Yanghua, an aerial tourism helicopter pilot based in Guilin, Southern China. Wang Yanghua: Hello, Chen, thank you for inviting me. CW: So, aerial tourism? What on earth is that?! WY: Well, it’s basically holiday sightseeing, but from a helicopter. Instead of seeing things from the ground, I take tourists and holidaymakers up in a helicopter, and we look at things from above. CW: That’s certainly a different way of doing things. Tell us how you became interested in flying. Is it something that you’ve always wanted to do? WY: Actually, no. As a teenager I wanted to be a doctor. CW: So how did you become a pilot? WY: Well, I was at the cinema watching a film, and at some point there was a dramatic scene with helicopters flying over cities and forests … CW: … and that made you want to become a pilot? WY: To be honest, it just suddenly hit me that flying helicopters was what I wanted to do. Strange, but true! I got my full licence seven years ago.
31
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
context. And that of course helps us to appreciate its size and shape in relation to other things.
4
stunning + scenery,
5
spectacular + views,
CW:
Finally, Wang, what’s the most interesting thing you’ve ever seen from a helicopter?
6
popular + attractions,
7
ground-level + sightseeing,
WY:
You know something? Every time I fly, I see things differently, so something which may not have struck me as being very interesting on one day could look completely different on another. So, every day is fascinating in some way or another. Every day I see something which amazes me.
8
static + angle
CW:
As I said at the start, you really do have an amazing job! I definitely know what my next holiday activity is going to be! Wang Yanghua, aerial tourism helicopter pilot, thank you so much, and fly safely!
WY:
Thank you!
WORD TIP
These two words (stationary*, stationery) are easily confused, not least how to spell them. Talk through the information and then direct students to complete the exercise in Unit 5 of Workbook.
4 Pairs Completing gaps in notes while listening to someone talking is a complex and challenging skill, and students need plenty of practice in order to build up their confidence. Before they listen to the interview again, they should look at the incomplete notes and together discuss what information is missing.
5 Alone, then pairs When students are ready, play the interview and tell them to check their answers.
Answers Full name: Wang Yanghua Work location: [Guilin, Southern China]
32
3 Alone
Licence obtained: [seven years ago]
Tell students they are going to listen again. As they listen, they need to check in which order they hear the eight adjectives (a‒h) in the box, and also make a note of what each adjective is describing. One example has been done.
Normal day starts at: [around seven in the morning]
Differentiated Activities Support
Provide students with a list of the nouns that each adjective describes in the listening, and give them a few minutes to think of possible combinations, before they listen. Challenge
Ask students to note down any other adjective + noun combinations that they hear (e.g. breathtaking lakes, rolling hills, sightseeing tours, interesting thing) and then ask them to think of other nouns that could combine with each adjective, e.g. breathtaking views.
Takes tourists in Guilin to see: [scenery: lakes, rivers, hills, views] Popular attractions in Beijing: [National Stadium, Great Wall of China] Advantages of aerial sightseeing: [more dynamic, panoramic, gives everything a context]
6 Pairs For the final activity in this section, students look at the audioscript in Appendix 3 of the Coursebook and find more examples of adjective + noun combinations.
Answers breathaking lakes, rolling hills,
Answers 1 amazing + job, 2 dramatic + scene, 3 normal + workday,
sightseeing tours, interesting thing
Unit 5: Holidays
D Language focus: Compound (multi-word) adjectives LANGUAGE TIP
While in the previous section compound adjectives were not specifically focused on, this Language Tip highlights the use of two or more adjectives to modify a noun. Usually these adjectives are hyphenated to avoid confusion. There is an exercise for students to complete in Unit 5 of the Workbook.
1 Pairs (A and B) In Section D, students are going to read about two of the holidays mentioned previously. Before they do so, they are going to focus on a number of adjectives which appear in the texts. a
b
c
(i) Students discuss what the adjectives 1‒12 mean. If time is limited, you could divide up the 12 adjectives and distribute to different pairs (or small groups) of students, and then allow them to share their ideas. (ii) Remind students what the titles of the two texts are: Hiking with huskies in Finland and Swimming with dolphins on Kangaroo Island, and ask them which adjectives they think will appear in the texts, and for their reasons, e.g. chocolate-coloured in Hiking with huskies because a huskie might be that colour, and white-sand in Swimming with dolphins because the text might mention the beach. Do not supply any answers as students will find out for themselves when they read the texts in Section E. There are plenty of possible combinations here and it is worth reminding students that it is not important to ‘get things right’. The essential thing is for them to think about which adjectives (1‒12) could combine with the nouns and noun and verb phrases (a‒l). Encourage them to give reasons for their choices. Do not supply any answers as students will find out for themselves when they read the texts in Section E. You could use this activity to challenge any students who finish 1a and 1b early. There are endless possibilities.
E Reading and speaking 1 Pairs (A and B) Students are each going to read a different text: Student A is going to read Text 5A in Appendix 2 of the Coursebook: Hiking with huskies in Finland and Student B is going
to read Text 5B in Appendix 2: Swimming with dolphins on Kangaroo Island. Note that the texts are on different pages so that Student A cannot see Student B’s text, and vice versa. Students read their allocated text and check their answers to D1a (ii) and D1b. Encourage them to give reasons for their answers whenever possible.
Answers D1a (ii) + D1b 1. abundant Text 5 B + i
7. paramount B + g
2. advisable A + j
8. prevalent B + f
3. chocolate-coloured B + b
9. shock-absorbing A + d
4. endemic B + h
10. more strenuous A + e
5. husky-trekking A + k
11. sturdy A + l
6. more intensive A + c
12. white-sand B + a
2 Same A/B pairs Under the texts which students have read is a set of questions in Appendix 2. These questions refer to the other text, i.e. the text which the students have NOT read. Taking turns, students ask and answer the questions, making a note of their partner’s answers.
3 Same A/B pairs Without referring to either of the texts or any notes, students now tell each other as much as they can remember about their partner’s text. They can ask questions for clarification.
F Listening 1 Pairs This activity gives students more practice in seeing how adjectives and nouns combine. Try to encourage your students to learn ‘chunks’ of language for immediate productive use in either their writing or speaking. Do not supply any answers as students will find out for themselves when they listen in F2.
2 Alone, then pairs Students listen to the woman talking about the winter tours that she organises, and (i) check their answers to F1, and (ii) say in which order they hear the noun + adjective chunks (1‒9). Then they can compare their ideas in pairs.
33
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Answers 1 snow-white seabirds, 2 snow-capped mountains, 3 freshwater lake, 4 lush green leaves, 5 natural attraction, 6 complex landscape, 7 professional guide, 8 thrilling experience, 9 spectacular event
34
CD1, Track 11 For anyone wanting a winter holiday, the area around Dali, in the province of Yunnan in southern China, offers many attractions, such as beautiful islands and delightful mountain scenery, as well as wonderful wildlife. One example of this can be found near Xiao Putuo island in Erhai Lake, where thousands of snowwhite seabirds take to the air whenever food is thrown at them. As you know, birds often fear humans, but this event really happens. Some of the birds even fly toward the food held out by visitors and take it from their hands. The whole scene is breath taking, with blue water and sky, white clouds, and snow-capped mountains in the distance. Erhai (meaning ear-shaped) Lake is the second largest freshwater lake in the region, covers an area of 257 square kilometres and has an average depth of 11 metres. The lake is an important food source for the local people, who are famous for their amazing method of fishing. They train cormorant birds to catch fish who then return them to fishmongers! Xiao Putou island, where Erhai Lake is found, is covered with lush green leaves and flowers, and the recent building of several hotels along the lake’s shores makes this an increasingly popular place for tourists to visit. Locals can rent you a small boat to visit both the island and the lake. Nearby Cangshan Mountain is another natural attraction, with almost 95% of it covered by forest. Along with the complex landscape of the mountain, the forest makes walking difficult for novices. Up to 200 people lose their way each year, and have to be rescued, so a professional guide is essential if you want to go walking in the area. If you insist and really want to explore the mountain, but are looking for an easier option, a 45-minute cable car ride will transport you to the top, which is 4,000 metres above sea level.
This ride is a thrilling experience during the winter time. You will be amazed by the green mountain landscape at lower levels, which gradually changes to a white blanket of snow as you slowly travel upwards. Then, as the cable car reaches higher levels, it can get quite shaky if the weather is windy. Another attraction near the lake are the hot springs at Eryuan, which is in fact the original source of the water in Erhai Lake. There are 200‒300 hot springs open to the public, attracting many winter visitors from Taiwan, Thailand, Myanmar, Hong Kong and Japan, as well as South Korea. Improved transport links are planned to increase tourism, and there are currently 15 domestic air links connecting the region with major cities. Major events, such as the six-day shopping festival, encourage locals and tourists to buy herbal medicine, agricultural products, and clothes, as well as food and gift items. As many as 30 000 people visit the festival every year. Another spectacular event is the annual singing fair, which attracts nearly 100 000 people.
3 Alone, then pairs Give students a few minutes to look at the incomplete notes and to make some guesses about the missing information in each gap. They do not need to write anything yet. Go through their answers orally, without correcting anything. Then play the audio again and students write their answers. Point out that they should write only one or two words in each gap. Students compare their answers in pairs.
Answers a delightful mountain, b ear-shaped, c 257/two hundred and fift y-seven, d (cormorant) birds, e island, f 95%, g each year, h sea level, i white, j windy, k transport, l six-/6-day, m singing
Unit 5: Holidays
4 Alone
5 Alone
Students can read the tapescript after Activity F2 to check their answers.
Students listen to Stefanos and the other person and check their answers to G3.
G Speaking
Answers 1 d What’s your name? 2 e How do you spell your family name? 3 a Which town do you live in? 4 g Describe how you travelled here today 5 f How many brothers and sisters do you have? 6 j Tell me what you enjoy doing in your free time. 7 c Talk to me about your favourite school subjects. 8 h What career would you like to follow? 9 i What did you do last weekend? 10b What are your plans for next weekend?
TOP TIP
Go through the Top Tip and explain that the rest of this unit will give students practice in preparing for part of an exam, which is designed to put students at their ease by asking them questions of a personal nature, and which should not be too demanding.
1 Alone Students write five questions which they think they might ask them in the first part of the exam.
TOP TIP
Point out that questions do not always start with a Wh- question word. Sometimes the other person may say: Tell me about …, Talk about … , Describe … , etc.
2 Pairs Students ask and answer their questions from Activity G1.
3 Pairs Students work together to unjumble the words to make ten questions (a‒j). Point out that some do not begin with a question word (c, g and j). Students can also see if any of the questions are similar to the ones they thought of in G1. Do not supply any answers as students will find out for themselves when they listen in G5.
4 Pairs Ask students to think about the order in which the questions might be asked, and to give reasons. There are no right answers here, but probably questions about the student’s name and family would come first, followed by travel, school and career plans, and finally the weekend.
CD1, Track 12 Examiner: Hello. What’s your name? Stefanos: Stefanos E: How do you spell your family name? S: ALEXANDROU E: Which town do you live in, Stefanos? S: Nicosia E: Thank you. Describe how you travelled here today S: Car E: How many brothers and sisters do you have? S: None E: Tell me what you enjoy doing in your free time S: Playing on my computer E: Thanks, Stefanos. Talk to me about your favourite subjects at school S: Science E: OK. And what career would you like to follow? S: I want to be a doctor E: Thank you. What did you do last weekend? S: I visited my grandparents E: And what are your plans for next weekend? S: I don’t know E: Thank you very much, Stefanos
35
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
36
6 Alone
M: I live here in Nicosia, well, just outside actually
Before students listen a second time, ask them if they can remember how Stefanos answered the six questions (a‒f). Then play the interview again and students check their ideas.
E:
Answers a Describe how you travelled here today. Car b Tell me what you enjoy doing in your free time? Playing on my computer c Talk to me about your favourite subjects at school. Science d What career would you like to follow? I want to be a doctor e What did you do last weekend? I visited my grandparents f What are your plans for next weekend? I don’t know
E:
7 Pairs
E:
Students discuss which of the answers they think could be better, and give reasons. Students should avoid giving single-word answers whenever possible, so answers a and c are not particularly strong. We also need to encourage students to add information to statements they give, so answers b, d, e and f could also be better.
M: Next weekend? I don’t know. Maybe I’ll go shopping with some friends
Possible answers a My mum drove me here in her car. b I enjoy playing on my computer. c I like science subjects, especially physics and chemistry. d I want to be a doctor, but I’m not really sure yet. e I don’t know yet. It depends on the weather.
Thank you. Describe how you travelled here today
M: Well, my mum drove me E:
How many brothers and sisters do you have?
M: I don’t have any. Tell me what you enjoy doing in your free time
M: To be honest, I don’t have much free time but I like watching TV E:
Thanks, Maria. Talk to me about your favourite subjects at school
M: Hmm, I like everything but my favourite subject is English E:
OK. And what career would you like to follow?
M: So far, I have no idea but maybe teaching E:
Thank you. What did you do last weekend?
M: Let me think. OK, I had an exam at school so I did some studying
E:
And what are your plans for next weekend?
Thank you very much
9 Alone, then pairs Before students listen again to Maria, get them to give you some examples of ‘fillers’. Maria uses quite a few, which help to improve her responses to the other person's questions.
Answers Actually, Well, To be honest, Hmm, So far, let me think, Next weekend?
8 Alone, then pairs
10 Alone
Students listen to Maria and decide if she performs better or worse than Stefanos. Encourage students to discuss their reasons with their partner.
Refer students to the audioscript in Appendix 3 of the Coursebook to check their answers.
CD1, Track 13 Examiner: Maria: E: M: E:
11 Whole class Hello. What’s your name?
Ask students in what way ‘Next weekend?’ is different from the other fillers.
Hi. I’m Maria How do you spell your family name? Actually it’s quite easy: CHRISTOU Which town do you live in, Maria?
Answer Maria repeats some key words from the question, to give herself time to think.
Unit 5: Holidays
LANGUAGE TIP
This Language Tip reinforces the importance of using fillers to make spoken language sound more natural and fluent. There is an exercise for students to complete in Unit 5 of the Workbook.
H Watch, listen and talk 1/2 Alone, then pairs Students are going to watch two students answering an examiner’s questions. As they watch, students should
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 5.
check which of the questions already discussed in this section the examiner asks, and then discuss with their partner which of the two students performs better, and give their reasons.
3 Pairs This activity gives students an opportunity to practise the language introduced in this unit. They can take the roles of examiner and student, and then change roles to get practice in both asking and answering questions. Allow this activity to run freely without too much intervention from you, but encourage students to use the language from the unit.
d
Mt Bromo: wonderful ………. [sunrise: ½ ] views e
f
Answers Global Volcanoes [answers and marks given in square brackets for guidance] a
Volcanoes are powerful, prized, beautiful, ………. [exciting: 1 mark] Talk is about five volcanoes in Asia, USA, Indonesia, ………., Europe [Africa: ½]
b
Mount Fuji ………. metres high [3776: ½] Many Japanese hope to reach the top during lifetime
c
Shape of top of Mt Fuji is like a ………. [cone: ½ ] and possible to see it from ………. [Tokyo’s skyscrapers: ½ ] Distance to volcano is ………. [132 km: ½]
Virunga is Africa’s first ………. [national park: ½ ] Possible to see ………. [gorillas: ½ ] and the world’s largest ………. [lava lake: ½ ] at Mt Nyiragongo
Exam focus Listening, Exercise 5
Mt Semeru is the ………. [highest: ½ ] volcano in Indonesia
Near Naples, Mt Vesuvius, famous for devastating eruption almost ………. [two thousand/2,000: ½ ] years ago Volcanology research information from visit to ………. [observatory: ½ ]
g
Crater Lake landscape not seen until you reach edge of crater, and lake is different shades of ……… [blue: ½ ]
h
Lake surrounded by cliffs and ………. [pine forests: ½] Visitors can drive or hike.
37
Unit 6: 5 Learning Entertainment Focus on reading: note-making Y
NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 3 (note-making): Students need to demonstrate that they can make brief notes under a supplied heading or headings relating to an article/text (for example: from a newspaper or magazine) printed in the question paper. Specifically, students need to identify and select relevant information (R1), understand ideas, opinions and attitudes (R2) and show understanding of the connections between ideas, opinions and attitudes (R3).
Learning objectives (LOs)
worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Small groups Ask students to think about schools and make sure they understand what facilities means. In small groups, they look at and discuss the pictures, then answer the questions. You may like to limit the time available for each question.
Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
a
They need to discuss if any of the facilities are the same as the ones from Section A, and talk about which ones (if any) they have and would like to have in their own school. Encourage them to give reasons for their ideas. Monitor, but do not interfere with the discussions. Provide feedback afterwards.
b
A Watch, listen and talk
Leading on from question a, students talk about what facilities they would expect a school to have but which are missing from the pictures in Section A.
c
For the final question, students need to think about the differences between primary and secondary schools, and universities and colleges, and to give reasons why different places of learning need different facilities.
38
1 Whole class, then alone Explain that your students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about school facilities. As your students watch and listen, they should (a) make a note of the three most important facilities that the speakers mention, and (b) make a note of the facilities that the speakers would like to have. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a The most important facilities that a school should offer: a library, an outdoor area, a big hall. b
Extra facilities the students would like to have: an outdoor area, a big hall.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about the facilities that they think are the most important in a school, and the extra facilities they would like to have in their school. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been
2 Alone If you have access to the internet, you could get students to search for ‘schools’, either in their own country or somewhere else, and check the facilities that they offer. If you can’t use the internet, prompt students with some questions – for example: Where could you borrow a book from? Students should make a list of facilities and then put them into rank order. Next, get your students to convert their list into a graph or chart. They did a similar activity in the previous unit, so this activity should not present too many problems. Each student needs to prepare their own graph or chart for the next activity.
3 Small groups Using their own graph or chart, students now say three things about it to the others in their group, then answer any questions. Use the example in the Coursebook to check that students understand what they have to do.
Unit 6: Learning
Monitor, but do not interfere. Provide positive, encouraging feedback once students have finished talking about their graphs and charts.
and Sports centre), to reduce what students have to think about. Challenge
C Reading
Tell students to cover up the box in Activity C2 and think of their own headings for the five paragraphs.
1 Pairs The first activity in this section focuses on vocabulary. Students work in pairs to find out the meaning of the ten words and phrases. During feedback, make sure that there is general agreement on the meanings.
WORD TIP
The spellings of these two words (practice, practise) are commonly confused. Refer students to the practice exercise in Unit 6 of the Workbook.
Differentiated activities Support
3 Alone, then pairs
i
Reduce the number of words and phrases that students should look up.
ii
Supply students with the correct definitions for a matching activity.
Students skim the text again and identify which facilities and services the school offers, then check if these are the same as the ones they listed in Activity C2. Working with a partner, they can add more facilities and give reasons for choosing them.
Challenge
Once students have agreed on the definitions, ask them to do some word building, for example: extensive (adjective) – extend (verb) – extensively (adverb) – extension (noun).
2 Alone, then pairs The headings in the box are all services and facilities that a language school might offer. Students skim the text and decide which heading goes with each of the five paragraphs, then check with their partner. There are three extra headings that students do not need to use.
Answers 1 = IT Centre, 2 = Library and Multimedia Resource Centre (LMRC), 3 = Counselling service,
4 Pairs For this activity, students find the words in the text from Activity C1 and check if the meanings they agreed on were correct and make sense.
5 Alone, then pairs This is an information-transfer activity, similar to the type of question found in many examinations. Students need to read the text carefully in order to complete their copy of the table. All the missing information relates to the opening and closing times of three facilities.
Differentiated activities Support
i
Ask students to complete the information for only two (or even one) of the facilities, rather than all three.
ii
Highlight which specific time slots they need to complete.
4 = Cafeteria, 5 = Accommodation and welfare
Differentiated activities Support
You could point out which headings are not needed (Banking facilities, Social and leisure programme
Challenge
When students have completed the table, ask them to use the information to write one or two sentences about each of the facilities.
39
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Answers Facility Café
Time
0600
0700
Opens M–F
IT facilities LMRC
Opens M–F
0900
1600
Opens weekend
Closes weekend
Opens weekend
1700
1900
2100
2200
Closes M-F Closes weekend
Opens M–F
Closes M–F Closes M–F
questions. Let them ask and answer, as this is an effective way to check how logical their questions are. TOP TIP
Point out what is required in a note-making question, and highlight the importance of careful text reading to select the correct information.
6 Pairs
40
Note-making questions require students to identify relevant information and to select correct details, and they may also need to identify facts, opinions and attitudes. The information students find should be rewritten under the headings provided. Activity 6 asks students to look at some notes based on the text they have read, and then to write some additional notes. a
Put students into A/B pairs, with A looking at paragraph 1 and B looking at paragraph 2. Each student needs to write four‒five notes based on the content of their paragraph.
b
In pairs, students exchange their notes and decide if they agree and if anything is missing or should be added.
c
Without referring back to the paragraphs, students use the notes they have been given to write a paragraph.
d
Students exchange their paragraphs and compare the content with the original texts in the Coursebook.
Suggested answers a How often do students get IT lessons? b When is the IT centre/are the IT facilities open at weekends? c What does the special soft ware help you practise? / What can you practise in the IT centre? d How many volumes/books/titles are there in the LMRC/library? e What do many books have so that you can listen to the story? f Where can you purchase/buy books and audio files? g What does the counselling service use to help you choose a career? h What can you use to access English language magazines and newspapers in the cafeteria? i How many people can help you with accommodation and welfare? j Why is staying with an English-speaking family a popular option?
D Language focus: Prefixes and suffixes
7/8 Alone, then pairs This is quite a challenging activity, so if necessary consider reducing the load and/or supplying prompts to help students to complete the questions. Forming questions in English is a challenge for many learners, due to the sometimes complex word order used and the use of auxiliary verbs, so this activity provides useful practice. Do a couple of examples first, then get students to work alone to write the questions. Once they have finished, let them work in pairs to see if they have written the same
LANGUAGE TIP
Spend some time reviewing the two Language Tips near D Language focus: Prefixes and suff ixes in the Coursebook, as it is an important area for students to understand and they will need to refer to it for the activities that follow. Note that we use the term affix to describe both prefixes and suffixes. Refer students to the exercise in Unit 6 of the Workbook.
Unit 6: Learning
1 Alone All the phrases are taken from the article students read in the previous section, so they will have already seen them in context. Students need to decide if they change the grammar or the meaning of the words. Refer them to the Language Tips near D Language focus: Prefixes and suff ixes in Unit 6 of the Coursebook for help if they need it.
Answers … self-study lessons prefix – meaning … facilities including internet prefix – meaning … lactose intolerant prefix – meaning
prefixes mean and then thinks of more words that contain each one.
Answers a by yourself, alone (self-portrait, self-employed) b having many (multi-storey, multi-purpose) c between/among (international, intercom) d with/together (conversation, contact) e relating to hearing/sound (audio-visual, audio-lingual) f opposite (disapprove, disrespect) g for/support/approve (proactive) h three (triangle, triathlon)
… one weekly timetabled lesson suffix – grammar … from beginner to advanced suffix – meaning … suitable for suffix – grammar
2 Pairs With a partner, students look at the prefixes and decide what each one means. Then they match each prefix with a word or word base to create new words, and tell each other what the words mean. Note – the prefix self- is always followed by a hyphen (-), as is ex- (for example, ex-president) and the prefix multi- is often, but not always, followed by a hyphen.
4 Alone, then pairs Now that students have practised prefixes, we move on to suffixes. Go through the information in Activity D4, making sure students understand the role of a suffix, then get them to complete the task. In some cases, there is more than one possible answer. Point out the importance of checking spelling very carefully (e.g. happy + ness = happiness). Give students some time to check their answers with a partner before you give feedback.
Answers accidentally = adverb
Answers auto + matic = automatic = without human control
availability = adverb
hyper + market = hypermarket = large shopping centre
exciting = adjective, excitement = noun
sub + marine = submarine = underwater boat
guidance = noun
trans + continental = transcontinental = across large areas of land/continents
happiness = noun, happily = adverb
equi + distant = equidistant = equally far or close to something bi + annual = biannual = every two years mono + lingual = monolingual = using only one language anti + dote = antidote = a substance that stops another substance from damaging your body ex + president = ex-president = former president contra + diction = contradiction = a big difference between two statements about the same subject
3 Pairs Split the pairs into A/B. Student A looks at prefixes a‒d and Student B looks at e‒h. Each student decides what their
cheaply = adverb
imagination = noun, imagining = verb lovely = adjective, lover = noun, loving = adjective luxurious = adjective, luxuriously = adverb saying = noun
5 Alone Make sure students clearly understand what they have to do in this activity. Firstly, they must create ten words using the suffixes in the box (there are two examples), then they should choose five words to use in complete sentences. There are multiple possible answers here so make sure you spend time giving students feedback on their efforts.
41
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Differentiated activities Support
i
Reduce the number of words students need to create by giving them some of the answers.
ii
Give your students gapped sentences, which they need to complete once they have created the words.
E Speaking: Giving advice and making suggestions
Answers 1 I reckon you should … + infinitive without to 2 Why don’t you … + infinitive without to 3 How about … + -ing 4 If I were you, … 5 I suggest … + -ing 6 You’d really better …+ infinitive without to 7 I would strongly advise you … to + verb 8 My advice would be … to + verb 9 It might be a good idea … to + verb 10 You might try …+ ing
1 Small groups
4/5 Pairs
Students are going to read a newspaper article called Why can’t teenagers get up in the morning? Put students into small groups to discuss questions a–d and tell them that they should be prepared to present their ideas to the class. Monitor, but do not interfere, then offer positive feedback on their discussions. You could limit the time available for each question to keep the discussions focused and moving forwards.
Students are going to think about the advice they would give to someone who finds it difficult to concentrate while studying. Focus on the example in the Coursebook first, then students work with a partner, using the advice phrases from the previous activity. Afterwards, they can join up with different pairs and share their advice, using reporting verbs if possible (as in the example). Get the class to choose the best piece of advice.
Challenge
Increase the challenge of this activity by telling students that they still have to write five sentences, but that each sentence must contain two words from the ten, thereby using all the words that they have created.
42
followed by infinitive without to? Do a couple of examples using the phrases in Activity E2. Notice that ‘If I were you …’ does not use any of these patterns, and is followed by ‘I would / I’d do something’.
2 Alone, then pairs Tell students that they are going to listen to ten different people giving advice about how to wake up in the morning. Before they listen, give students a few minutes to look through the phrases in columns A and B. Play the audio and students match the phrases to make complete sentences.
Answers 1 h, 2 d, 3 i, 4 e, 5 j,
LANGUAGE TIP
The Language Tip near Activity E2 of the Coursebook focuses on two words that are commonly confused: advice (noun) and advise (verb). Spend some time going through the information, checking that students fully understand the difference between the two words in spelling and meaning. Refer students to the exercise in Unit 6 of the Workbook.
6
b,
7
f,
8
c,
F Reading
9
a,
1 Small groups
10 g
3 Alone, then pairs This is a noticing activity. While listening a second time, students notice which advice expressions are followed by to + verb? Which ones are followed by -ing? Which ones are
Students are going to read the text about why teenagers can’t get up in the morning. First, in small groups, students look at statements (a‒e) and discuss if they think they are true or false, giving reasons for their answers. Do not supply any answers yet as students will find out when they read the text.
Unit 6: Learning
2 Pairs
5 Alone, then pairs
Students should be used to these vocabulary activities by now. Make sure they have access to reference sources. Remember that for some students you may want to reduce the number of words and phrases they need to check.
Students use the eight words and phrases from Activity F2 to complete the gaps in the text, and then check with their partner. If some students have already done this activity, team them up in groups with other students and let them ‘teach’ each other.
3 Pairs
Answers i d moan, ii e out of sync, iii h trivial matter, iv f sleep deprivation,
The phrases all appear in the text, but students need to discuss what information they think they will read about each one, and give reasons. If time is short, or to differentiate, you could divide up the phrases between different pairs of students.
v
b jeopardises,
vi
a bleak,
vii c metabolism, viii g succumb to sleep
6 Alone, then pairs 4 Alone, then pairs Go through the three things that students need to know when they read the text for the first time. Firstly (a) they need to find out what Dr Ralph advises: (Schools and universities should ideally not start before 11 a.m.), then (b) check if the statements in Activity F1 are true or false and (c) check if their ideas from Activity F3 appear. Set a time limit for this activity and encourage students to read the text quickly. When they have their answers, get them to compare with a partner.
Answers to 4b a false: most children (paragraph 1), b true (2), c false: more likely to smoke (6), d false: very few teenagers (7), e true Differentiated activities Support
i
Point out the paragraphs in which they will find the answers to the questions.
ii
Ask students to answer just a and b, or just a and c.
Challenge
i
After students have answered questions a–c, get them to cover the text and discuss where in the text they found the words and phrases from Activity F2.
ii
Tell students to continue to Activity F5 and fill in the gaps. When they have finished, they can share their answers with the class.
The comprehension questions include one that requires students to interpret data in a pie chart. Get students to read through the questions and find this one. Then get them to underline the key words before they attempt to answer. When they have finished, allow time for them to check their answers with each other before you give feedback. For some students, you could omit question i.
Answers a refuse to go to bed at a decent hour, moan about getting up for school, lie in bed for hours at weekends b body clock is out of sync c future prospects, health and lives d because teenagers perform very poorly in the mornings e changing sleep cycle had shocking consequences f 50% g in the morning at school, in class h 6–7 hours i how the human sleep cycle works: hormones stimulated by light stop us falling asleep during the day; in the evenings, the human body produces melatonin which makes us sleepy; also body temperature drops; metabolism slows down how teenagers are different: pressure to fall asleep is more gradual; easier for teens to stay awake later; melatonin produced an hour later than usual.
7 Various This final activity gives students some further practice in note-making, based on the content of the text they have read. To save time and/or to differentiate you could give
43
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
prone to depression and stress
one heading to different students or pairs of students, and then bring everyone together to share their ideas. Note that there may be more possible answers than are required for each heading.
cardiovascular system destroyed kidney disease Natural body cycle
Answers Teenagers and their sleep problems
desire to sleep reduced by light at dusk it encourages sleepiness
‘Terrible teens’ behaviour
out of sync with everyone else
refuse to go to bed at decent hour
Differences in teenagers
moan about getting up for school
pressure to fall asleep is more gradual
lie in bed for hours at weekends
easier for them to stay awake longer
develop a lazy streak
bodies produce melatonin around an hour later than usual
Problems faced by sleep-deprived teens more likely to smoke
44
Reflection
… familiar with tablets
[1]
Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 6.
no sleep, medical or psychiatric disorders
[1]
Exam focus Reading, Exercise 3, note-making Answers Note that there may be more possible answers than are required for each heading.
Data obtained from recordings: …brain electrical activity
[1]
total sleep time
[1]
sleep efficiency [extended]
[1]
percentage of time spent in each sleep stage
[1]
time before first period of REM sleep
[1]
Possible impacts from blue light:
Tablets versus books before bedtime Participants: 16 non-smokers
[1]
… aged 22‒33
[1]
sleepiness
[1]
delayed and reduced brain wave activity
[1]
deeper sleep [extended]
[1]
[Total: 7 Core, 9 Extended]
Unit 7: Jobs Focus on reading and writing: note-making and summary writing NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 4 (summary writing): Students need to write a 80 (Core) or 100 (Extended) word summary about an aspect or aspects of a text printed in the question paper. To do this effectively, students need to identify and select relevant information (R1), understand ideas, opinions and attitudes (R2) and show understanding of the connections between ideas, opinions and attitudes (R3). Students need to communicate information/ideas/ opinions clearly, accurately and effectively (W1), organise ideas into coherent paragraphs using a range of appropriate linking devices (W2), use a range of grammatical structures and vocabulary accurately and effectively (W3) and show control of punctuation and spelling (W4).
Learning objectives (LOs) Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that your students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about jobs. As your students watch and listen, they should (a) make a note about the jobs that the speakers want to do in the future, and (b) make a note about the things that appeal to the speakers about the jobs. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a Jobs the students want to do in the future: a lawyer, a doctor, an ambassador (international relations), a business woman. b What appeals to the students about the jobs: the student is good at debating, the student enjoys learning about law and the legal system [a lawyer] it is meaningful, you can have the ability and knowledge
to save people’s lives and improve their quality of life [a doctor] the student wants to help the world and improve their country/make contributions to their country [an ambassador] because the student can wear formal clothes, the student would like to go into a big company, the student wants to be successful, it has been a childhood dream [a business woman].
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about the jobs that they would like to do when they finish school, and what in particular appeals to them about the job. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences. 45
B Speaking and vocabulary 1/2 Whole class Get students to look at the pictures, and to name at least two things that they can see in each one. Provide any vocabulary that students may ask for. Ask them to describe what is happening in each picture and what job each one shows. For example, the first picture shows a soldier and the second picture shows a teacher teaching a class of students. Allow students freedom to express themselves and do not worry about language errors. Afterwards, ask students if they would like to do any of these jobs and why.
3 Pairs In pairs, students discuss questions a‒c. Some teenagers have no idea about their future career, so be prepared to prompt them. Monitor the discussions, but do not interfere; be ready to give positive feedback at the end of the activity.
4 Alone, then pairs Working on their own, students unjumble the letters to identify the seven jobs, then match them with the pictures. When they are ready, students can check their answers with a partner. 45
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Answers a accountant, b driver, c pharmacist, d comedian,
e
gardener,
f
footballer,
g
astronaut
5 Alone, then pairs Students work alone and write a short definition or description for each job. Look at the example first (comedian). Students can compare their sentences when they have finished. If time permits, you could turn this into a competition by asking students to write their definitions with gaps for the jobs (e.g. A … is someone who tells jokes and makes people laugh). They then exchange their writing and fill in the gaps in their partner’s sentences.
6 Whole class
46
Finish off this section by asking students which of the jobs in the previous activity they would most or least like to do. Get them to give reasons. Once again, allow students the freedom to express themselves without interfering; provide feedback at the end.
limit here to encourage fast, skim reading. When they have finished, they can check their choices with a partner.
Answers a 6, b 5, c 1, d 2,
e
7,
f
4,
g
3
4 Pairs Students need to refer back to the true/false information in Activity C2 and guess in which of the seven paragraphs they would expect to find each piece of information, and to give their reasons.
5 Alone, then pairs This text is quite long so you may decide to use a differentiated activity to help students. If the whole class is a similar level, set a time limit for students to skim the text and check if the information in Activity C2 is true or false. They should then give reasons and correct any incorrect information.
Give students a few minutes to decide what a cosmetic scientist does (or might do). There are no right or wrong answers at this stage, so encourage students to speculate without correcting them. This will not only increase their confidence when speaking, but also improve their fluency. Feedback and corrections can be given at the end of the activity.
Answers a true, b false (larger companies tend to favour students who have Masters or PhD degrees in Cosmetic Science), c false (thousands of scientists and chemists working, the number of jobs continues to grow), d true, e true, f true, g false (get involved with social networking sites)
2 Pairs
Differentiated activities
C Reading 1 Pairs
Make sure students understand what a cosmetic scientist does (they make perfumes and fragrances, and also find scents that work well together), then get them to look at statements (a–g) and decide if they are true or false. Allow students to use reference sources to check any unknown words. Do not supply any answers as students will find out for themselves when they read the text.
Support
i
You could point out in which paragraphs they will find the information from Activity C2.
ii
Make the task shorter by distributing the seven pieces of information among several students.
Challenge
3 Alone, then pairs Go through the seven headings (a‒g) to check any unknown words. Then students have a quick look at the text and decide which heading goes with each paragraph. Set a time
When students have finished, tell them to find three or more pieces of information in the text and write them down, with an error in each one. They then exchange their writing with a partner, who has to identify and correct the errors.
Unit 7: Jobs
6 Pairs
6 Alone, then pairs
For this activity, students look at the underlined phrases in the text and check that they understand them. Make sure all students understand them before moving on.
For the final activity, choose use four modals of their choice in sentences of their own. Get them to share their answers as a way of checking.
WORD TIP
These two words (except, accept) are commonly confused and misspelt. Go through the information and then direct students to the exercise in Unit 7 of the Workbook.
D Language focus: Modals for advice and suggestions 1 Whole class Modal verbs have many different functions in English. In this section, the focus is on using modals to offer advice and to give suggestions. Get students to look at the two examples and point out the underlined modals could and should, and their position before the main verb.
E Writing: Note-making and summary writing 1 Alone This activity helps students to identify key information in a text and to write that information in note form. Some students may find these skills challenging, so begin by looking at the example and get students to show you where the information is in paragraph 1. Make sure they realise that the notes paraphrase the text – in other words, the information from the text is written in a different way when making notes. Get students to read the text again and write two notes for each paragraph.
Differentiated activities Support
2/3 Pairs Ask students to work in pairs and write a list of any other modal verbs they know. The modals do not have to be for advice and suggestions. Then students can look back at the text to see if any of the modal verbs from their list appear. If they find any, they should decide what their function is (as used in the text). Point out that modal verbs can have different degrees of strength, so could and should are not as strong as must. Students could add: need to, might, have to, to the continuum.
4 Whole class Give an oral example of a modal verb followed by have + past participle, for example: He should have studied harder, and write it on the board. Concept check to make sure students appreciate that the sentence refers to the past. Then ask students what the form is for present/future time, i.e. modal + infinitive without to.
5 Alone, then pairs a
Ask students to go back to D1 and to rewrite the two examples there in the past.
b
Now students go back to the text and rewrite in the past four examples of modal verbs. Check that they use the correct structure: modal + have + past participle.
Answers You could have started your own company You should have got a four-year degree
i
ii
Ask students to write just one note for each paragraph, or allocate two or three paragraphs to each student, thereby reducing how much they have to do. You could also identify the important information in each paragraph that students need to write in note form.
Challenge
i
Ask students to try to write three notes for each paragraph.
ii
Another option is to put students into pairs: Student A reads one paragraph aloud and Student B writes notes. Then they swap roles. Finally, they look at their notes and compare them with the original text.
2 Pairs, then whole class Students should now compare their notes to see if they wrote the same or different things (there are many possible answers). They should also try to agree on the most important information contained within each paragraph. When each pair has made its decisions, have a whole-class discussion on each paragraph and agree which pieces of information are the most important.
TOP TIP
Before moving on to Activity E3, go through the Top Tip near Activity E3 of the Coursebook with the class, highlighting the key things for students to remember.
47
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
3 Alone, then pairs Using their notes from the previous activities, students work alone to complete a copy of the notes. They can look back at the text if necessary. Give them time to check with a partner when they have finished.
48
Answers 1 Get your science degree Science degree essential, usually four-year from (a) college or university Many science degrees are common, but (b) physics is also acceptable 2 Maybe get an advanced degree Large companies prefer students with (c) Masters or PhD But on-the-job training often (d) more valuable than qualifications 3 Research cosmetic companies Plenty of (e) job opportunities and number is (f) growing Industry continues to grow despite economic (g) uncertainty 4 Pick a job (h) College/Education does not usually tell you what job you will get Plenty of different jobs available, so best to choose one which (i) fits your interests 5 Get a job Important to start preparing résumé or CV (j) at university and then send it to (k) HR departments Jobs advertised in (l) newspapers as well as (m) university careers off ices 6 A temporary assignment Having a (n) temporary job can help find something more permanent in the future Use a (o) temp agency with science focus to help you get your first assignment 7 Network with other cosmetic chemists Create your own social network pages because professionals post (p) career information Also best place to begin (q) relationships with other people in the industry
TOP TIP
Students need to find the information required and transfer it in note form under the correct headings. However, even with notes, it is important that what students write is intelligible.
LANGUAGE TIP
Focus on the Language Tip before students work on Activity E4 in the Coursebook. There is a Workbook exercise which you can direct students to after they have finished Activity E5.
4 Whole class, then pairs This activity highlights the importance for students of using linking words and phrases in their writing. These will help guide the reader through the writing, and to link sentences, paragraphs and sections both forwards and backwards. Good use of linkers not only makes what has been written easier to follow, but also demonstrates confidence and fluency in writing skills. Focus on the table and the examples and point out that linkers can be used for different purposes, and in this activity students are going to focus on three of the most common uses: adding information, sequencing, and contrasting. Then students work with a partner and decide in which category the words and phrases in the box can be placed.
Answers Adding information
In addition (to) ... And Also As well as
Sequencing
Firstly, Secondly, and so on
Contrasting
But However
Finally
Although / even though
Lastly
Apart from
Furthermore Moreover
Besides Despite the fact that In spite of Nevertheless Whereas
5 Pairs Working together, students think of at least one more linking word or phrase for each category. Make sure students have an opportunity to share their answers so that everyone in the class can build up a list of useful linkers.
6 Whole class, then pairs Ask students to underline the linkers in the expanded notes for Paragraph 1. Don’t forget that and is a linking word.
Unit 7: Jobs
1
Firstly, the most important thing is to get your science degree, and this is usually a four-year course from a college or university. There are many common degrees, such as Chemistry, Chemical Engineering, Biology and Microbiology. However, Physics is also acceptable in the cosmetics industry.
Now put students into A/B pairs, but first they will work alone. Students A combines their notes for Paragraphs 2‒4 and Student B combines their notes for Paragraphs 5‒7, using linking words and phrases where appropriate. They should underline the linkers they use. There are various possible answers, and not every paragraph will require students to use the same number of linkers. In some cases, linkers may not be necessary. It is a good idea to do the summary orally first, so ask students to tell you about the text, using their notes. Give them a short introductory sentence to get them started, for example: There are many things you can do to become a cosmetic scientist. Firstly, … .
there are plenty of different jobs available so the best action is to choose one which fits your interests. 5
Get a job It’s important for students to start preparing their résumé or CV while still at university, and then send it to company HR departments. Jobs are advertised in newspapers as well as in university careers offices.
6
A temporary assignment Having a temporary job can help students to find something more permanent in the future, and using a temp agency with a focus on science jobs can help students to get their first assignment.
7
Network with other cosmetic chemists It’s a good idea to create your own social network because professionals post information about their careers online. This is also the best place to begin relationships with other people in the industry.
Differentiated activities
7 Pairs
Support
Students look at each other’s paragraphs and combine them to make one longer piece of writing.
i
ii
Get students to expand just one of their sets of notes, rather than attempting three. You could allocate different headings to different students to write, then get them to join all the writing together to make one summary. This will give these students a sense of achievement. Allow students to refer back to the text.
Challenge
i
Tell students that they are not allowed to refer to the text, so their summary will be based solely on their notes.
ii
Students have to expand notes for six rather than three paragraphs.
Possible answers 2 Maybe get an advanced degree A four-year degree is fine, but some large companies prefer to employ students with a Masters degree or a PhD. However, on-the-job training is often more valuable than qualifications. 3 Research cosmetic companies There are plenty of job opportunities for cosmetic scientists and the number is growing. Furthermore, the industry continues to grow despite economic uncertainty. 4 Pick a job A student’s college or university education does not usually tell you what job you will get in the future. But
F Listening and speaking 1 Pairs Make sure students have some idea about what NASA is and does before they start this activity. In pairs, they should discuss the two questions. Tell them not to worry if they do not know very much – they will find out more during the listening activity.
2 Whole class, then pairs Quickly go through the questions orally to check that students understand what is being asked and to clarify the type of answer required. Then, in pairs, students discuss each question and try to predict the answers. Give them plenty of freedom to speculate – they will find out the real answers when they listen.
3 Alone Prepare students for the listening activity. They do not need to find the answers to the questions in Activity F2 on the first listening, but should focus on questions a and b.
CD1, Track 16 Baruti Ngwani: Welcome to this week’s show. Today we’re going to talk about careers and, in particular, one career which some of you may believe is only for men: working
49
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
for NASA, the National Aeronautics and Space Administration in the USA! My guest is Kagiso Abaka, a careers advisor for NASA, based here in Joburg. Welcome! Kagiso Abaka: Hi, Baruti. BN: So, what does a young woman need to do in order to work for NASA? KA: The same as a young man, of course! For anyone who likes finding out how things work, solving puzzles and problems, or creating and building things, then why not consider a career in science, technology, engineering or maths? Within NASA, women work in all of these areas, and there is information available on careers and how you can prepare for them. BN: Interesting … . But what is an engineer? What does an engineer actually do?
50
KA: Good question! Engineers are the people who make things work, using power and materials. Engineers have moved the world into skyscrapers, high-speed cars, jets and, of course, space vehicles. They make our lives interesting, comfortable and fun. Everything in our daily lives relies heavily on the work of engineers: computers, television, satellites … . BN: Is there just one type of engineer, then? KA: No, there are many types, including aerospace, chemical, civil, computer, electrical, industrial, mechanical, and so on. Obviously each type specialises in a particular area. BN: Hmmm, I see. So is an engineer a scientist? KA: Not really. Scientists are knowledge seekers, who are always searching out why things happen. They are inquisitive, which means that they are always asking questions. Nature, Earth and the Universe are what fascinate the scientist. The scientist questions, seeks answers and expands knowledge. BN: What career options are available for people like this? KA: There’s an amazing variety. Careers are available in both the life and physical sciences. BN: For example? KA: For example … becoming a biologist, medical doctor or nutritionist would all require studies in life sciences, whereas a job as an astronomer, chemist, geologist, meteorologist or physicist would all involve studying the physical sciences. BN: OK, I see. I’ve also heard about technicians. What do they do? Is it different from engineers and scientists?
KA: Technicians are an important part of the NASA team. They work closely with scientists and engineers in support of their research. Their skills are used to operate wind tunnels, work in laboratories, construct test equipment, build models and support many types of research. BN: Most of our listeners are still at school, studying hard, so what should their focus be, if these types of careers are interesting to them? KA: Well, obviously, education is a critical requirement. Mathematics and science are the basis for most NASA careers and the decisions you make in school can affect your future career possibilities. BN: And after high school? KA: It can seem like a long journey, but a career as a scientist or engineer requires four to seven years of college study after high school. A bachelor’s degree requiring four years of study is the minimum necessary. Colleges and universities also offer graduate programmes where students can obtain masters and doctoral degrees. The masters programme usually takes two years. An additional two to four years is needed to earn a doctorate. BN: And for anyone who likes the idea of a career as a technician? KA: Well, technicians typically achieve a two-year Associate of Science degree. Some may continue for two additional years and obtain a bachelor’s degree in engineering technology. Others may earn a bachelor’s degree in engineering or one of the physical sciences. BN: So for those of you who want to think about a career with NASA, it may seem a long way off, but study hard and who knows? One day one of you might be walking on the moon! Adapted from http://spaceflightsystems.grc.nasa.gov
Answers a three (engineer, scientist, technician), b walking on the moon
4 Alone, then pairs The second time they listen, students should make notes about the interviewer’s questions in Activity F2. Answers a same as a young man b make things work, using power and materials, everything in our daily lives relies on the work of engineers
Unit 7: Jobs
c
no, many types – aerospace, chemical, civil, computer, electrical, industrial, mechanical
d
no – a scientist is a knowledge seeker, finding out why things happen, asking questions
e
support scientists and engineers – they operate machines, work in labs, construct equipment, build models, support research
f
education – maths and science are important at school, then college or university for a degree and Masters
5/6 Pairs Using the questions and answers from Activities F2 and F4, students take on the roles of the interviewer and the careers advisor and interview each other. When they have finished, they can check the audioscript in Appendix 3 of the Coursebook to see how much they remembered.
Reflection
Raikas’ relationship with their camels
Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 7.
Most prominent camel herders
[1]
Believe it is religious responsibility to rear camels
[1]
Consider relationship with camels as sacred / only herders not to slaughter camels [Extended only]
[1]
Exam focus
Impact of modernisation on camel trading
Reading, Exercise 3, note-making, Exercise 4, summary writing
Camel population has dropped by 50% in last 30 years
[1]
1
1982 – 1 million camels nationwide
[1]
2007 – dropped by 50% / over 80% live in Rajasthan / value of camels is less with spread of technology
[1]
Summary answer Athletic trainers are important in sports. Although about half are female, they have many difficulties. The job of a CAT is to help athletes with injuries in different work environments. The National Athletic Trainers' Association was founded in 1950 for men, but more women have become members. Furthermore, recently there are more female CATs than male. Female CATs are not represented like men and struggle in professional sport. Lastly, you need certain qualifications to become and remain a certified CAT. [80 words]
2a
Answers Off icial figures for the Pushkar fair fewer than 5,000 camels for sale
[1]
dropped from 8,000 in 2011
[1]
camels sold for around $230 each [Extended only]
[1]
51
[Total: 9 Extended, 7 Core]
2b Summary answer Traders travel great distances to reach the Pushkar fair, the world’s largest livestock farm, but fewer camels and buyers means it could soon cease to exist. It is the only time during the year where breeders earn a cash income, but because of the drop in figures for this tourist attraction, many traditions are vanishing and breeders are finding other ways to earn an income, like selling their camels for slaughter. Also, due to the economic boom in India, camel numbers have dropped because they are no longer needed for agriculture, and young Indians are seeking work in cities, leaving the older generations to ask for financial help from the government so they can invest in camel milk dairies. [119 words]
Unit 8: Communication Focus on writing NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 6: Students need to demonstrate that they can write a report, a review or an article in response to a short stimulus. This may take the form of pictures and/ or short prompts. The question includes information on the purpose, format and audience, in addition to the word count and how the marks are allocated. Specifically, students need to show that they can communicate information/ideas/opinions clearly, accurately and effectively (W1), organise ideas into coherent paragraphs using a range of appropriate linking devices (W2), use a range of grammatical structures and vocabulary accurately and effectively (W3), show control of punctuation and spelling (W4) and use appropriate register and style/format for the given purpose and audience (W5).
Learning objectives (LOs) 52
Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
A Watch, listen and talk
(because if you spell something wrong, it could mean something different).
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about how important they think spelling is in communication. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Whole class, then pairs Students are often confused about the differences between British English (BrE) and American English (AmE). While the first two activities in this section highlight some of those differences, it is also worth pointing out to students that there are far more similarities than differences. Get students to look at the seven pictures and make some guesses about what they show. The first letter for each word is given. Try to elicit the following words and write them on the board. Use BrE spelling (as given here): 1
colour/s,
5
litre,
1 Whole class, then alone
2
theatre,
6
licence,
Explain that your students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about communication. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) three different ways of communicating that the speakers mention, (b) three different ways of communicating that the speakers use with their families and friends, and (c) how important the speakers think spelling is. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
3
traveller,
7
analyse
4
centimetre,
Answers a Different ways of communicating the students mention (any three from): texting, mail, the internet, a letter. b
c
Three different ways of communicating that the students use with their families and friends: the internet, mail, texting. How important do the students think spelling is: Not that important (some applications now have auto-checking) and/or important for communication
Then get students to work with a partner to copy and complete the table in Activity A1 by writing the AmE spellings of the seven words.
Answers 1 color, 2 theater, 3 traveler,
4 5
centimeter, liter,
6
license,
7
analyze
2 Pairs Students discuss the words in the box and decide if they have BrE or AmE spellings, using their table from Activity B1 as a guide, where possible. Ask students if they can add any other words.
Unit 8: Communication
Answers fiber = AmE (AmE spelling often favours -er endings rather than BrE -re) favour = BrE (-our endings are more common in BrE than AmE) labor = AmE (-or endings are more common in AmE than BrE) paralyze = AmE (AmE prefers -ze to BrE -se) fueled = AmE (AmE tends to use single l / whereas BrE uses double ll) defense = AmE (some AmE endings are -se but in BrE they are -ce) dialogue = BrE (BrE uses -logue whereas AmE prefers -log)
LANGUAGE TIP
Apart from spelling, students should be aware that in some cases, completely different words are used in BrE and AmE for the same thing: pavement and sidewalk, for example. There are also some differences in tense usage. It does not matter which system students use (nor which one you teach), as long as you and they are consistent. Refer students to the exercise in Unit 8 of the Workbook.
6 Small groups Students continue their discussions by deciding which of the strategies in the list is the best method for recording vocabulary. There are no right or wrong answers, because everyone has their own preferences – all the methods can be useful. However, you can advise students that the following are some of the most effective: •
having a separate book for recording vocabulary
•
putting words into thematic groups
•
recording words in a sentence
These are also useful: •
writing the part of speech and how to pronounce the words
•
writing the translation of words
•
writing words in alphabetical order
•
using mnemonic devices
C Reading and vocabulary Reading 1 1 Pairs
3 Pairs Students may struggle with the correct spelling of English words. You do not need to be overly concerned about misspellings, but is worthwhile drawing students’ attention to words that often cause difficulties. In this activity, get students to work together and correct the spelling of the words a‒j. There is no need to provide answers at this point as they will see all the words in the text they are going to read in the Coursebook.
4/5 Alone, then small groups Working on their own, students think and make notes about questions (a‒c). Then, put students into small groups to discuss their ideas.
TOP TIP
We all use mnemonic devices, often without even realising it. In simple terms, they are ‘tricks’ we employ in order to remember things, whether it’s how to spell a word, to remember someone’s address or phone number, or even where to find something in the supermarket. Encourage students to go online if possible and search for different types of mnemonic devices, to see how helpful they can be.
53
Students work together to check the meaning of the words (a‒h) by matching them with an appropriate definition (1‒8).
Answers a 8, b 2, c 7,
d
6,
g
1,
e
3,
h
4
f
5,
2 Pairs The paragraphs in the text: Why is learning to spell important? are in the wrong order. Students work in pairs and use the clues (a)–(e) to reorder the paragraphs. Remind them that they do not need to worry about the gaps for the moment.
Answers 3, 2, 5, 4, 1
3 Whole class Check with students how they decided on the correct order, apart from the clues given in Activity C2.
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
4 Alone, then pairs
6 Alone, then pairs
There are three parts to this activity:
As this is quite a challenging vocabulary activity, you may want to differentiate by allocating words to different students, or allowing students to work with a partner for the whole activity.
1
Students work alone, focusing on the gaps (a‒h) and deciding what type of word or phrase (and information) is needed to complete them.
2
Students refer back to Activity C1 and use those words and phrases to complete the gaps.
3
They can compare their answers with a partner.
Differentiated activities Support
i
Allow students to work with a partner for all three parts
ii
Provide the answers for (1) and tell students to go immediately to (2).
Challenge
Instead of referring back to the words in C1, students have to remember the words and/or think of a suitable alternative.
Answers a grasp b reasonable c decent d impression
e
proven
f
overall
g
struggle
Reading 2 1 Whole class, then pairs Explain that students are going to read a newspaper article about postal services and how they are changing. Before they read, students work together and discuss questions (a‒d). As always, limit the time for each question so that students focus and do not waste time. You could allocate one or two questions to different pairs of students and then they share ideas.
Answers 54
Part of speech needed
Answer
2 Alone, then pairs
a
adjective
crucial
b
verb
correspond
c
adjective
effective
This is a guided reading activity, which encourages students to pause after each paragraph to check their understanding by answering two questions.
d
adjective
fundamental
e
noun
impression
f
noun
majority
g
noun
abbreviations
h
noun
concern
5 Pairs Now students can check if they spelt the words in Activity B3 correctly by finding them in the text.
Answers a because, b completing, c decent, d reasonable, e literacy,
f
especially,
g
university,
h
achieve,
i
surprising,
j
extremely
Answers a Seven (people, aeroplanes, bicycles, trains, trucks, animals, birds) b 19th century / 1 May 1840 c nearly three decades d VARIOUS POSSIBLE ANSWERS, for example: people no longer handwrite letters, social media most popular way to communicate nowadays e mobile phones and internet-based messaging have taken over f weighing a small parcel or buying a stamp (to put on a handwritten letter) g sent abroad/internationally h because purchases need to be delivered by a postal service i competition and sensible financial investments j much wider service/more efficient list of services/choice
Unit 8: Communication
3 Alone, then pairs If you have access to the internet, students can use it to find out the meaning of the words and phrases. If not, provide dictionaries. Students can of course refer back to the text as well.
Answers Text numbers
Figure numbers
thousands
1,000s
4500
four thousand five hundred
19th
nineteenth
Differentiated activities
two-to-three
2‒3
Support
350
three hundred and fifty
i
3.5%
three point five per cent
5 million
5 000 000
ii iii
Reduce the number of words and phrases per student to four rather than eight, and then students work together to share their ideas. Provide definitions for the words and phrases, so the activity becomes a matching task. Rather than working on their own, allow students to work with a partner.
Challenge
i
Increase the number of words and phrases per student.
ii
Students should try to use the context rather than the internet or a dictionary to find the meanings of the words and phrases.
Answers a adhesive (adjective) = used for sticking things together b strap (verb, but also noun) = to fasten things together c remote (adjective) = far away from other places d secure (adjective, but also verb) = safe e weighed down (phrasal verb) = carried or held too much f vanishing (adjective) = disappearing g century (noun) = 100 years h trend (noun, but also verb) = change or development i phenomenon (noun) = something that exists or happens j feel the heat (idiom) = face a difficult situation k revenue (noun) = financial income l held steady (verb + adverb) = remained the same m financial investments (adjective + noun) = money used to make a profit n innovation (noun) = something new and original o embracing technology (gerund + noun) = accepting new ideas and systems p injects (verb) = introduces
4 Alone, then pairs This activity gives students practice in recognising and writing numbers written as words and figures.
WORD TIP
These two words (fashion, trend) are not commonly confused, but learners may wonder about the difference in meaning and when to use them. Refer students to the practice exercise in the Workbook.
D Language focus: Passive voice 1 Whole class A passive construction occurs when the object of an action is made into the subject of a sentence. In other words, whoever or whatever is performing the action is not the grammatical subject of the sentence. Look at two examples with the class and ask them to tell you how the passive is formed.
Answer verb to be + past participle (would not be + completed, is + documented)
2 Alone, then pairs Students work alone to create full sentences, using the correct tense of the verb to be and the past participle of the underlined verb. When they have finished, students share their answers.
Answers a It was reported recently … b Although it isn’t proved … c Postal services as we know them today were not really established. d The address has been written by hand. e All mail items nowadays are mostly printed. f Worldwide letter-post traffic was estimated …
55
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
3 Pairs Students look back at the text to check their answers to Activity D2.
4 Whole class, then alone Point out the use of the modal verb would + be in the example. Then students look again at the second text and find three more examples of passive forms which include a modal verb.
Answers would have been weighed down (paragraph 3), may still be needed (5), should be seen positively (5)
E Writing: Formal letters (optional) NOTE: Writing formal letters is not assessed in Writing and Reading, Exercise 6 on the Cambridge International Examinations IGCSE® syllabus. However, the ability to write a formal letter is an important and useful English language skill.
1 Pairs, then whole class 56
In Unit 3, students wrote an informal letter, so a good way to start this section is to briefly review what they can remember about the format. Then, working in pairs, students discuss the questions in E1. Follow this with a brief class discussion to check that everyone agrees.
2 Pairs Students think about how to start a formal letter. Refer them to Activity E5 in Unit 3, in which they wrote a list of possible closing phrases, then get them to decide which endings would be suitable for a formal letter.
3 Alone, then pairs Students read the email in the Coursebook and decide if the layout is similar to the one they discussed in Activity E1. Guide students if they are struggling to detail the similarities and differences.
4/5 Alone, then pairs Students need to look at the information (a‒f) and decide which section of the email (1-6) it refers to.
Answers 1 f, 4 c, 2 d, 5 b, 3 e, 6 a Then with a partner, students discuss if they think any of the paragraphs could be joined together.
Possible answers 2 and 3 could be combined to give the reason for writing and an introduction together, and also 4 and 5, putting the writer’s opinion and conclusion together.
6 Alone, then pairs For this activity, students need to ‘notice’ the language used by the writer which makes the style formal, for example the absence of contractions.
Possible answers a great cause for concern, a young man, my personal view, let’s not forget that, I am completely confident, people would agree with me, if I am not mistaken, we should all be concerned, yours sincerely
7 Alone, then pairs There are many possible answers here. Encourage students to come up with as many variations as possible.
Possible answers something which worries me a lot, in my opinion, from my pointof-view, as far as I’m concerned, I am completely sure, everyone will have the same opinion, everyone should worry about
TOP TIP
Students sometimes worry about whether or not they should include addresses and a date when they write a letter, so this Top Tip clarifies the issue for them.
8 Pairs Tell students to read the exam-style question, then agree with their partner about what they have to do. They do not need to write anything yet. They should conclude that the question is asking them to write a formal letter to the school magazine editor, in which they need to give their views about spelling. They can use the ideas given, as well as their own.
9 Pairs Working with a partner, students look at the letter written by an IGCSE student, then identify and correct any spelling and grammar mistakes. They do not need to rewrite anything. Note that the student has written a letter, while the question asks for a report, so make students realise this. Ask them what they think would happen if they made the same mistake (they would lose marks for content, and specifically for relevance because the task would not be fulfilled, the style and register would not be appropriate, and the sense of purpose and audience would suffer.
Unit 8: Communication
Suggested answers (mistakes underlined) The letter contains spelling mistakes, some of which are repeated (cources, speling, english) but there are others: studyng, speing, cource, prizes, lenth. In places there are errors with agreement: your dictionary, your friends, and there is frequent repetition of the pronoun ‘I’. In places, sentence structure is awkward: I am a student who I am, and in others, words are used incorrectly: some informations, I am look forward to hear from you. The use of Dear ESS, a.s.a.p., Best wishes and the first name Bruno without a surname, are all inappropriate in this type of writing, and the positioning of January 29 is wrong (and not even required). However, the student has given their views and has used the prompts in the question. Hello ESS January 29 I have seen your advertisement today in my local newspaper magazine and want to get more information from you about the cources you offer people who want to improve their speling. I would like to be able to throw away your dictionary and not worry any more about making speing mistakes. I would like to help your friends and work colleagues with their speling. I am a student who I am studyng english in college and my speling is not very good so I want to improve and write better english. I need to write compositions in english and I do not have time to use a dictionary all the time at home and at school. Please will you send me some informations about your cources, the prizes and lenth and the materials you will send me and tell me when I can start a cource with ESS. I am look forward to hear from you a.s.a.p. Best wishes Bruno
10 Pairs In pairs students look at the second letter and discuss in what ways it is a better response than the previous one. This letter has a better overall style, without repetition, and clearly responds to the question prompts, with few language errors.
TOP TIP
There are no set rules for the number of paragraphs required in a letter, but you may find that students benefit from some general guidance. Also point out the importance of using the correct opening and closing phrases for a formal letter.
11 Alone This activity gives students the chance to write their own answer to the exam-style question, using the same format and style as discussed in the unit so far. Go through the question carefully again, making sure students understand exactly what they have to do, and the important information they should include to make their answer effective. Here are two sample answers written by (i) an IGCSE Extended student and (ii) an IGCSE Core student. Both these attempts would probably score in the top mark band for both content and language. i Core Dear Editor, After reading your article in the school magazine, I have decided to express my belief that spelling is a very important part of the English language. The way we spell words tells us a great deal about the history of the language, its roots. Also, I think that if people spell words in the way they choose too, there will be a lot of confusion and difficulty understanding what has been written. The rules that exist for spelling are there to make English easier to learn and also to prevent a word from being spelt lots of different ways. For these reasons, I strongly believe that people’s spelling mistakes should be corrected and not overlooked. Yours faithfully, Ronan Bolero [121 words] ii Extended Dear Editor, Language is all around us and I believe that yes, spelling is important. Although I do not agree with one of my friends who said that correct spelling shows that we care about what we write, I do think that knowing how to spell correctly shows that you care about the language. I believe that while English spelling is sometimes very difficult and it is okay to make mistakes, no English person will know if you have bad spelling when you are talking about the weather and communicating. But if you send somebody an email which is full of English spelling mistakes, this does not look very nice. If you find spelling in English difficult then I think it is a good idea to start reading an English book or get a friend to look at your writing and help you correct any mistakes before you hand in your work to your teacher. Reading newspapers and surfing the internet also helps! Spelling is important but it is not everything so don’t give up if you are having trouble spelling things in English, you will get much better with a lot of practice and patience! Yours faithfully, Annabelle White [200 words]
57
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
F Reading and writing
i Core
1 Alone, then pairs
Dear Editor,
Explain that students are going to read a text and then write a further formal letter. First students work alone and read the text, and then join with their partner to discuss the questions (a‒f).
I am writing this letter in response to the letter sent by Mr. David Davies about the hooligans in Market Street. I do agree that it is not very nice to see them there and that young people should learn to behave in a more respectful way to society and to their elders in general, but I also think that Mr. Davies behaved very badly too. Why did he not ask the ‘hooligans’ as he called them to move out the way instead of getting so angry with them?
Answers a business and social functions, casual conversation b in the book Adventures in Speaking and Writing c by what you say and how you say it d it has certain fundamental rules and principles e to acquaint readers with easy-to-follow rules for developing speaking and writing skills f email, visit the website
Anti-social behaviour is negative for all of us but treating people disrespectfully does not help the situation either. Instead of being angry, maybe Mr. Davies should try to understand how difficult life is for young people in the 21st century, how many challenges face young people and instead try to help as best as he can. Yours faithfully,
58
2 Pairs
Nikita Mavromatta. [150 words]
Students work together to give meanings for the words and phrases (a‒d). Then they use the words and phrases in sentences of their own.
ii Extended
Answers a be very beneficial, b have very high results, c display interest and eagerness, d people will respond well to you
3 Whole class, then alone Students are going to read the Dear Editor letter and then write their own response to it. Go through the letter with the whole class, making sure they understand what the topic is (crowds of young hooligans outside the shopping mall), what the writer’s views are about it (he thinks the young people’s behaviour is unacceptable) and what he thinks the solution is (these louts should get a job and learn some manners). Then ask students what they think about the behaviour of young people today, and how they will respond to Mr Davies’s views. During the whole class discussion, you can encourage students to make notes, which they can then use in their own writing. Here are two sample answers written by (i) an IGCSE Core student and (ii) an IGCSE Extended student. Both these attempts would probably score in the top mark band for both content and language.
Dear Editor, I am writing to express my anger at a letter I recently saw in the weekly newspaper, written by Mr Davies. I believe his description of teenagers to be very disrespectful and unfair. He seems to be under the impression that because he came across a group of ‘young hooligans’, all teenagers are sure to be like them. Although I am aware that my generation’s behaviour can be very often rude and disrespectful, I do not like the fact that he is of the opinion that all teenagers are lazy and should get a job! Mr Davies should also understand, that a lot has changed since he was our age, and it is wrong of him to think that our behaviour, and the way we pass our time would be the same as himself when he was young. Not all teenagers spend their free time shouting in the streets. The majority are hard-working, normal young people who are focusing on their future. These sorts of generalisations are what give teenagers a bad reputation, and it is neither fair nor correct! Thank you for your time. Yours faithfully, Marinos Papakyriacou [192 words]
Unit 8: Communication
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 8.
Exam focus
really do think it is a success and wish to thank you once again for the great idea! Yours faithfully, Christiana Grey [197 words] 2
Writing Exercise 6 1
i
Here are two sample answers written by (i) an IGCSE Core student and (ii) an IGCSE Extended student. Both these attempts would probably score in the top mark band for both content and language. Core
Dear Sir/ Madam, I am writing to express my delight at the new cinema complex that has recently opened in our town. There aren’t many fun places for young people to visit in our town, so it’s nice to be able to go to the cinema when we want to hang out with friends. The old cinema complex didn’t have much choice, but with this new one we have six screens to choose from, so there is always a film that we can enjoy. Also, even if we don’t fancy watching a film, we enjoy going around the shops that are in the complex and sitting at one of the cafes. We’re very lucky that we can spend our time in a friendly modern environment with lots to do! Thank you again for opening the new cinema complex. Sincerely, Ling Zhang [141 words] ii Extended Dear Mr. Panayides, I am writing this letter to congratulate you on the opening of the new cinema complex in Larnaka. The old cinema that has now closed had been there for ten years and was in need of renovation! It was dirty, smelly and everything inside it looked grey. This new cinema complex on the other hand, is brand new, looks amazing and smells fantastic! Many people have said that this new cinema was not necessary and that it was a waste of money but I personally disagree. This new cinema complex has given me and my friends opportunities to work and has brought life to a town that was beginning to look like a ghost city. We also now have somewhere to go at the weekends to have a coffee and relax instead of sitting on the pavements with nowhere to go and annoying many people with our presence. The new cinema complex is a place that can be enjoyed not only by us young people but also by the older generation. I
i
Here are two sample answers written by (i) an IGCSE Core student and (ii) an IGCSE Extended student. Both these attempts would probably score in the top mark band for both content and language. Core
Dear Sir I am sending this email to ask about the course in healthy eating and learning how to prepare healthy meals. I believe this course is useful for my schoolmates and I to att end and I would like to ask a few questions. Firstly, could you please tell me when the course takes place and also how much will it cost? It is very important that we do not miss any lessons as we are still at school! Also can anybody join the course or do you need to have any knowledge about healthy eating? Is it possible for any age group to join the course? We are very interested and we hope to learn how to be able to cook a few healthy meals and to be able to go to the supermarket and buy ingredients that are healthy and good for us! Yours faithfully, Alex George [149 words] ii Extended Dear Sir/Madam, I am writing to enquire after the healthy eating course which I saw advertised in my local supermarket. I believe the course could be useful for myself and my friends, but I would like to know more about it before we apply. Firstly, could you please tell me where the course actually takes place and how much it will cost, as this will affect our final decision. There is also the question of whether or not there is an age restriction for the course. My friends and I are all under the age of 18, and my mother is also interested in joining, so does it matt er what ages we are? My friends and I are very keen on joining the course. We believe that it could be a very enlightening experience for us, and will open our eyes to a healthier lifestyle. We really want to come out of this experience, knowing more about eating healthy meals and also learning to prepare them on our own. I hope you can get back to me soon. Sincerely, Abel Dourand [181 words]
59
Unit 9: Interviews Focus on listening: short extracts and multiple-choice questions NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Listening Exercise 4 (multiple-choice questions): Students listen to a discussion between two speakers and answer multiplechoice questions. The discussion is informal between two speakers, with a host to introduce the discussion. Students need to show understanding of the connections between ideas, opinions and attitudes (L3) and understand what is implied but not directly stated, e.g. gist, speaker’s purpose, intention and feelings (L4).
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Whole class, then pairs You could introduce this unit by asking if any students have (or would like to have) a part-time job. Then, get students to work together and look at the five pictures. They need to speculate about what they think might have happened both before and after the pictures were taken. Obviously there are no right or wrong answers. Monitor the discussions, but do not interfere, and be ready to provide positive feedback.
Learning objectives (LOs) Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons. 60
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that your students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about interviews. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) three different ways of preparing for a part-time job interview that the speakers think are effective, and (b) three part-time jobs that the speakers mention. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a The best ways to prepare for a part-time job interview) any three from: research everything about the position, research the company, be enthusiastic, practice in front of a mirror. b Three part time jobs mentioned by the students: working in a charity shop, working in a coffee shop, freelance illustrator.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other what they think are the best ways to prepare for an interview. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
2 Pairs your students in pairs discuss questions a and b.
3 Small groups Check if students know what the abbreviation CV stands for (curriculum vitae). This is a Latin phrase meaning ‘path of’ (curriculum) ‘life’ (vitae) and it is used to give employers detailed information about a person’s life to date. Students agree on what information a CV should include and make a list of headings. Obviously ‘Education’ is an important part – other headings are mentioned in the next activity.
4 Pairs Students look at the list and compare it with the one they made in the previous activity. They should also think about the best order for the headings to appear in a CV.
C Listening 1 Alone, then whole class Prepare students for the listening activity. Ask them who Janine Mesumo is (a careers advisor) and what they think her job involves (e.g. giving advice to students about future careers and about studying). Then students listen to the interview and check the order of the headings in Activity B4.
CD1, Track 17 Pablo Selles: We are very lucky to have in our studio today Janine Mesumo, who works as a careers advisor at an international school in Madrid. Her main role is to advise students who have recently completed their IGCSEs, AS and A Levels on what
Unit 9: Interviews
they should do next. Part of this is giving them advice on writing their first CV. Have I got that right, Janine? Janine Mesumo:
Absolutely, Pablo. Actually, a great deal of my time is spent in helping students draw up their CV, which can be quite problematic when you haven’t yet had any work experience.
PS:
What areas should first-time CV writers include?
JM:
I think the key here is not to try to include too much. Prospective employers need to be able to get a quick overview, rather than a detailed biography of someone’s life – that can come at the interview. However, there needs to be enough information, so that the employer can decide whether or not to call the applicant for an interview.
PS:
Hmm, I see. So what information would you say is essential?
JM:
Start with personal details: name, address, contact details. You’d be surprised how many people forget to put their telephone number and email address on their CV! Then, education and qualifications. Some people recommend combining these two areas; so, for example, you might say ‘1999–2001, International School, Madrid, six IGCSEs in Maths, English …’, and so on, rather than listing the qualifications in a different section.
PS:
That’s an interesting idea – I like that! What comes next?
JM:
Well, this is where some students become rather worried, because usually the next section is work experience.
PS:
But often students don’t have any work experience!
JM:
Exactly, and so they worry about leaving a blank. But as a school or college-leaver, nobody is going to expect you to have an employment history, so there really is no need to worry. However, it is worth mentioning
weekend or after-school jobs, or any work for charities, or voluntary work. PS:
OK, and after that? What about hobbies and interests?
JM:
Yes, it is important to include leisure interests, but a common mistake is simply to list things, for example: ‘reading, football, music’.
PS:
So what should our listeners do?
JM:
Instead of simply giving a list, explain in what way these things interest you or what skills you have developed through them. For example, if you put reading, give details about what you like to read …
PS:
… and if you list music, what types of music you like listening to.
JM:
Exactly, but also, music might mean playing an instrument, so give that information as well. Or if you’re the captain of a sports team, include that information as it demonstrates leadership skills.
PS:
Any other sections that need to be included?
JM:
Well, two really. The first should include any skills which have not been mentioned before, such as IT skills, proficiency in other languages (don’t just put ‘French’!), and details of any organisations or clubs which you belong to. And finally, give the names, addresses and contact details for two referees.
PS:
Which are what?
JM:
A referee is a person who would be willing to write about you in a positive way! Always check with the person before you put their name on your CV.
PS:
Janine, we’re coming to the end of our time. Thank you very much for a very informative chat. If any listeners would like more information on writing their CV, just go onto our website and you’ll find everything you need.
Answers Personal details, Education and Qualifications, Work experience, Hobbies, Languages, Referees
TOP TIP
Remind students to read all three options before they choose the best one.
2 Alone, then pairs Students read through the multiple-choice questions (a‒h), and predict the answers (A, B or C) for each one. Encourage them to look for key words in the questions, but
61
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
they do not need to finalise their answers yet. Allow some time for students to check with their partner.
Play the audio again and get students to confirm their predictions from C2 as they listen. Then gather class feedback, checking that everyone understands the reasons for the answers.
I love reading books and watching my favourite basketball team the Bosco Steels Other skills I speak Swazi and English, but Swazi is my first language, and I am competent in all skills in both languages
d
C,
g
C,
I am a member of the Bosco Steels fan club
e
A,
h
A
Referees
f
C,
4/5 Pairs Students work in pairs to remember and write notes about some of the content of the interview. Students need to answer four of the interviewer’s questions. Refer them to the audioscript in Appendix 3 of the Coursebook.
D Writing 62
None so far Hobbies and interests
3 Alone, then whole class
Answers a B, b B, c A,
Work experience
1 Pairs In this section, students will finally write their own CV. Before doing this, they look at the example in Activity D1 and identify the mistakes that the writer (Sophie Labane) has made in her own CV. She has omitted some important information (such as her phone number) and has put some information in the wrong place (e.g. referees should appear at the end).
Possible answers Curriculum Vitae Personal details Name: Sophie Labane Email: [email protected]
Mr Al Faisal, Head Teacher, Manzini High School, PO Box 1234, Manzini, Swaziland [email protected] Doctor Masia Lemba, PO Box 6789, Manzini, Swaziland [email protected]
2 Pairs In pairs, students should discuss the information that could go into their own CV. They should also consider information that they would not include. Obviously 15‒16year-olds will probably feel that they do not have much to say about themselves, but they can definitely provide information for the Personal details, Education, Hobbies and interests, Other skills, and Referees sections.
3 Whole class, then alone, then pairs Go through the template with the class, checking again that they understand what needs to be written in each section. If students genuinely feel they do not have enough to write, tell them that they can make up some of the details (e.g. for the section on Work experience). Then students can share their CVs and check the content.
Phone number: 54928519278
Sample answer Personal details
Address: PO Box 4321, Manzini, Swaziland
Name:
Benilda Dantos
Education & qualifications
Address:
10, Jimmy Abbad Street, Manila, Philippines
Email:
[email protected]
Telephone:
0063 78905634
2011–today: Manzini High School, Swaziland Studying for High School leaving certificate as well as IGCSEs in three different subjects: Maths, French, and Music.
Education and qualifications
I received grade B for IGCSE English as a Second Language in 2014
Long Street Secondary School: IGCSE Mathematics, IGCSE Chemistry, IGCSE English
Before 2011: Manzini Primary School, Swaziland
Manila Primary School
Unit 9: Interviews
Work experience Cashier at ‘Fashion Forward’ department store Hobbies and interests I enjoy watching international movies with my friends at a small cinema in my neighbourhood. Also, I play tennis twice a week and I attend dance lessons. Other skills I am fluent in Filipino, French and have a good knowledge of English. I am a member of the Red Cross. Referees Mary Johnson – English teacher, 0063 76379710 Ian Ocampo – Manager at ‘Fashion Forward’ department store, 0063 57140022
E Listening LANGUAGE TIP
There are quite a few ‘person’ nouns in English with the suffix -ee or -er, with a change in word stress, but many are not relevant for your students. However, check if they can think of any besides the two given (employee and interviewee) – for example evacuee, nominee. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
Job interview 1 1/2 Pairs, then whole class Refer students to the job advertisement before Activity E3 of the Coursebook and explain that they are going to listen to a student being interviewed for the job with ‘Winning Sports’. In pairs, they should write down possible questions the interviewer might ask the interviewee (two examples are given). Students should then move on to think about the possible answers the interviewee might give. Each pair of students will have similar questions and answers, but they will not be exactly the same, so you could spend some time asking the class which questions and answers they think are the best.
3 Alone, then pairs Students listen to the interview and make notes about the interviewee’s technique when answering the questions. She does not perform very well, using inappropriate language in many places (e.g. Nope … I checked it out … , Er, yeah) and she does not supply all the information the
interviewer asks for. Give students some time to compare their notes with a partner’s.
CD1, Track 18 Interviewer: Good morning, Miss Gupta. Please take a seat. Abha Gupta: Thanks. Int’er: Did you have any problems getting here? AG: Nope, I found the address very easily. I checked it out yesterday. Int’er: I see. Now, you’ve just left school with four IGCSEs. Is that correct? AG: Yeah. Int’er: And the subjects? AG: Oh, right, err, let me think now … Science, English, Art and Music. Int’er: Thank you. Which of those was your favourite subject at school? AG: I didn’t really like any of them. The teachers were not very interesting. I must’ve been really lucky to pass them. Int’er: And which school did you attend? AG: The new one, behind the park at the start of the motorway. Int’er: I see. Now, tell me something about your interests, the things that you do in your free time. AG: Well, not much really. I like riding my bike. That’s why I think this job would be good for me. Int’er: Because you like riding a bike? AG: Er, yeah. The job’s to do with sport, isn’t it? Int’er: Yes, Miss Gupta, it is. Have you had any work experience yet – for example a weekend job? AG: Well, yes, I had a job with my brother washing cars. We used to do it in our free time. We got loads of money to spend on clothes and DVDs, or for going to the cinema and other things. Int’er: What personal qualities do you think you could offer us here at ‘Winning Sports’? AG: Well, like I told you, I like sports, especially riding my bike, and every weekend I go to the match, if they’re playing at home, of course. What else do you want to know? Int’er: I think that’s all for the time being, Miss Gupta.
63
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
AG:
Int’er: Yes, thank you very much, Miss Gupta. That’s all. Goodbye. AG:
Maps on my smartphone, just in case. I arrived two hours early!
Is that it? LH:
That shows good initiative! Now, what is it about the job that interests you?
B:
Well, first of all, I visited your website when I saw the advertisement, and discovered more about the format of Teen Weekly, and that really interested me.
LH:
It did? Why?
B:
Basically, I just love writing. Ever since I was a child, I’ve been writing stories and trying to write poems too. I’ve also won three writing competitions.
LH:
Congratulations! Is there anything else that demonstrates your love for writing?
B:
Well, I’ve been editor of our online school webzine for two years, and I also publish my own monthly blog.
LH:
Excellent! Now, obviously our readership is teenagers, young people who are still at school. What do you think are the main interest areas for your age group?
B:
I guess for many teenagers, myself included, the most interesting topic is celebrity gossip and stories about film stars and musicians, sports people, important people – where they are, what they are doing, and so on. But not just gossip. I think many teens are interested in their society and culture, as well as global issues like the environment.
LH:
Good. Anything else?
B:
Well, for many teenagers, becoming an adult is a scary thought, and they often want to discuss their future education and careers.
LH:
Thank you, Bambos. Now, is there anything you would like to ask me?
B:
Really? How interesting! Did you have any trouble finding our office, ummm … Bambos?
Well, yes, Ms Huang, I have some questions. I made a note on my phone – can I check them?
LH:
Please, go ahead … .
Not at all, Ms Huang. I came yesterday to make sure I knew exactly how to find you, and to check how much time I would need. And today I used Google
Possible answers Bambos introduces himself politely; he gives some information about himself; he speaks clearly and accurately; he answers the questions fully; he uses a
Did I get the job?
Int’er: I’ll be in touch. Goodbye.
4 Alone, then pairs Students listen to four of the interviewer’s questions, without any answers. This time students need to answer the questions themselves, using their notes from Activity E2, then compare their own answers with their partner’s responses.
CD1, Track 19 Int’er: Did you have any problems getting here? Int’er: Now, tell me something about your interests, the things that you do in your free time. Int’er: Have you had any work experience yet – for example, a weekend job? Int’er: What personal qualities do you think you could offer us here at ‘Winning Sports’?
Job interview 2 64
1/2 Alone, then pairs Prepare students to listen to the first part of another job interview. Refer them to the Teen Weekly advert to familiarise themselves with the job. As they listen, students need to write down three positive things about the interviewee’s performance. Go through the example in the Coursebook to make students fully understand. After listening, students can compare their ideas with a partner.
CD1, Track 20 Part A Lan Huang:
Hello, have a seat. My name’s Lan Huang. And you are … Mr Hairilombus Papachristofer [hesitantly], is that correct?
Bambos:
Hello, pleased to meet you. Actually, the pronunciation is Haralambous Papachristoforou. Most people call me Bambos, for short. I’m Greek, on my father’s side.
LH:
B:
Unit 9: Interviews
relaxed style, but is still quite formal and polite; he has questions prepared for the interviewer
F Listening and speaking 1/2/3 Alone, then pairs
3 Pairs Students work in pairs and predict the questions that Bambos might ask the interviewer, as well as Lan Huang’s possible answers. Go through the example in the Coursebook before they start.
4/5 Alone, then pairs Students listen to the audio and compare their predictions with what Bambos and Lan Huang actually say. They can work together and compare their answers, then refer to Appendix 3 of the Coursebook to make a final check.
CD1, Track 21 Part B Bambos:
OK, firstly, what is the commitment in terms of time? I assume it’s a part-time position, as I’m still at school?
Lan Huang: Yes, of course. It’s very part-time, so only 20 hours per month. B:
Great. Secondly, would I be able to work from home?
LH:
Absolutely! In fact, we prefer you to do that. We would probably need you here for a meeting once every two to three months.
B:
Perfect. Umm … thirdly, the advertisement mentions ‘competitions’. What type of things do you ask your readers to do for these?
LH:
Good question! To be honest, this is a new idea and something that we want the successful applicant for the job to consider.
B:
Really? That’s awesome. OK, finally, is the salary paid weekly or monthly?
LH:
As it’s a part-time job, based on monthly hours, the company pays at the end of each calendar month.
B:
Thank you. That answers all my questions.
LH:
Thank you, Bambos. It was a pleasure meeting you.
In this speaking section, students are going to interview each other for the Youth Club job (see Activity F1 of the Coursebook). Firstly, they need to read through the advertisement and check they understand everything (e.g. who should apply, what the job involves, how they can apply). Then, students prepare for the interview. Student A should use the CV they wrote earlier in the unit and their ideas on interview techniques in order to prepare themselves. Student B should draw up some questions to ask Student A – again using ideas from the unit, and should refer to Student A’s CV during the interview itself.
Differentiated activities Support
Put all the As together and all the Bs together during the preparation stage, so that they can help and support each other. Challenge
Have two interviewers per candidate instead of one. One interviewer is in favour of the candidate, while the other is not. They need to prepare their questions together and think carefully how they will perform the interview. When everyone is ready, students pair up (A + B) and carry out the interview. If you have an odd number of students, make one group of one A (interviewee) + two Bs (interviewers). If you can video or audio record the interviews, this is an effective way for students to see and hear their spoken language. If time permits, students A and B can exchange roles.
4 Pairs Allow some time for students to reflect on how they felt while they were being interviewed, to think about which questions were the most challenging, and which part of the interview was the most stressful. Encourage them to give reasons.
6 Whole class
5 Pairs
Ask the class whether they think Bambos got the job. Make sure they give full reasons for their answers.
B students give A students feedback on their performance, and inform them of whether or not they are getting the job!
65
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
TOP TIP
If you were able to video your students doing the interviews, this would be an ideal opportunity to point out examples of body language. Alternatively, you could replay some of the introductory videos from the units in the Coursebook.
6 Whole class, then alone This is an exam-style practice question. Go through the instructions and the Top Tip, and check that students understand everything, as well as the seven statements A‒G. Then play the audio. If you feel your students need more support, you could stop after each speaker (1‒6) and discuss the answers that students have.
Answers 1D, 2C, 3A, 4G, 5F, 6B
WORD TIP 66
These two words (fault, drawback) appear in the listening. Fault, in particular, can be used in different ways. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
CD1, TRACK 22 Speaker 1 – female adult I was terribly nervous before my first job interview, so it’s not really surprising that I didn’t get the job! It was all my fault*. I was very late, and when I did finally arrive I was hot and bothered and I looked a complete mess. Very unprofessional. Also, I had dropped my interview notes on the bus so I couldn’t remember the questions that I wanted to ask. My advice of course is to be prepared, and don’t copy my example, because that will only end in disaster! Speaker 2 – male adult If you go online you’ll find pages and pages of advice about how to prepare for a job interview, and, to be honest, you can waste loads of time trying to find the perfect strategy. But in my experience the drawback* is that they all really give you the same advice, which is simply: relax and be yourself! Easier said than done I think. However, no matter how well you have prepared yourself, if on the day you appear nervous and try to pretend to be someone else, you are definitely not going to do very well.
Speaker 3 – female adult (older) I’m quite old now so I don’t think I’ll be attending any more job interviews! But during my life I’ve been to a few, and in the latter part of my career, up until about three years ago, I was the one doing the interviewing. I must’ve done over a hundred. It was interesting being the one asking all the questions, and watching the interviewee squirming in their seat when I asked a difficult question! Having said that, I think I was a good interviewer because I always remembered my own days in the hot seat! Speaker 4 – male teenager I’ve only had one job interview so far, for a part-time job in a supermarket. Even though the job was only stacking the shelves at weekends, I spent hours preparing for the interview, going online, trying to find the best strategies for doing well. I even got my parents and friends to do practice interviews with me. In the end, the interview only lasted about five minutes, and I was actually very disappointed, even though I got the job! Speaker 5 – female teenager I haven’t had a face-to-face interview yet, but I did do an internet interview last year. It was for a part-time tele-sales job. Basically, the job was to phone people and try to sell them a different product each week, like make-up, or some other cosmetics. The interview wasn’t difficult. It was an internet call and there was no video, so I’ve never actually seen the people who employ me, which is a bit strange. But I got the job and it’s ok for now, but not something I want to do for the rest of my life. Speaker 6 – male adult (older) Since a very early age I worked with my dad in his carpenter’s workshop, along with one of my dad’s brothers. When my dad and his brother retired, I took over running the place, and stayed there until I myself retired, five years ago now. So, you may not actually believe this, but I have never had a job interview in my whole life! Does that make me very lucky or have I missed out on something special? I can’t say it’s something I’ve ever worried about actually.
G Language focus: Imperative verb forms 1 Pairs The imperative (base form of the verb) is common in English, and can be used for various functions, as described in the Coursebook. Ask students for other
Unit 9: Interviews
functions (e.g. warning, request) and then they look at the three examples and discuss the function of each one.
Answers a advice, suggestion, recommendation, b offer, c advice, suggestion, recommendation
2 Alone, then pairs Students work alone to decide on the function of each phrase, and then share with their partner.
Answers a warning, b request, c advice, suggestion, recommendation, d offer, e order, command, f request, g instruction, h advice, suggestion, recommendation, i offer
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 9.
Exam focus Listening, Exercise 4, multiple choice questions CD1, Track 23 Joshua (teenage male): Good morning, Mrs Karima. Thank you for finding time to speak to me today. Mrs Karima (adult female): Hello, Joshua, it’s good to see you outside the classroom! J: Mrs Karima, can you give us some advice about what we need to do in order to find our first job? Mrs K: Well, with no or little real-world work experience, you may be concerned that you won’t qualify for many jobs, or that there aren’t many jobs available. However, your grades, school activities,
3 Alone, then pairs Students read the audioscript interview in Appendix 3 of the Coursebook (between Pablo and Janine) and find more examples of the imperative form.
Answers start with personal details, explain in what way, give details about, give that information, include that information, give the names, always check with, just go onto our website
4 Alone, then pairs Students now practise producing the imperative form. They should work alone to think of their answers, and then discuss with a partner. There are many possible answers.
Possible answers a Please stop talking so loudly! / Can’t you be quiet?! b Take some aspirin, Go and lie down c Have another slice / Try some more, d Help yourself to anything you want / Have a seat / Make yourself comfortable, e Listen carefully / Go online and find the map, f Try asking yourself why it happened / Talk to someone at school
club memberships and volunteer activities can demonstrate qualities that employers look for. A parttime job can be a first step into the working world. J: The problem is that we don’t have enough time to work during term time, especially when exams are getting close. Mrs K: I appreciate that, Joshua, and of course you are right – studying must come first. But when the holidays arrive, you really should try to work. You can take on more hours and take on more responsibilities that will help you establish job experience. J: Why is getting a part-time summer job so important? Mrs K: Summer jobs often open doors for jobs during other parts of the year. Be sure to keep in touch with previous employers, as that may help you get hired again. Part-time jobs for teenagers can also lead to full-time employment and even future careers. Some jobs for teens may even include on-the-job training that will help you get started in your new position, or even start to develop a career.
67
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
J: How important is it to have a CV ready? Mrs K: Even if you’ve never worked before, you should start to develop a résumé or CV. You can highlight your achievements at school or college, club memberships and social activities that demonstrate characteristics beneficial in a future job. You’ll definitely be one step ahead of most of your friends when you walk into an interview with a résumé which includes your current skill set. J: So, Mrs K, let’s say I’m interested in a job I’ve seen advertised. What should I do to be ready? Mrs K: Most teen jobs will require you to go through at least a brief interview before you are hired. You should dress neatly, be well-groomed, and be prepared to tell someone why you want the job. Most employers will understand that you’re just trying to make some extra money. But if you can explain how getting this job will help you develop yourself, or even benefit others, then you’ll be ahead of the game. J: That also makes a lot of sense. What other things should I tell the interviewer? 68
Mrs K: Be ready to explain what skills you have that will allow you to perform this job successfully. For example, are you the one whose friends are always asking for computer help, or do you organise and run a club or committee at school, or are you just really good with people? Highlight your strengths and explain why you are their best choice for this job. J: But doesn’t that make me sound like a big head?
Mrs K: Absolutely not! People in interviews who sell themselves are much more likely to be offered a job. Something else to remember is that jobs for teens are primarily part-time, and may only allow you to work as many hours as you are legally allowed to. In some cases, you can only work up to 16 hours per week, or a maximum of 70 hours in any one month. If you are slightly older, an A Level student, it’s 18 and 80 hours. Make sure you understand the requirements of the job and that the employer knows how much time you are willing and available to work. J: I hadn’t thought of that. What’s your final suggestion? Mrs K: It’s worth remembering that employers like to re-hire teens with a good work history. A part-time summer job or holiday job may be temporary work, but it could lead to bigger and better things! So, always try to leave on good terms with your employers, so that they can provide a good reference for you to use in your next job search. J: Mrs K, thank you for talking to me. Mrs K: You’re welcome, Joshua.
Answers a B, b C, c A, d C,
e
C,
f
C,
g
B,
h
A
Unit 10: Education Focus on speaking: topic cards NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs): In the Cambridge IGCSE speaking examination, students need to communicate ideas/opinions clearly, accurately and effectively (S1), develop responses and link ideas using a range of appropriate linking devices (S2), use a range of grammatical structures and vocabulary accurately and effectively (S3), show control of pronunciation and intonation patterns (S4) and engage in a conversation and contribute effectively to help move the conversation forward (S5).
Learning objectives (LOs) Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Pairs Students look at the five pictures which show students studying in different ways. Working in pairs, students name at least two things that they can see in each picture.
2 Pairs Of course, everyone has their own preferences in terms of how they study, but picture 1 which shows a teenager at their desk sleeping is probably the least effective study method. Give students time to talk about each picture and to make their own conclusions. 69
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about education. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) the three best ways to study that the speakers mention, and (b) in what ways the speakers think exam studying is different from doing homework. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a The best ways to study, any three from: using technology, using Google, printing past papers and mark schemes online, studying alone to concentrate, studying with a partner. b
In what ways do the students think that studying for an important exam is different from doing homework: homework is taking in knowledge and applying it, studying for an exam involves doing past papers.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about what they think are the best ways to study. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get
3 Pairs Students look at the seven study methods (a‒g) and discuss which might help them to study more effectively. Obviously there are no right or wrong answers here so allow students to discuss freely.
C Reading and speaking The approach to reading in this section will generate multiple opportunities for students to speak to each other.
1 Whole class, then pairs Tell students that the text they are going to read is called Study Less, Study Smart. Get students to tell you what they think this means and if they like the idea of Study Less, Study Smart. Then they look quickly at the text to do two things: (i) check which study methods in the previous section are mentioned (ANSWERS: (i) 2 a Break up study time into smaller chunks, 4 b Quiz yourself, 3 d Find a dedicated study area, 6 f Teach others), and (ii) make a note of two further study methods mentioned in the internet article (ANSWERS: 5 Take good notes, 7 Read textbooks effectively).
2 Alone, then pairs Students need to work alone to read the text in more detail and decide if the information (a-e) is true or false.
69
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Then they can compare with their partner, making sure they give reasons for their answers.
Answers a true, b true, c false (Don’t study where you do anything else),
d
false (not often),
e
false (is an acquired skill),
3 Whole class, then pairs Get students to re-read paragraph 7 Read textbooks effectively and ask them to tell you what they think the SQ3R method involves and how it works. Then in pairs they talk specifically about the five steps: survey, question, read, recite, review, and what happens in each step. Do NOT let them read the paragraph in Activity C4 yet.
4 Alone
70
The paragraph introduces the SQ3R method in a little more detail, and gives an important piece of advice about reading. Give students a minute to read the paragraph and identify the specific advice.
Answer Train your mind to learn while reading with SQ3R.
5 Whole class and then groups of four A, B, C and D Reciprocal teaching is an approach where students become the teachers, usually in groups of four. The teacher first of all demonstrates clearly what the students need to do, and then supports them in group discussions where they use four different strategies: clarifying, question generating, summarising, and predicting. Students take it in turns to apply each of the four strategies to different parts of a text or texts. This is a reciprocal reading activity, in which different students do different things with the same piece of text. If you do not have enough students to make groups of four, students could work in pairs and each student completes two tasks instead of one. Ensure your students understand that each person in the group (or pair) will be doing something slightly different, even though everyone will be looking at the same text. This approach to reading is useful if you want to differentiate, because the four reading strategies offer different levels of challenge to students. Firstly, model the four strategies: clarifying, question generating, summarising, and predicting, using the
introductory paragraph, with the whole class. Get the A students to think of a clarifying question or statement, for example: What does the word gain mean? or I think recite means to say something aloud, and so on. Then the B students think of a comprehension question, for example: What is the result of just ‘doing it’? Next, the C students summarise the information they have read, for example: SQ3R has five steps which can help students to understand important information in a text and so on. Finally, the D students predict what they think they will read next, for example: I believe we will read in more detail how the SQ3R method actually works and so on. When you are sure students understand what they have to do, tell them that they are going to read more about SQ3R, using the reciprocal reading approach.
6 Pairs Ask students to look at the six words and phrases in the box, and then match them to the six underlined words and phrases in the text. They do not need to read the text in detail at this point.
Answers concentrate = focus on, get ready = prepare, ignore = overlook, support = aid, understand = comprehend, visuals = graphics
7 Groups of four A, B, C and D Either allocate different strategies to students (as per the instructions in the Coursebook) from Activity C5, or, if you feel students would be more confident using the same strategy they practised before (C5), allow them to keep the same letter (A, B, C or D). Then, using the text from C6, students work in groups of four (or pairs) and apply their strategy. Various answers are possible. The important thing to remember is that you are encouraging students to interact in different ways with the text, and this interaction will lead to better understanding. Remember to give students time to share their questions and answers.
8 Groups of four A, B, C and D Working in the same groups of four, students are going to continue their reading, but now each student in the group is going to read a different short paragraph. Firstly, students should change letter one more time, and then find out where their text is at the back of the Coursebook
Unit 10: Education
in Appendix 2. Each student will not be able to see the other students’ texts.
b
‘0’ present + present, 1st present + will, 2nd past + modal + infinitive, 3rd past perfect + modal + have + past participle
c
‘0’ always true, scientific facts, 1st high probability present/future time, 2nd low probability present/ future time, 3rd impossibility past time
Student A: paragraph in Appendix 2 of the Coursebook. Student B: paragraph in Appendix 2 of the Coursebook. Student C: paragraph in Appendix 2 of the Coursebook. Student D: paragraph in Appendix 2 of the Coursebook.
2 Pairs
Explain to students that this time when they read, they need to make two‒three written notes about the content of their paragraph. They do not need to apply the previous four strategies: clarifying, question generating, summarising, and predicting. When students understand what they have to do, give them three‒four minutes to find and read their text, and then write their notes. Tell students that they are going to use their notes to teach the others in their group.
Students use the information in the box to make rules about the four common conditional types and to check their answers to Exercise D1b.
9 Groups of four A, B, C and D When students are ready, each person in the group tells the others what they have read, referring only to their notes. They are not allowed to re-read nor refer to the text. When everyone in the group has had a chance to speak, students can read the other three texts that they have not yet seen, and compare the content with what their partners told them.
WORD TIP
These two words (engage, concentrate) appeared in paragraph A (Appendix 2) which students have just read. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
D Language focus: ‘Alternative’ conditional structures 1 Pairs At this stage in their studying, students will no doubt have come across ‘conditionals’ on multiple occasions. This first activity gets students to recall what they already know by doing three things: a
writing example sentences which contain different conditional structures,
b
analysing the form/structure of each one, and
c
identifying the function of each one. Give students time to work in pairs to answer the three questions.
Possible Answers a ‘0’ conditional: If you heat ice, it melts, 1st conditional: If you eat that, you could be sick, 2nd conditional: If he ran faster, he might get there more quickly
Answers Present 0
Present
1
Present
will + infinitive
2
Past
Modal + infinitive
3
Past perfect
Modal + have + past participle
3 Alone, then pairs Students compare the sentences they wrote earlier in D1a with the four sentences (a‒d) from the text they read, to identify if they used the same or similar structures, or completely different ones. The four sentences (a‒d) show that conditionals do not always follow expected patterns. For example, in (b): If you’re learning new material at school, it can be completely overwhelming, the verb in the ‘if’ clause is present continuous, and in the result clause the verb is modal infinitive. In (c), the result verb is an imperative, and in (d) the ‘if’ clause verb is present perfect followed by an imperative in the result clause.
LANGUAGE TIP
The Language Tip reinforces the point that conditionals do not always follow the rules, and that different combinations of structures are often possible. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
4 Pairs This activity further reinforces the point that conditionals do not always follow the traditional, fixed structure patterns that students have probably been exposed to and learnt over the years. Students work in pairs and match the structure combinations (a‒d) to the four sentences in D3.
Answers a b, b d,
c
c,
d
a
71
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
5 Pairs Give students a few minutes to study and discuss the pair of sentences and check their understanding of the difference between using When and If. Use when to imply that something will definitely happen, or is happening, and use if when there’s uncertainty about something happening. i
When you’re learning new material at school or college, it can be completely overwhelming.
ii
If you’re learning new material at school or college, it can be completely overwhelming.
However, in some cases, there is very little difference in meaning:
72
i
When you heat ice, it melts.
ii
If you heat ice, it melts.
If you can’t, look back at the chapter and refresh your memory, check what you remember, and then continue reading the subsequent chapters. (modal infinitive + imperative)
7 Alone, then pairs Students need to select six different conditional structure combinations that they have seen in the unit and use them to write their own sentences. If your students are already confident in using the more traditional conditional structures (0, 1st, 2nd, 3rd), encourage them to use the new ones they have learnt about. Give some time for students to share their sentences with each other.
E Speaking
6 Alone, then pairs
1/2 Small groups
Students now go back to the texts in the unit and find more examples of conditionals. They should identify the structures that are used, and then see if their partner found the same examples.
In Unit 5 students learnt about the introductory part of the Cambridge IGCSE speaking exam, and now they are going to focus on the rest of the exam. Put students into small groups to discuss and make notes about what they already know. Use the examples to get them started. After a couple of minutes, join the groups together to share their ideas and to find out what they can learn from each other.
Answers When you use this technique, reward yourself during your breaks by checking your social media. (present + imperative) If you can teach the information to someone else, it means that you have a solid grasp of the material. (modal infinitive + present) … you may need to come up with a mnemonic device if you want to remember them easily. (modal infinitive + present) If you follow the steps below, you will learn how to obtain as much information as possible from the text requirements for any class. (present + modal infinitive) When your mind is actively searching for answers to questions, it becomes engaged in active learning. (present continuous + present) But if you can’t answer them, look back at the text again (as often as necessary) for help. (modal infinitive + imperative) However, don’t move on to the next section if you can’t provide the answers from the previous one. (present + modal infinitive) When you’ve finished reading the entire chapter using the preceding steps, go back over the questions you created for every heading. (present perfect + imperative)
TOP TIP
Students probably know that they will be given a topic card to talk about. This Top Tip informs them about how much time they have to study it, and reminds them they are not allowed to make any written notes.
3 Pairs This activity helps students to differentiate between general advice for any speaking exam (e.g. It’s not a good idea to answer a question with just ‘yes’ or ‘no’) and exam-specific information. In pairs, students discuss further their ideas from E2 and add them to a copy of the table. There are many possible answers.
4 Whole class, then alone Prepare students for listening to Fatima and Abdullah, who are discussing their speaking exam. Look at questions a and b, advising students that the first question tests their general understanding, while the second question is asking for a specific detail. Get students to predict the answers, then play the audio. Check their answers.
Unit 10: Education
CD1, Track 24 Fatima: OK, Abdullah, let’s do some practice for our speaking exam. Abdullah: Good idea, Fatima. You go first – what’s your presentation about? F: Come on, Abdullah, you should know by now that we don’t have to do a presentation or give a speech in the exam. A: Really? I thought that’s what we have to do. So what is it then? F: We have a discussion with the examiner about a topic. It lasts about 10 to 15 minutes, I think. A: Great! I’m going to talk about fast-food restaurants and I guess you would choose animals or becoming a vet. F: Unfortunately, we don’t get to choose our topic, Abdullah. The examiner has a set of topic cards and we have to talk about the one he or she chooses for us. A: But what if I don’t know anything about the topic? I won’t be able to say anything! Fatima, that’s mean! F: But it’s not a test of knowledge about the topic. The topic is just to give us something to talk around. We are being tested on how well we can communicate in English. A: OK, fair enough. What happens when we see the topic card? Can we make written notes? F: No, but there are some ideas on the topic card which we can use and we have a couple of minutes to prepare. We should use that time properly, to think and plan for the discussion. A: And then what happens? We start talking about the topic, right? F: Yes, that’s right. The examiner will ask us some questions, too, about the topic. A: Do I lose marks if I get the answers wrong? F: No, Abdullah, there are no right or wrong answers – the examiner just wants to hear you speaking in English. Try to use expressions like: In my opinion … , I believe … , On the other hand … , On the whole … , and so on. A: Hmmmm, so answering with ‘yes’ or ‘no’ is probably not a good idea, right? We need to use ‘because’ as much as possible.
F:
Right! We need to explain ourselves with more ideas and reasons.
A:
What happens if I don’t understand something? Maybe the examiner will think I’m not very good.
F:
Come on, Abdullah! Just tell the examiner if you don’t understand, or you could ask them to give you an example, or say something like: Do you mean … ?, or ask the examiner to repeat something.
A:
Like: Sorry, could you say that again, please?
F:
Exactly!
A:
OK, so let’s have a look at one of these topic cards, then, so we can practise.
F:
There are plenty in the back of our Coursebook, Abdullah …
Answers a Fatima, b in the back of the Coursebook
5/6 Alone, then pairs
73
Students listen again and add information and advice to their table in Activity E3. Let them compare with a partner, and then read the audioscript in Appendix 3 of the Coursebook to check they have noted all the important advice and information.
Answers Advice
Information
Use preparation time to think and plan for discussion.
Don’t have to do presentation or make a speech.
Discuss topic with examiner, about 10 to 15 minutes. Use expressions like In my opinion … , On the Students can’t choose topic. other hand …, and so on. Not a test of the topic, test Avoid yes/no answers. of communication skills in Use because as much as English. possible to explain and Students cannot make give reasons. written notes. Tell the examiner Use topic notes to help if something is not prepare (about two minutes). understood, or ask for No right or wrong answers. clarification.
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
7/8 Whole class, then small groups
3 Alone, then small groups
Talk though the activity with the class, making sure they understand what they have to do. Also look at the topic card so students are familiar with it, and ask them to decide who in their group is going to prepare which of the five points.
Prepare students to listen for the first time. They should check if their predictions from F2 are correct.
Then, working alone, students prepare notes about their point/s on the topic card. Set a time limit for this and then each group member shares their ideas with the rest of the group. Group members should ask each other questions. Use the example in the Coursebook to guide students.
Differentiated activities Support
Just allocate one point on which to make notes. You may also want to provide students with a few words or phrases to get them started or put them in pairs so they can support each other. Challenge
Try to allocate at least two points from the topic card and ask students to write at least three notes for each.
74
F Watch, listen and talk 1 Alone, then pairs Explain that students are going to watch an IGCSE student talking about Education, responding to the same topic card prompts that they have already seen in E7. As they watch, they need to check to what extent the student follows the advice from E3.
Answers in bold 40 degrees Celsius air conditioning assignments cosmopolitan desert camping digital age international qualification learn Arabic weather is awful CD1, Track 25 Speaker 1 My home country, Nigeria, can be very hot at times, but nothing like the temperatures here in Dubai. I’m not sure I will ever get used to it! Thank goodness that everywhere has air conditioning, but even that doesn’t help in the really hot summer months, when it is almost impossible to be outside during the heat of the day. At least the heat forces me to stay indoors to study, and that’s the real reason why I’m here – to study and get my degree. I just wish I’d chosen somewhere a little cooler! Speaker 2 Dubai is so cosmopolitan – it doesn’t matter what you like or what you want to do, you can find it here somewhere. It’s impossible not to be active doing something every minute of every day because there is just so much to entertain you. My biggest problem is making a choice! When I’ve done enough studying, it’s time to think about which shopping mall to meet my friends at, or which café to go to for some much-needed relaxation. Now that’s a challenge!
2 Alone, then pairs They now watch a second interview, using the same topic card prompts. Students need to decide if the second student performs better or worse than the first one, giving reasons.
G Listening 1 Small groups This section gives students listening practice, specifically in matching six short extracts. Before they listen, students discuss questions (a‒d) in their groups. As always, you may decide to set a short time limit for each question so that time is not wasted.
2 Small groups Continuing in their groups, students look at the words and phrases in the box and predict which ones they think they will hear. Encourage them to supply reasons but there are no right or wrong answers.
Speaker 3 My family told me that, in this digital age, I would never be apart from them when I came on my own to study in Dubai. Yes, we chat online every day, and send each other instant messages constantly, and I’m forever downloading photos of my sister’s new twin babies, but it’s not true – I am alone, and I miss them so much. I’ve made some friends, it’s true, but at the weekends I don’t go out much. I just think about my family and how much I miss them all. Speaker 4 I thought studying here in Dubai would be much easier than back home in Sweden, but you know something? I’ve never studied so much in all my life! We have so much to read and so many assignments to complete every month, and there always seems to be yet another quiz or test to prepare for. I know it will all be worthwhile in the end, don’t get me wrong, and I’m not afraid of hard work,
Unit 10: Education
but I’m still young and I want to enjoy this experience as much as possible. There never seems to be enough time for anything apart from studying. And do you know something? I haven’t even been to the top of the Burj Khalifa yet, and I’ve been in Dubai for nearly two years!
4 Whole class, then alone
Speaker 5 My reason for choosing Dubai as a place to study is mainly because of its location. I thought about a college in Europe, probably the UK, because obviously I speak English, but I decided against it. Not only is it difficult and expensive to travel outside Europe from there, but also the weather is awful! I’m from Brazil, remember?! So, now that I’m here in Dubai, it’s easy to travel either east or west. I’ve already been to Egypt, but next trip I want to go east, maybe to the Maldives, or perhaps further. I’m not sure yet, but the sky is the limit!
Answers 1 false, 2 true, 3 true,
Speaker 6 I tried at high school to start learning Arabic because I find the language and culture so incredibly interesting, but I failed miserably. It was so difficult to find a good teacher and to meet up with other people trying to learn Arabic so that we could practise together. I almost gave up. But then my dad suggested that I could combine learning Arabic with studying abroad, and that’s how I ended up here in Dubai. At first I didn’t want to leave home and, unfortunately, being in an international university means that nobody here uses much Arabic. But at least there are plenty of good teachers readily available, and there are plenty of opportunities to practise. An excellent choice I think! Now I love living and studying in Dubai, and my Arabic has really improved.
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 10.
Exam focus Speaking, Part 2, topic cards NOTE: The exam focus is on speaking, and involves students in looking at a new topic card, and then taking on the roles of examiner and student, using the prompts on the card.
Go through the statements Speakers 1‒6 with the class, asking them to predict what they think the speakers will say. Then play the audio again and students check whether the statements are true or false.
4
true,
5
true,
6
true
5 Alone Finally, students listen again and do the exam-style questions.
Answers a 6, b 1, c not used, d 2,
e
5,
f
3,
g
4
6 Small groups To round-off the section and the unit, give students a few minutes to discuss questions (a‒c).
Answers for b Nigeria, Sweden, UK, Brazil, Egypt, the Maldives
1/2 Pairs Students work together and look at the prompts, discussing how they might respond to each one. When they are ready, students take on the roles of examiner and interviewee, using the topic of Studying Abroad and the prompts on the card. Your job is to monitor and encourage where necessary, and provide any language students are struggling with. However, this should be an opportunity for students to build their confidence and fluency.
75
Unit 11: Achievements Focus on reading: multiple matching NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 2 (multiple matching): Remember that in a multiple matching activity students need to read a continuous text divided into sections, or a number of shorter texts, and answer a series of questions testing more detailed comprehension. Candidates match the correct answer to the question. This type of activity requires more intensive reading, and students will need to understand things which are implied, but not directly stated (for example, gist, speaker’s purpose, intentions and feelings) (R4). Students also need to identify and select relevant information (R1), understand ideas, opinions and attitudes (R2) and show understanding of the connections between them (R3).
Learning objectives (LOs) 76
Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about achievements. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) what the speakers think are humankind’s three greatest achievements, and (b) what three other achievements the speakers think will be made in their lifetime. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a Humankind's greatest achievements, any three from: medicine, antibiotics, aeroplanes, cars. b Other achievements that the students think will be accomplished in their lifetime: better care for the environment, curing cancer, helping other people.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk
to each other about what they think are humankind’s best achievements and what achievements will be made in their lifetime. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Whole class, then pairs Many students will be familiar with Guinness World Records, so there are plenty of ways to lead in to this topic. With books closed, check their understanding of what record means, then, in pairs, get them to discuss any records they know about. If necessary, prompt them with some well-known examples (e.g. Usain Bolt’s 100-metre world record speed).
2 Whole class Tell students to open their books and focus on the three pictures in Activity B2. Ask them what records they think are being broken. Allow any answers at this stage – they will find out what the records are later in the unit.
3 Pairs, then whole class Students work with their partner to discuss questions (a‒d). Set a time limit for each question to keep students focused and so that time is not wasted. Then do class feedback so that students can hear each other’s ideas.
4 Whole class, then pairs You will need to check carefully that students understand what they need to do in this activity, so go through the instructions and do a couple of examples. Tell students that the missing word in the first gap is always a superlative, so elicit some examples as a way of checking understanding. The word in the second gap is always a number, and students will need to look carefully at the context in each question to predict what the number might be. Then students work together to do the remaining questions. Do not provide any answers at this point.
5 Pairs Students look at the words in the box and discuss which one completes each record, and see if any are the same as the words they thought of in B4. There are three extra superlatives which are not needed.
Unit 11: Achievements
Answers a youngest, b largest, c longest, d most,
and 4, as they are not what they first appear to be! Get their ideas, but do not tell them yet if they are right or wrong.
e
highest,
f
greatest,
g
heaviest,
3 Alone, then pairs
h
fastest
Put students into pairs and tell them to choose who is A and who is B. Give them time to check the meaning of the words in their list. If you prefer, you could put all the A students into one group to work together and all the B students into one group. This will save time and will offer support to students. When everyone is ready, pair them so that they can share their findings.
6/7 Pairs For this activity students need to do two things. Firstly, they need to decide which set of numbers goes with each record, and, secondly, choose one number from each set to complete the second gap in each record. If you have internet access, students can go to http://www. guinnessworldrecords.com/ to check their answers. If not, you can supply the information.
Answers a 4 7 10 13 b 14 410 17 410 20 410 23 410 c 37 47 57 67 d 43 83 123 163 e 36.7 °C 46.7 °C 56.7 °C 66.7 °C f 40 000 50 000 60 000 70 000 g 62.71 kg 67,71 kg 72.71 kg 77.71 kg h 3.78 seconds 4.78 seconds 5.78 seconds 6.78 seconds
4 Alone, then whole class Students skim the text and use the words from Activity C3 to fill in the gaps. In preparation for this, tell the students to first think about the type of word needed in each case – noun, adjective, verb, and so on.
Answers a (noun) debut, b (adjective) misleading, c (verb) resemble, d (noun) precursor, e (adjective) ignoble,
f
(verb) slain,
g
(noun) sabre,
h
(adjective) braided,
i
(adjective) precise,
j
(noun) premise
8 Whole class
Differentiated activities
Ask the whole class how many questions they got right, and which world record surprised them the most, and why. You could write a ranked list on the board, in order of surprise, popularity or another criterion
Support
i
Students complete just five gaps (the ones from their list in the previous activity). You also need to tell them which five gaps they do not need to complete.
9 Whole class
ii
Continue the discussion with the whole class. If you prefer, split the class into small groups and monitor as they discuss the prompts.
Another way to support students is to tell them the part of speech for each word in their list, as well as the type of word needed in their five gaps.
Challenge
LANGUAGE TIP
Students should be familiar with both the form and use of superlative adjectives. However, this Language Tip reinforces how and when to use them. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
After students have completed the gaps, ask them to rewrite some or all of the sentences/phrases that contain a gap, using their own words. They can use their ideas from Activity C3 if they need to.
LANGUAGE TIP
C Reading 1/2 Pairs, then whole class Students discuss the questions in Activities C1 and C2. Make sure they look carefully at the five pictures, particularly 2
This Language Tip reminds students that in English, adjectives have only one form: they do not change from feminine to masculine nor from singular to plural. Go through the information with the class and check their understanding. Refer them to the exercise in the Workbook.
77
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
5 Pairs Students work in pairs to fill in a copy of the table. Not all the gaps can be filled. They will need to look again at the text, this time in more detail, in order to find all the necessary information. You could put the answers on the board or on a chart/poster for students to check.
TOP TIP
The Top Tip on page next to Activity C7 of the Coursebook reminds students that looking for key words in questions will help them to identify where (in a text) an answer is likely to be.
Answers Sport
Olympic debut (where + when)
Final Olympic appearance
Equipment
Other information
Solo synchronised swimming
Los Angeles + 1984
1992
none
swimmer performs ‘water ballet’
Live pigeon shooting
Paris + 1900
1900
gun
300 birds killed, 21 shot by winner
Club swinging
USA + 1904
1932
clubs
only in two Olympics
Roller hockey
Barcelona + 1992
1992
roller skates
only in one Olympic Games
Swimming obstacle course
Paris + 1900
1900
boats, pole
held only once, using River Seine
Trampolining
Sydney + 2000
On-going
trampoline
men and women compete
La canne
1924
1924
cane
similar to fencing
Tug-of-war
1900
1920
rope
country could win multiple medals
78
6 Alone, then pairs
D Reading and vocabulary
Students work alone to further check their understanding of the text by answering questions (a‒j). There is one question for each sport, and the answer for each question is simply the name of the sport. When students have finished, they can check with their partner.
Answers a Tug-of-war, b Trampolining, c La canne, d Solo synchronised swimming, e Roller hockey,
f
Club swinging,
g
Race walking,
h
Rope climbing,
i
Live pigeon shooting,
j
Swimming obstacle course
7 Alone, then pairs Students work alone to write six more questions based on the text they have read. The questions should be similar to the ones they have just answered in C6, i.e. starting with the words ‘Which sport …?’. Then, with a partner, students exchange their questions and answer them by saying which sport each question refers to.
1 Whole class, then alone With books closed, ask students if they have heard of Robert Scott (often referred to as Scott of the Antarctic) and if they know anything about him and what he did. You could show them a picture of Scott. Also, elicit the meaning of the words and phrases in D1: one month, explorer, perished, return journey, South Pole. Then students open their books and complete D1.
Answers a South Pole, b explorer, c one month, d perished, e return journey
2 Alone, then pairs Students are going to read part of a biography about Robert Scott, which describes his and his team’s deaths. To help with some of the vocabulary, ask students to match the words with the definitions, and then to check with their partner.
Unit 11: Achievements
Answers stumbled = walked unsteadily and almost fell
Differentiated activities
blizzard = severe snow storm
i
Give students the key dates that they need to make notes about: January 1912, 17 January, 16 or 17 March, day after, 20 March, 29 March, 12 November.
ii
Give students the ‘what happened’ information and get them to match it with the correct dates.
Support
dissuade = try to stop someone from doing something amputation = the action of cutting off a person’s arm or leg rations = a fixed amount of food or water depot = a place where food and other things are stored legible = written clearly enough to be read
Challenge
Not needed: full of liquid or gas; a situation where something cannot continue
i
Encourage students to find and make notes about more information for the second column.
ii
Tell students to read the text in detail, without making any notes, then to complete the table with their books closed.
3 Alone, then pairs Tell students to quickly look through the text in order to find the words from Activity D2 and to make sure that they understand them in context. Students look at the text again and answer questions a and b, then check with their partner.
Answers a six (Wilson, Scott, Bowers, Oates, Evans and Amundsen), b Scott
4 Alone, then pairs For this activity, students need to look at the text in more detail in order to complete a copy of the table. When students have finished, let them compare their table with a partner’s.
Answers Date
What happened
5 Alone in exercise Students should scan the text and note down brief answers to questions a‒j.
Answers a Wilson was too weak b they lost track of the days c there was a blizzard d frostbite e the blizzard f he wouldn’t kill himself g sent to his wife h buried in snow i eight j he was starving and frozen
January 1912
Only five team members remained
17 January
Reached the Pole, but Amundsen got there first
TOP TIP
16 or 17 March
Oates wanted to stay in his sleeping bag, but struggled on when others insisted
The Top Tip reminds students that they do not need to understand everything they read in a text and offers some suggestions for things to do (strategies) for working out what a word means.
day after
Oates left tent and disappeared
20 March
raging blizzard, Scott’s right foot a problem, blizzard stopped them continuing
29 March
Scott made last diary entry
12 November
search party found tent
6 Alone This activity gives students an opportunity to use a specific strategy to help them understand a phrase which they may not know.
Answer c
79
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
To finish off this section, put students into small groups to discuss the two questions, and then do class feedback so that everyone can hear all the ideas.
newspaper articles. They need to write three sentences for each article, making a total of nine. Use the example for paragraph 1, asking students which actions happened first and second. You could use a timeline on the board to further highlight the sequence of events.
E Language focus: Past perfect simple
Possible Answers There are several possibilities and acceptable variations
1 Whole class
TEXT 1
7 Small groups
Go through the information about the past perfect simple tense and then check students’ understanding by getting them to answer (i) and (ii).
Answers a In the 1900 Games in Paris, swimmers (ii) climbed a pole, before which they (i) had crawled over boats … b On 17 January, they (ii) reached the pole, only (ii) to find that a Norwegian party led by Roald Amundsen, (i) had beaten them there.
1
Jim is a member of his university basketball team which had won the local league three weeks previously.
2
The opposing team had managed to break through Roston's defences but Jim stopped them from scoring a goal.
3
Before saving a penalty in the second half of the match, Jim had made four amazing saves in the first half.
TEXT 2 1
Before arriving back in Brazil last night, Gabriela Rodriguez had worked for three years in India.
2
Gabriela had qualified as a doctor before signing up as a volunteer.
3
Gabriela's experience had been very positive and made her a better person.
2 Whole class 80
Ask students to look at the two example sentences again and tell you how the past perfect simple is formed.
Answer had + past participle
TEXT 3 3 Alone, then whole class
1
Give students a few minutes to look back the two texts in the unit to find more examples of the past perfect simple tense.
Maha Fahmy opened the new superstore yesterday in the same region of Cairo where she had grown up.
2
Before Maha was recruited by a Dubai-based company, she had completed various degrees.
3
Before returning to Egypt in 2005, Maha had been sent to four different continents for work.
Answers Olympics text ‒ swimmers climbed a pole, before which they had crawled over boats, swum under them …, The rope was 8 metres long, but previously had been nearly double the length. Robert Scott text ‒ a Norwegian flag was a record of the five who had been the first to reach the pole, Because his feet were in such a serious and painful condition, Oates had not managed to put on his boots, and went outside in his socks, It appeared that both had died peacefully in their sleep, But Scott was lying half out of his bag with one arm stretched out – he had been the last to die, Remarkably, Scott had been able to find the strength, despite being half-starved and three-quarters frozen, to write 12 complete, legible letters.
WORD TIP
Knowing the difference between these two words (clamber, climb) is important as sometimes they can both refer to a very similar action, but clamber has the sense of doing something with more difficulty than climb. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
F Speaking, listening and writing 1 Whole class, then small groups
4/5 Alone Students practise using the past perfect in a narrative style by combining pieces of information in three different
Go through all the questions (a‒h) with the class, checking that they understand each one, and the type of answers that are required (a person's name: Jim, Gabriel or Maha).
Unit 11: Achievements
Then put students into small groups, and give them a time limit for each question so that they stay focused. Allow time for class feedback so that they can share their ideas and encourage them to give reasons for their answers.
Answers a Gabriella, b Jim, c Maha, d Maha, e Gabriella, f Jim, g Gabriella, h Maha
2 Small groups Students work in their groups to discuss questions a–d. If you wish, you could ask students to make written notes about their discussions, and then refer to these during class feedback. There are no right or wrong answers; the questions are designed to encourage students to give their own and ask for others' opinions about achievements and heroes/heroines and heroic acts.
3 Alone, then pairs Students listen to two different opinions about Maha, and then share their opinion with their partner about what Maha did. Make sure students give reasons for their opinions, if possible.
CD1, Track 26 Male teenager: I really do believe that Maha is a special type of hero. Just think about what she has done so far in her life, and how much she has sacrificed in order to provide for other people. All that time living abroad aft er she had studied for so many years in Alexandria. I think that is real sacrifice and dedication, which is why she is now so successful and admired by so many people. Look at all the awards and prizes she has won, and I'm sure that she will continue to win many more. For me, Maha is definitely a hero.
Female teenager: I absolutely don't agree with you! All Maha has done is to be a successful businesswoman, but you make it sound as if she is the only such person on the planet! Yes, she has done some amazing things, but I expect she has made a considerable amount of money too, and for me that doesn't make her a hero, far from it. I'm happy that she is providing things that people need, homes to live in and places to go to for shopping and entertainment, but I don't believe she's done something heroic.
4 Alone, then pairs Ask students to read the audioscript in Appendix 3 of the Coursebook and notice the way the two speakers give their general opinion about the question at the beginning (I really do believe that Maha is a special type of hero and I absolutely don't agree with you!) and then proceed to give specific reasons. Students now need to find the different reasons that each speaker gives to support their opinion, and to tell their partner.
Answers Male: made sacrifices in order to provide for other people / living abroad / studied for so many years / awards and prizes / will continue to win many more. Female: only a successful businesswoman / not only such person on the planet / made a considerable amount of money too / hasn't done anything heroic
5/6 Alone Students work on their own to plan and write a paragraph about someone whom they consider to be a hero/heroine. Make sure students think of reasons before they start writing, and to use the audioscript in Appendix 3 as a model for their own writing.
Reflection
Exam focus
Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 11.
Reading, Exercise 2, multiple matching Answers a B, b B, c A, d C, e A,
f
C,
g
B,
h
A,
i
D,
j
C
81
Unit 12: Organisations Focus on writing NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 6: Students need to demonstrate that they can write a report, a review or an article in response to a short stimulus, which may take the form of pictures and/or short prompts. The question includes information on the purpose, format and audience, as well as the word count and how the marks are allocated. Specifically, students need to show that they can communicate information/ideas/opinions clearly, accurately and effectively (W1), organise ideas into coherent paragraphs using a range of appropriate linking devices (W2), use a range of grammatical structures and vocabulary accurately and effectively (W3), show control of punctuation and spelling (W4) and use appropriate register and style/format for the given purpose and audience (W5).
Learning objectives (LOs) 82
Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about their experiences as members of a youth organisation. If they haven’t been a member, they can discuss reasons why they aren’t a member of one. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Pairs Get students to focus on the five pictures and discuss the questions. If necessary, provide them with any key vocabulary.
2 Pairs The five icons are from an activity holiday web page. Students need to decide what the icons represent, then match them to the pictures in Activity B1.
Answers icons from left to right represent pictures 1, 2, 4, 3, 5
3 Pairs
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about organisations. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) what the speakers think are the benefits of joining a youth organisation, and (b) what three activities the speakers say youth organisations arrange for their members. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a The benefits of joining a youth organization, any three from: find new friends in different years, talk to other students you haven’t before, closer school environment, helping other people. b Activities that youth organizations arrange for their members: sports days, proms, charity days, visiting zoos, parks, water parks, teaching.
TOP TIP
There is sometimes confusion or disagreement over how many continents there are, but nowadays most people agree that there are seven: North America, South America, Antarctica, Europe, Asia, Africa and Australia. Some people consider the North and South American continents to be just one landmass, referred to as The Americas. Europe and Asia are also sometimes combined and referred to as Eurasia. Other classifications include the Middle East as a separate continent, while others combine Australia, New Zealand, the island of New Guinea, and neighbouring islands in the Pacific Ocean, referred to as Australasia.
Students look at the six icons, which represent seven continents, then answer the questions.
Answers a (left to right) North America, South America, Africa, Australasia, Europe, Antarctica, b-e Various possible answers.
Unit 12: Organisations
C Reading 1 Whole class, then pairs Go through the instructions for this activity carefully, checking that students fully understand what they need to do. Clarify that this travel company arranges summer adventure holidays in four different locations around the world: Galapagos and Ecuador, Leeward Islands, British Virgin Islands, Australia. For each location, students need to make notes about: location, size, population, climate, geography, fauna and wildlife, etc. Students will need access to different reference sources to find the information.
2 Whole class If you have a classroom map or a projector, students can show you exactly where the four locations are. Alternatively, get them to point to the relevant place on the map in the Coursebook.
3 Alone, then pairs Students read the four pieces of information and decide which of the four locations each piece of information matches. Even if they are not sure about which piece of information matches each location, this is an opportunity to find out more and to see new vocabulary in context. Students can then see if a partner came up with the same answers.
are eight questions in total. When they have decided which two questions refer to their text, they find and then write the answers.
6 Groups of four Students tell each other which destination they have read about, then ask each other the remaining six questions in Activity C5 to find the answers.
Answers a Great Barrier Reef (Australia) b Sir Francis Drake Channel (British Virgin Islands) c Galapagos Archipelago (Galapagos and Ecuador) d Australia (Great Barrier Reef) e Leeward Islands f Galapagos and Ecuador g British Virgin Islands h Leeward
7 Groups of four, then whole class Students work together and discuss questions (a–c). Monitor but do not interfere, and make sure there is sufficient time for each group to report back to the whole class. Give positive feedback.
WORD TIP
Answers a Galapagos and Ecuador, b British Virgin Islands, Australia, d Leeward Islands
4 Groups of four Each person in the groups of four reads about one of the four locations discussed so far in this section. The four texts are on different pages in the Coursebook, positioned so that students can only refer to one text. Students need to skim their text but not look at the other texts, then check which of the pieces of information from Activity C3 it includes.
5 Alone Students read through questions (a–h) and decide which two refer to their text. Make sure they understand that there are two questions for each of the four texts, so there
It will be useful for students to know the difference in meaning between these two words, and to be able to use them correctly. Refer students to the exercise in the Coursebook.
D Listening 1 Pairs In pairs, students discuss what they know (if anything) about WAGGGS – the World Association of Girl Guides and Girl Scouts. If you think students may struggle with this, prepare some picture prompts to give them some ideas.
2/3 Pairs Students work together to match the words with their definitions. There are two extra definitions that are not needed. All the words appear in the listening text. Allow students to use reference sources to help them do the matching.
83
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
KO: Wow, that’s an incredible achievement, but who exactly are your members?
4 Pairs
NA: All age groups, from young children to adult, including adolescents …
Phrases (a–e) all appear in the listening text. Students work together and use the words from D2 to complete the gaps.
Answers a judge, b involvement, c inspired,
d
issues,
e
fundraising
5 Alone, then pairs Students listen and find out three things: (a) where the conversation takes place; (b) the number of people talking; (c) the topic of conversation, and then compare their answers with their partner’s. They should also check the answers to D4, if possible. 84
more than 53 000 were downloaded in four different languages: English, French, Spanish and Arabic.
Answers fundraising = collecting money, inspired = motivated, involvement = activity/contribution, issues = subjects, judge = evaluate (not needed = solutions and concerned)
Answers a local studio, b two (Kigongo Odok and Namono Alupo), c WAGGGS but specifically World Thinking Day (WTD) CD1, Track 27 Kigongo Odok: Hello, my name is Kigongo Odok. Welcome to another edition of Youth Uganda. Today I am very happy to welcome to our local studio Namono Alupo, who works for WAGGGS, the World Association of Girl Guides and Girl Scouts. Namono Alupo: Thank you so much for inviting me, Kigongo! KO: Namono, I’ve heard about something called World Thinking Day, which takes place every year in February, am I right? NA: Yes, on February 22nd, to be exact. KO: To be honest, I know absolutely nothing about it! What’s it all about? What actually happens on World Thinking Day? NA: Well, the whole idea is to get our members thinking about important international issues, and to connect with the worldwide network of girl guides and girl scouts. In recent years, we have had record numbers of our members celebrating WTC in 90 countries. We also produce an activity pack, and last year
KO: And an adolescent is …? NA: Good question! Neither children nor adults are adolescents: they are young people in the years when everything about themselves is changing very quickly. KO: Definitely a difficult transition period. And how else can you judge the success of WTD, apart from what you have already told me? NA: Hmmm, let me think … Well, we also sold 100 000 badges, but, to be honest, nowadays it’s all about social media, and we know that 14 319 of our members uploaded profile pics during their WTC involvement. KO: So on a typical WTD, what do your members actually do, apart from upload selfies?! NA: We want people to be inspired by the history and impact of our global movement, and to take action and speak out on the issues we most care about. KO: For example? NA: We want to make a global difference by fundraising for projects around the world. The activity pack gives our members ideas on how to do this, and invites them to explore and celebrate the meaningful connections that make our lives better. Sometimes neither a parent nor a school teacher is available to help young people do these things, and this is when WAGGGS can get involved. KO: And who exactly do you want your members to connect with? NA: That’s a good question, and an important one. Connections could be with the people closest to us, to a place we care about, or to a Girl Guide or Girl Scout friend on the other side of the world. KO: And how do they do this? NA: Well, the activity pack, which I’ve already mentioned, contains various activities which our members are encouraged to participate in. Each activity has a different objective, for example, connecting with a community and helping to bring about change, or learning about the WAGGGS Cabana World Centre in Mexico or the Sangam World Centre in India.
Unit 12: Organisations
KO: So is there any sort of challenge involved?
More information from website www.waggs.org
NA: Yes. The activity pack encourages members to make four special connections, and in doing so they collect four puzzle pieces. Then they put together their puzzle, and share their connections with the world.
Special printer-friendly version of activity pack available.
KO: And I guess the connections are the ones you described earlier? With the people closest to us, ummm and to a place we care about, and …? NA: … to a Girl Guide or Girl Scout friend on the other side of the world. KO: Now it all makes sense! How can our listeners find our more information? NA: They can find out more by visiting our website, which is www.wagggs.org, and follow the links for World Thinking Day. From there you can download the activity pack to your PC or tablet, and there’s a special printer-friendly version to save paper and ink. You can also check where your local WAGGGS group meets and easily connect with them. KO: Excellent! Thanks very much for talking to us today, and good luck with the next WTD.
6 Whole class, then alone During the second listening, students need to complete the notes about WTD. Before they listen, go through the notes and ask students to say what type of word is needed in each gap, and what the possible answers might be. Do not worry if they are unable to supply too much.
Answers WTD happens annually on February 22nd Main aims: encourage members to consider important international issues and connect with worldwide network of GGGS WTD celebrated in 90 countries Number of activity packs downloaded = 53 000, available in four languages: English, French, Spanish, Arabic Best indication of success is use of social media WAGGGS wants members to take action and speak out on issues Also want members to connect with family, places, or GGGS members internationally Activity pack contains different activities with different objectives Challenge is to complete a puzzle and share connections
7 Alone Students look at the audioscript in Appendix 3 to check their answers.
E Reading 1 Pairs Students are now going to read a text about a different youth organisation. Before they read, students look at the five pictures (1–5) and match them with the five interest areas (a–e).
Answers depend on a/w
2 Pairs, then whole class There are two words or phrases in the box for each of the five interest areas. Students work together and decide in which area they would expect to read the words and phrases, and give reasons. Do not supply any answers at this stage as students will find out when they read the text. However, do class feedback to check that there are no misunderstandings about the words and phrases.
3 Alone, then pairs Give students a few minutes to quickly read the text and check their answers. Do not allow too much time or students will try to read the text in detail, which is not necessary at this stage.
4 Alone, then pairs Now students need to look at the first paragraph in more detail, and make some written notes about three areas (a–c). When they have finished, they can check with their partner.
Answers a to be independent, democratic and modern, to offer knowledge and new ideas to young people in Cyprus, to reinforce idea of good citizenship, to raise awareness of the environment; b divided into four age groups, more than 150 members in five groups, each group has a leader and 2–3 assistants; c experienced in working with young people, university or college graduates, high ideals and want to give something back to society.
85
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
5 Groups of five
e
true,
If you are unable to work with groups of five, you can adjust the activity to suit your particular class. Each student in the group selects one of the five interest areas and re-reads their paragraph. After reading, they should write at least one clarification question for the other group members to answer. Use the example clarification questions in the Coursebook to check students understand what they need to do. When everyone is ready, the five questions should be shared between the group members, and then everyone in the group reads the four paragraphs they did not read, and tries to answer the questions.
f
false (it can appear in the middle or at the end of a sentence)
F Language focus: Non-defining relative clauses LANGUAGE TIP
86
Non-defining relative clauses provide extra information about the subject, but they can be removed from the sentence without having an impact on the overall meaning. Furthermore, their removal will not affect the grammatical accuracy of the sentence. Non-defining relative clauses are composed of a relative pronoun, a verb, and optional other elements such as the subject or object of the verb. Commas are always used to separate a non-defining relative clause from the rest of the sentence.
1 Pairs Write your own example sentence on the board and ask students to identify the non-defining relative clause, as well as other important elements, such as the subject of the main sentence, the relative pronoun, etc. Then students work in pairs and decide if the information (a–f) is true or false. Do not supply any answers yet – they find the answers in the next activity.
2 Alone, then pairs Students read the seven examples (i-vii) from the text and use them to check the answers to Activity F1.
Answers a true, b true, c true, d false (a relative pronoun is always needed),
3 Alone You will probably need to do at least one example to check that students understand what they need to do. In the example here, the non-defining relative clause is underlined: Example: a Victor de Leon, who is a professional videogamer, set the record for youngest player in New York, USA.
Possible answers (non-defining clauses underlined), but variations acceptable b Superlative adjectives, which often end in –est, show the most or least of something. c Both men and women compete in trampolining, which debuted as an Olympic sport in 2000. d On 17 January, when they reached the pole, they found that a Norwegian party led by Roald Amundsen had beaten them there. e Robert Scott successfully reached the South Pole, where he found that Roald Amundsen had got there before him. f The blaze at the home in Abbotsbury, which is in Dorset, began around 9.30 p.m. on Sunday night. g Footballers give up their lives and devote themselves entirely to perfecting their bodies, which means they can excel on the football field.
G Writing 1 Pairs Get students to think about the words that have been removed from the exam-style question: explain, describe, suggest, then ask them to decide which information (a–c) matches each key word.
Answers a suggest, b explain, c describe
2 Pairs Students discuss and decide if they could use the phrases (a–l) to explain, describe or suggest.
Unit 12: Organisations
Suggested Answers Explain
Describe
Suggest
b
If we did this …
c
a
c
My school is located …
My school is located …
I think we should …
e
She was born in the early 1940s
b
If we did this …
d
Our school would benefit by …
d
Our school would benefit by …
g
The country is planning to …
h
The Head teacher has told us that …
i
The organisation was established …
j
The project is attempting to …
k
There are several reasons for this situation …
l
There is no reason not to …
f
i
The building is more than 30 storeys tall … The organisation was established …
3 Pairs Students put the three verbs explain, describe or suggest into the gaps. Then they need to think carefully about what the question is asking them to do.
Answers a describe, b explain, c suggest
TOP TIP
The Top Tip focuses on the importance of reading questions carefully, to make sure that all parts of the question are addressed in the answer.
there are things that need to be addressed. Students should identify anything they think is wrong. Remind them not to just focus on grammar and spelling, but to look at the content too and decide whether or not the writer has answered the question. Go through the five points in G5 with your students, checking that they can identify at least one example for each point.
TOP TIP
Many questions of this type give the student prompts in the form of comments about the topic, or even pictures.
6/7 Students now write their own answer to the examstyle question, using the notes to help them, but including their own ideas if they can. When they have finished, they can exchange their writing and, using the checklist in Activity G5, give each other some feedback. Here are two sample answers written by (i) an IGCSE Core student and (ii) an IGCSE Extended student. i
Core
Dear readers, I have just spent the day with a girl Kayla Kalanga involved in the WTC project. Kayla comes from Botswana and is 17 years old. She was tall and she has three brothers and two sisters. Both of Kayla’s parents both work as farmers. During the day I spent with her I learnt that she is a member of WAGGGS and how this organisation deals with important international issues. It was created five years ago and connects with a network of girl guides and boy scouts. Its main aim is to raise money for worldwide projects. If any of you are interested in learning about ways in which you could connect with WTD you can visit www.wagggs.com and download the activity pack to find out more, or check if there is a local WAGGG group in your area! Hope you enjoyed reading, Erika Hadid. [146 words]
4/5 Pairs, then whole class
ii
Extended
Students work together and read the sample answer to the exam-style question. It is not a perfect answer and
Only 3 days ago, I came back from a trip to Botswana where I was staying with Kayla Kalanga, who is a member
87
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
of WAGGGS, an association where they learn about important international issues. Kayla is a tall seventeen-year old, who lives in a small village in Botswana. Her parents are both farmers and she has three brothers and two sisters. During my time with her, she told me that she started taking part in the WTD project five years ago and has been taking part in three WTDs. She told me that being a part of this has helped her connect with different girl scouts and girl guides.
local WAGGGS group meets, and we can take part. [189 words]
Differentiated activities Support
i
Allocate two or three points from the notes in Activity G6 to different.
ii
Allocate different parts of the exam-style question to different students. Each of these approaches reduces the amount that students need to write. They can then join their pieces of writing together to make one complete answer.
Her ambition is to raise money for projects around the world and she means to do this by using an activity pack which gives her lots of ideas for fundraising. She has set a challenge to make four special global connections and also told me that our school can download the same activity pack and find out more from their website, www.wagggs.com. This way we can find out where our
Challenge
Reflection
to adopt some of the stray animals. We think it is a very worthy cause, and we hope you do too.
Students write the answer without using the notes given in Activity G6, and then use the notes to check that they have included all the necessary information.
88
Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 12.
Yours faithfully. Jorge Van [128 words] ii
Exam focus Writing, Exercise 6 1
Here are two sample answers written by (i) an IGCSE Core student and (ii) an IGCSE Extended student.
i
Core
Dear Madam I am a member of our town’s local youth group which focuses on finding ways for children and teenagers to become more involved in the community. At the moment we are attempting to raise funds for the pet charity ‘Pets and Tails’, which tries to find permanent homes for stray dogs and cats. As a group we care a lot about animals and so we are doing whatever we can to raise money for this worthy charity. We have organised dog walks, car washes, a small fair in the town hall and we have even taken it into our own hands
Extended
Dear readers, I am currently volunteering for a youth group ‘Survival’ which helps young teenagers get back into sports after suffering from any sort of long-term illness or debilitating injury. It was created three years ago after my friend had a horrific accident while riding his bicycle. Unfortunately, after the accident, my friend was left paralysed from the waist down but he was so passionate about sport and exercise that he was determined to continue and help others at the same time. Last year, a young boy called Tom suffered an accident after practising ice-hockey at his local sports centre. His accident has not stopped him playing, but in order to continue playing as a professional player he needs to buy a brand new wheelchair. We need your help! I and a group of friends of mine are planning on running the London marathon in two months to raise as much money as we can in order to help buy the wheelchair. We are looking for
Unit 12: Organisations
sponsors, people who wish to run with us and anyone who is willing to donate any amount of money they can afford in order to help young Tom. Yours faithfully, Rosie Green. [198 words] 2
Here are two sample answers written by (i) an IGCSE Core student and (ii) an IGCSE Extended student.
i
Core
In this week’s edition we are discussing taking holidays right here at home instead of going abroad. I have always loved going abroad for my holidays but this year I have chosen to have a holiday right here in England. The countryside here is so beautiful; we have so many untouched beaches and amazing landscapes. Instead of giving my money away to foreign industries, I would rather it was spent here on the local economy, helping create more jobs and supporting the people who live in the areas I will be visiting. I realised that I do not know my own country at all. I know Italy better than I do England and I feel that is a shame. So this summer holiday I am staying here and I shall hope for much sunshine! [134 words]
ii
Extended
Very recently, one of our own tourist organisations has been promoting the idea of remaining in our own country for our holidays. Although I believe it is a nice idea, I do not think it is very realistic, for various reasons. Most people enjoy spending their holidays in new and exciting places, where you can see different cultures and try exotic cuisines in different locations. Furthermore, spending more time abroad means that you are broadening your horizons and becoming more open- minded about places and people that you are not used to. I also believe that when you travel, you learn to appreciate life and the beautiful world we live in, far more than if we stayed at home. I don’t deny that our own country has some beautiful places to visit and stay in. Moreover, by staying here for our holidays, we are helping people find jobs and helping the local economy through the money we spent. So, although it’s great visiting other countries, we mustn’t forget that our own has plenty to offer as well, and we should take advantage of this as much as possible. [188 words] 89
Unit 13: Famous people Focus on writing NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 5: Students write approximately 100–150 (Core) or 150–200 (Extended) words of continuous prose, in response to a short stimulus which may take the form of pictures and/or short prompts printed on the paper. The question includes information on the purpose, format and audience, as well as the word count and how the marks are allocated. Specifically, students need to show that they can communicate information/ideas/opinions clearly, accurately and effectively (W1), organise ideas into coherent paragraphs using a range of appropriate linking devices (W2), use a range of grammatical structures and vocabulary accurately and effectively (W3), show control of punctuation and spelling (W4), and use appropriate register and style/format for the given purpose and audience (W5).
Learning objectives (LOs) 90
Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about famous people. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) what the speakers think people need in order to become successful or famous, and (b) how important the speakers think ambition is. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a Things that the students think people need to become successful or famous, any three from: a good reputation, passion, talent, hard work. b How important is ambition? Do they all agree? The students say that you can just do something shocking or weird to become famous, or you need to work hard. The students do not all agree.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other talk to each other about what people need to do to become famous and which famous person they admire. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Pairs Get students to focus on the five pictures and discuss the questions. If students are unsure about who the people are, move straight on to B2, which gives the names and some facts about each person.
2 Pairs If students are still unsure, the pictures provide some clues to which pieces of information match each person. Of course, it does not matter if students are not able to match correctly – the important thing is that they think about the task, and discuss things in English.
Answers Sarah Attar, competed in 2012 Olympics, Saudi Arabian Zaha Hadid, Iraqi-British architect, studied at American University Beirut Mark Zuckerberg, co-founder of Facebook, born 1984 Bruce Lee, film actor, died 1973
3 Whole class, pairs Firstly, check that students understand the meaning of each word in the box. For anything they are unsure of, either provide the meaning or give students time to find out for themselves. Then students discuss which words are connected with being successful and famous. There are no right or wrong answers, but you could probably argue that all of the words have some connection.
4 Pairs Students should be better able now to think about the qualities of the four famous people. Once again, there are
Unit 13: Famous people
no right or wrong answers, but you might say that Sarah Attar needed skill, determination and strength to be successful as an athlete, whereas Mark Zuckerberg needed other qualities, such as confidence and fearlessness. Allow students time to discuss freely.
d
1966 World Cup
e
European Golden Boot
f
speed, technique, athleticism, accurate right-footed shot
g
his fair play and humility
5 Alone, then pairs
5 Alone, then pairs
Students think of a famous person and how to describe them, using the words from B3 as well as any others that are appropriate. Then they tell their partner about the famous person.
C Reading and writing: Making notes 1 Whole class, then pairs Make sure students know who Eusébio was. Perhaps show them a video clip from YouTube or focus on the picture in the Coursebook (but do not let them read the text yet). Then get them to work in pairs to check the meaning of the words and phrases in the box.
2 Alone, then pairs Students read phrases a–g on their own and decide if they think they will see them in the text. Then, with their partner, they give reasons for their decisions. Do not supply any answers at this stage as students will find out for themselves when they read the text in C3.
Writing effective notes or a good summary requires a clear understanding of the content of the text. In this activity, students need to decide (on their own) which three of the five headings given would help them to write their notes. They should be prepared to give reasons to a partner. The three best headings are Nationality and family, Physical skills and Achievements in football, because most of the content of the text is about these three areas of Eusébio’s life. There is very little information about his home and education, nor about his hobbies and interests.
TOP TIP
Students’ vocabulary and grammar is not usually assessed in note-writing exercises, but the content of the notes is. Only brief notes are required, but students must provide all the necessary information. 91
TOP TIP
3 Alone Students skim the text and check their answers to Activities C1 and C2. They do not need to write anything yet.
Answers to C2 a yes, b yes, c no,
Make sure students appreciate that a text may often contain more information than is required to answer the question. They should know that if there are three bullets for a particular heading, then there are three marks available – and only three pieces of information are needed (even if there are four or five pieces of information in the text).
d
yes,
g
no,
e
yes,
h
yes,
6 Alone, then pairs
f
yes,
i
yes
Go through questions a–g, making sure students understand everything, including the vocabulary. Get students to tell you the key word/s in each question and remind them that this will help them to find the answers in the Eusébio text. They should also think about the type of answers required (e.g. 4c = a reason). When they are ready, students write the answers in their notebooks, then check with a partner.
Students work alone first, to write three notes under each of the three headings: Nationality and family, Physical skills and Achievements in football. Before doing so, they should read the text in more detail, underlining the important information for each heading. Then they need to rewrite that information in note form. It is best if students paraphrase rather than copy the text, but as long as they identify the relevant information and write it under the correct heading, they would receive the marks available. When they have finished, allow students to check with a partner.
Answers a Portuguese b Mozambique and Angola were both Portuguese territories c because of his physical and mental strengths
Answers Nationality and family 1 born in Mozambique, 2 Angolan father, 3 Portuguese nationality
4 Whole class, then alone, then pairs
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Physical skills 1 speed (100 metres in 11 seconds), 2
athleticism,
3
accurate right-foot shot,
4
great free-kick taker,
5
prolific goal scorer (733 goals in 745 matches)
Achievements in football 1 top goal scorer 1966 World Cup, 2
Bronze Ball award,
3
winner of Ballon d’Or,
4
played for Benfica for 15 years,
5
638 goals in 614 matches for club
Differentiated activities Support
i
Reduce the number of headings under which students should make notes.
ii
Provide the answers jumbled up, so that students have to decide which note goes with which heading.
iii
Direct students to the relevant paragraphs in the text.
92
Challenge
i
Ask students to find more information about each area, rather than the three pieces of information required.
ii
Students use their notes to write a short paragraph under each heading.
D Reading and vocabulary 1/2 Pairs With a partner, students look at the words and phrases (a– h) in Activity D1 and predict what type of person they are going to read about. There are no right or wrong answers, so encourage students to speak freely and to give reasons for their choices. As soon as they are ready, they can look at the possible job types in Activity D2 and select which ones they think they will NOT read about. Try not to let students look at the text while they are doing these two activities.
3 Alone, then pairs Tell students to skim the text to check their predictions and ideas from Activities D1 and D2. They should not worry about the gaps at the moment.
Answers The text is about Helen Keller, an American author and campaigner for deaf and blind charities who became
deaf and blind as a young child and had to struggle to overcome her dual disability.
4 Whole class, then pairs Check that there are no comprehension problems with phrases a–i, seven of which have been removed from the text (so there are two extra phrases that students will not need to use). Then let students work with a partner to look at the text again and decide where to put the missing phrases. If students need support, tell them which two phrases are not needed (a and h).
Answers 1d Helen Keller (1880–1968), 2b Born on 27 June 1880, 3e In 1886, 4f In the beginning, 5i Keller then, 6g Keller came, 7c From 1918 Not used: a At the turn of the century, h Keller never
5 Pairs For this activity, which is divided into four vocabularybased questions (a–d), students work with a partner. They should be allowed to use different reference sources to help them find the answers.
Answers a i campaigner (paragraph 1) = someone who organises events in order to achieve something, for example, to collect funds or to raise awareness ii influential (1) = having the power to affect how someone thinks, or how something develops iii de-stigmatise (1) = to reduce the negative or unfair treatment of people or something iv rudimentary (2) = very basic b i someone with a lot of knowledge and skills in a particular subject (3) = specialist ii at the present time (3) = currently iii unable to do (3) = impaired iv started doing something (3) = set about v continued (3) = maintained vi annoyed at not being able to do something (4) = frustrated vii learned (4) = picked up
Unit 13: Famous people
c
Adjective
rapid quick proficient
Noun
rapids* X proficiency
disabled
disability/ the disabled previous X persuasive persuasion difficult difficulty funded funding
Adverb
Verb
rapidly quickly proficiently
X X X
disabled
X
previously persuasively X X
X persuade X fund
* rapids = part of a river where the water moves very fast
LANGUAGE TIP
The Language Tip focuses on adverbs ending in -ly, which are very common in English. However, students also need to know that some words ending in -ly are–adverbs. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
d
i
ii
[paragraph2] completely, only, properly, badly, [3] currently, visually, [4] fully, [5] quickly, previously, [6] extremely, [7] badly, sadly Adverb
Adjective
Noun
completely complete, completed only only properly proper
X X
badly currently visually fully quickly previously extremely badly sadly
X current vision, visionary X X X extremity X sadness
bad current visual full quick previous extreme bad sad
Challenge
i
Extend how much students have to do by getting them to produce their own sentences using some of the words from Activity D5.
ii
Get students to complete as much as they can in 5c without looking back at the text.
6 Small groups Students work in small groups and discuss questions (a–c). If a group has no answer for a, perhaps someone in another group can share their experience. Failing that, you could briefly tell students about someone that you might know. For b, do an example with a concrete noun in a language that the students do not know. It does not matter if you yourself are unfamiliar with the language – you just need to know what the word means and how to spell it. Choose something which you can easily find or bring into the classroom. Then follow the same procedure as Sullivan. Tell the volunteer student to close their eyes, or use a blindfold, and then rub the object you have chosen (e.g. a piece of paper, an orange, a pencil, a mobile phone) on the student’s hand and at the same time write the word in the unknown language on the student’s other hand. For c, if you have internet access at school, allow students 5–10 minutes to find the images. Alternatively, this could be set as a homework task.
completion
Differentiated activities Support
i
Allocate just one or two questions (from a, b, c or d) for students to work on.
ii
Reduce the number of words students need to find.
WORD TIP
These two words are not often confused, but students are probably not as familiar with the word obstacle. It is a useful addition to their vocabulary. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
E Language focus: Discourse markers showing contrast 1 Pairs There are many discourse markers in English, with different functions. They are extremely important in order to provide clues about what we want to say or write. This section focuses on discourse markers for showing contrast. Students work in pairs and study the nine phrases, and agree on which three show contrast.
Answers Even though, In spite of, On the other hand
93
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
2 Alone, then pairs Students think of more contrast discourse markers and then compare their ideas with their partner’s.
Possible answers however, in fact, in contrast, nevertheless, despite, on the contrary, though, although, yet, nonetheless
3 Alone, then pairs Students now re-read the text and identify seven examples of discourse markers showing contrast, and check if any appeared in E1 or E2.
Answers despite, however, nevertheless, in spite of, nonetheless, even though, although
4/5 Alone, then pairs Students work alone and then check their answers with their partner’s. Make sure students understand the structures used after the various discourse markers by completing the rules in E5. 94
Answers Despite
her problems, having problems,
(a) In spite of (b) Even though
she had problems,
she became famous.
(c) Although (Though) She had problems
(d) However,
Possible answers a She had to struggle to overcome many obstacles. However/ In spite of this, she obtained a university degree. b Although she could only communicate using signs, her young friend helped her to be more successful. / She could only communicate using signs. Nevertheless, her young friend helped her to be more successful. c Even though Sullivan was also visually impaired, she taught Keller how to communicate. In spite of also being visually impaired, Sullivan taught Keller how to communicate. Many Possible Answers, these are suggestions d Keller was frustrated at her lack of progress. However, Sullivan helped her to start understanding. e Keller then progressed very quickly, even though she had to overcome a great many obstacles.
F Listening 1/2 Whole class, then pairs Focus on the map and the picture. Explain who students are going to hear about (Nelson Suresh Kumar) and what he did (rode his motorbike on the world’s highest motorable road). Ask students to predict what this involved and then in pairs they can work through questions a–g and Activity G2. Make sure you provide class feedback on all the questions, but remember that students have not yet listened to anything, so accept all their ideas and speculations.
Answers a–c and e-g: there are no right or wrong answers; d depends on a/w.
(e) Nevertheless,
3 Alone
(f) Nonetheless,
Students listen and check their ideas from the previous activities G1f and G1g only.
a
Despite/In spite of + noun/noun phrase + verb phrase
b
Although/Even though + verb phrase + verb phrase
c
However/Nonetheless/Nevertheless + verb phrase
6 Alone, then whole class In this activity students practise using discourse markers with phrases taken from the Keller text. Let them work alone and then do class feedback and allow everyone (if possible) to contribute some answers.
Answers 1f (Bactrian) camels, 1g the world’s highest battlefield
4 Whole class, then alone During the second listening, students need to write answers to questions a–h. Go through the questions with the class, asking them to remember/predict answers, but do not say if anything is right or wrong at this stage. Then students listen, and after they can check with a partner, refer to the audoiscript in Appendix 3, or you can supply feedback.
Unit 13: Famous people
Answers a India f b 91 days c during the solo ride d a battle took place e glaciers, valleys, g mountain passes, snow, plains, mud, slush, h snow, desert, lakes
world’s highest battlefield, villages, monasteries, water crossings, highways, narrow roads covered in snow for other 8 months
TOP TIP
Use this Top Tip to clarify what a blog is, as in some writing questions students may be asked to write one (rather than a report, story, email, and so on). However, point out that even though they may be asked to write a blog, they must still answer the question and must still organise their writing in an effective, accurate way.
double-humped
G Writing – Optional TOP TIP
This Top Tip reminds students of the need to show that they can write in both a formal and an informal style.
4 Pairs To continue with the planning, get students to specify the information which should normally appear in an introduction and conclusion for this type of writing.
Suggested answers Introduction – reason for choosing this person, birthplace, date, etc; Conclusion – reiterate reasons for choosing this person, lifelong achievements/awards
1 Alone
5 Alone
This activity helps students to understand how a descriptive text is organised. Give them a couple of minutes to quickly review the two texts about Eusébio and Keller, and decide which one follows the plan.
Focus on the example notes and then get students to write their own notes, using their own headings. Remind students that they are going to expand their notes into a e-mail in the next activity, so they should make sure they have enough notes to work from.
Answer Eusébio
2 Pairs Students work together and analyse how the Keller text is organised. Possible answer • general and personal information •
early childhood and illness
•
medical treatment
•
learning to communicate
•
education
•
charity work and death
3 Alone Students are now going to spend time planning for a piece of descriptive writing about a person they admire, or someone famous. The important thing is that they choose someone whom they know about, and whom they can write about. Then, using the ideas in the Coursebook, students make a list of things they could include in their writing.
Sample answer Famous actress: Audrey Hepburn Introduction: Audrey Hepburn, born Brussels, Belgium in 1929. Her father was of English descent and her mother was Dutch. Background information: After the Second World War she moved to England to study ballet and took on small roles in theatres and films. Work and achievements: Hepburn starred in many famous films, winning many awards including an Academy Award and a BAFTA. In later life, she became a Goodwill Ambassador for UNICEF and did lots of charity work. Reasons for choosing this person: Not only was she a talented and beautiful actress, she cared about making the world a better place. Conclusion: Has gone down in history as one of the most beloved and iconic Hollywood stars in history.
6 Alone Students now write their e-mail, using their notes from activity G5, but also trying to include relevant and appropriate discourse markers and vocabulary from the unit.
95
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Sample answer The Hollywood actress Audrey Hepburn, was born in Brussels in 1929, to a father of English descent and a Dutch mother.
awards, including a BAFTA and an Academy Award. As well as acting, she was also a Goodwill Ambassador for UNICEF and did plenty of charity work.
After the end of the Second World War in 1945, he moved to England where she studied ballet and also began to take on small roles in theatre plays and films. She soon began to star in musicals and romantic comedies in Hollywood. For her achievements in film, she won many
I chose Audrey Hepburn as my role model, because not only was she a talented and beautiful actress, she cared more than anything about making the world a better place. She has gone down in history as one of the most iconic Hollywood stars. [142 words]
Reflection
i Core Last night I was lucky to go to a performance by the famous jazz band, Jazz It Up! Every year my home town has a jazz festival and this year it was in the courtyard of the old castle right next to the river.
Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 13.
Exam focus Reading and Writing, Exercise 3, note-making Answers Where Garrett was educated 96
•
age 5 went to Holland every weekend to study
•
age 7 went to Lubeck Conservatiore
[1]
•
home-schooled until 17
[1]
It was a beautiful, starry night and the jazz band was in the centre and the audience sat on chairs in a semi-circle around them. The performance lasted for an hour with a fifteen-minute break in the middle and it was the best thing I have seen in a long time! It was a beautiful experience, the musicians were excellent and if you are lucky enough to be in town this week then I really do advise you to buy a ticket and go watch the jazz band.
ALSO: after 17, studied at Royal College of Music, London; 1999 attended Juilliard School in New York.
Aviya Al Jamir. [136 words]
Garrett’s skills as a musician
Hello to my daily blog readers once again!
•
breathes life into classical music
[1]
•
plays with confidence
[1]
•
[extended only] music takes on different shape and feel in his hands
[1]
Challenges in Garett’s life •
340 days a year in hotels
[1]
•
has to eat hotel room-service food
[1]
•
lives out of a suitcase
[1]
•
[extended only] four hours, daily violin practice
[1]
ALSO: no relaxation until after daily practice [Total: 7 Core, 9 Extended]
Writing, Exercise 5 Here are two sample answers written by (i) an IGCSE Core student and (ii) an IGCSE Extended student.
ii Extended
Last week my favourite singer Norah Jones came for a charity concert, in Hyde Park, London. She along with some other singers and musicians were all appearing at the performance in order to raise money for charity. My friends and I arrived at Hyde Park two hours before the start of the concert! Already, there were lots of people standing in line. We arrived at the large stage and sat on the grass until the music started. The whole park was soon completely full. There was a great atmosphere; people were laughing and singing and calling out to the performers. The concert started and even though I was really enjoying myself, I was desperate for Norah Jones to come onto the stage. Finally, Norah stepped on the stage, but just as she did it started to rain. Everyone was worried that the performance would be cancelled, but she started singing despite the pouring rain. Throughout most of the show I was cold and wet, but it was one of the best experiences in my life. I was awestruck by Norah Jones’s singing and I can’t wait to see her live again. [199 words]
Unit 14: Medical care Focus on listening: multiple-choice questions and completing notes NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Listening Exercise 5 (Extended ONLY): Students listen to a talk and complete short notes either under bullet points or in a template. Then they listen to a short discussion based on this talk, and complete sentences using no more than three words. Students need to demonstrate that they can listen to a talk and complete gaps in notes based on what they hear. Specifically, students need to identify and select relevant information (L1), understand ideas, opinions and attitudes (L2), show understanding of the connections between ideas, opinions and attitudes (L3) and understand what is implied but not directly stated, e.g. gist, speaker’s purpose, intention and feelings (L4).
Learning objectives (LOs) Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about medical care. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) what the speakers think the work of a nurse involves, and (b) if the speakers would consider nursing as a job for themselves. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a The work of a nurse involves: caring for patients, healing patients, emotionally supporting the patient. b
Would the students consider doing a nursing job? Their reasons: Yes, but the student would prefer to be a doctor or no, because the job is not as scientific as some other jobs in medicine.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about other medical care jobs they know about. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Pairs Students look at the three pictures and, after checking that they understand what each picture shows, they make a list of as many words and phrases as possible connected with the topic (i.e. healthcare). There are two examples to get them started. You could set a short time limit for this activity and turn it into a competition to see which pair can write the longest (correct) list in the shortest time. Carry out class feedback to compare ideas.
2/3 Pairs Students work together to check the meaning of the verbs in A. Allow them to use different reference sources for this before they match the verbs with the nouns in B.
Answers alleviate suffering, diagnose and treat illnesses, perform surgery, prescribe and dispense medications, prevent illnesses/suffering, promote care, provide care/medications, restore health
4 Alone Students read the short paragraph and find the phrases from Activity B2/3, checking that they have understood them correctly.
5 Whole class Focus on the word paramedic and check that students understand its meaning. Make sure they know how a paramedic’s work differs from that of a nurse.
97
97
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
6 Pairs These nine words should not be too challenging for students, but ensure that they understand the meanings. They can use different reference sources for help.
7/8 Alone, then pairs Prepare students for the listening activity. Before they listen, get them to predict which of the words from Activity B6 could complete the gaps (a–g) in the notes. Then play the audio so students can confirm their predictions. They can read the audioscript in Appendix 3 if necessary.
98
Answers a emergency,
e
minor injuries,
b
patient,
f
accidents,
c
treatment,
g
incidents
d
care,
CD2, Track 2 Paramedics provide an immediate response to emergency medical calls. They are usually the first senior healthcare professional on the scene, and they are responsible for assessing the condition of a patient and providing treatment and care prior to hospital admission. A paramedic will attend emergencies, including minor injuries, sudden illness and casualties arising from road and rail accidents, criminal violence, fires and other incidents. They are usually in a two-person ambulance crew, with the other crew member being an ambulance technician or emergency care assistant who helps them. Some will work alone, however, using an emergency response car, motorbike or bicycle to get to a patient. Adapted from www.prospects.ac.uk
9 Pairs Put students into pairs to talk to each other about the differences between what a nurse and a paramedic do. Encourage them to use the words and phrases from the previous activities.
C Listening 1 Whole class, then pairs Check that students know who Florence Nightingale was. If they are unfamiliar with her work, use some pictures (including the one in this section) as prompts.
2 Pairs In pairs, students look at the information in a–f and decide if it is true or false, giving reasons where possible. You do not
need to tell them if they are right or wrong at this stage, as they will find out the answers during the listening activity.
3 Pairs Make sure students understand who they are going to hear (John is a nursing student and Dr Mary Winterson is a nursing specialist), and what the context is (i.e. an interview with questions about Florence Nightingale). Students listen for the first time and check their answers to C2, correcting any false information.
Answers a Florence Nightingale was born in Florence, Italy. TRUE b Her parents refused to allow her to become a nurse. TRUE c She completed a three-month nurse training course in England. TRUE d The British government asked her to work in British military hospitals in Turkey. TRUE e Florence Nightingale received several medals for her nursing work. FALSE – she received one medal f When she died, Florence had been blind for 15 years. TRUE CD2, Track 3 John: Dr Mary, what can you tell us about Florence Nightingale’s early years? Dr Mary Winterson: Well, Florence Nightingale was born in Italy on 12th May 1820 and was named Florence after her birthplace. Her parents, Fanny and William, were wealthy and spent a considerable amount of time touring Europe. J: How did she do at school? Did she get good grades? MW: Yes, she did. As a schoolchild, Florence was academic and rarely had problems with her studies. She was attractive and the expectation was that she would marry and start a family. J: But that didn’t happen, did it? MW: No, it didn’t. Florence had different ideas. As a teenager she became involved in the social questions of the day, making visits to homes for sick people in local villages, and she began to investigate hospitals and nursing. J: How did her parents react to this? MW: Not very well, I’m afraid! Her parents refused to allow her to become a nurse as, in the mid-19th century, it was not considered a suitable profession for a well-educated woman. Because of the conflict which arose between Florence and her parents,
Unit 14: Medical care
it was decided to send her to Europe with some family friends, Charles and Selina Bracebridge. J:
Not such a bad punishment! Where exactly did they go?
MW:
The three of them travelled to Italy, Greece and Egypt, returning to England through Germany in July 1850. While in Germany, they visited a hospital near Dusseldorf, where Florence returned in the following year to undergo a three-month nurse training course. This enabled her to take a post at a clinic in London in 1853.
J:
Wasn’t Britain at war around this time? With Russia?
MW:
Yes, you’re absolutely right. In March 1854, Britain was at war with Russia. While the Russians were defeated in the autumn of that year, British newspapers criticised the medical facilities for the soldiers wounded during the fighting. In response to the criticism, the government appointed Florence Nightingale to oversee the introduction of female nurses into British military hospitals in Turkey and, on 4th November 1854, she arrived in Scutari with a group of 38 nurses.
J:
What an amazing story! What happened when they got to Scutari?
MW:
Well, initially, the doctors did not want the nurses there because they felt threatened but, within ten days, many more casualties arrived and all the nurses were needed to cope with this sudden influx of wounded soldiers.
J:
So the doctors were forced to accept the female nurses? Were the nurses successful?
MW:
Yes! The introduction of female nurses in military hospitals was an outstanding success, and the nation showed its gratitude to Florence Nightingale by honouring her with a medal in 1907. Throughout her life, she continued tirelessly to campaign for better conditions in hospitals and for improved health standards.
J:
When did she die?
MW:
She died on 13th August 1910, having been a complete invalid herself and totally blind for 15 years. She was a national heroine. Her far-sighted reforms have influenced the nature of modern health care, and her writings continue to be a resource for nurses, health managers and planners.
J:
Yes, she was certainly an inspiring woman.
TOP TIP
Before working on Activity B4, go through the Top Tip with the class, as it contains useful information about multiple-choice questions.
4/5 Pairs, then alone Prepare students for the second listening activity. Before they listen, students should read questions a–h and the possible answers (A, B, C) and consider which of the three options might be correct. Encourage them to give reasons if they can.
Answers a B, b A, c C,
d
B,
g
C,
e
A,
h
C
f
A,
6/7 Whole class, then pairs Go through the notes about Florence Nightingale, checking with students that they understand what type of information is required to fill each gap. Then in pairs they complete the notes, using a single word or a short phrase in each gap. Play the audio again for students to check their answers, or let them read the audioscript in Appendix 3.
Answers a academic, no problems, b hospitals and nursing, c considered suitable for educated woman, d Germany, e Greece,
f
Egypt,
g
1853,
h
38 nurses,
i
number of soldiers,
j
medal,
k
blind
WORD TIP
These two words are easily confused. Point out that wound is also a verb, whereas injury changes to injure. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
99
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
D Language focus: Future in the past
soon as she arrived; h I already told Sami when he arrived that we were going / would go to the cinema.
1 Whole class In English, this is the use of would or was/were going to to refer to the future from the perspective of some point in the past. Use the example in the Coursebook for students to tell you which part of the phrase is about past events (the expectation was), and which part moves forward in time (she would marry and start a family). Use a time line on the board to help students to visualise this, if necessary.
2 Alone then pairs Students use the words in the box to complete the gaps in the information about future in the past.
Answers a will, b past, c future,
1/2 Alone, then pairs Working on their own, students recall the information about paramedics, matching the sentence halves. Then they check their answers in pairs and put the complete sentences into the same order as in Activity B6. Refer students to the audioscript in Appendix 3 to double check their decisions.
Answers 3 + e, 5 + c, 1 + d, 2 + a, 4 + b
3 Whole class, then alone d
correct,
e
past continuous
3 Whole class, then alone 100
E Reading
Make sure students understand what they are going to read: an internet article about the qualifications needed to become a paramedic. On their own, students think about what they would like to find out (about the entry requirements) and write three questions. Focus on the example given first.
Do this activity orally with the class, and then students write their answers. Point out that in order to use the past continuous tense, they will need to use an additional verb, for example: plan, intend, expect.
4 Alone
Answers When doctors heard that Florence was going to / would / was planning/intending/expecting to work with them, they felt threatened.
5 Alone, then pairs
4 Whole class, then alone This activity provides further written practice, but go through the questions (a–h) orally first, allowing different students to provide different possible answers. Possible answers a My parents were planning to move to Australia but they decided to stay in Bahrain; b My sister was thinking of becoming a doctor but she changed her mind; c I thought we would /were going to eat out tonight; / I thought we were eating out tonight; d He believed he would / was going to pass all his exams; e I knew you wouldn’t / weren’t going to help him with his homework; f Ali said Hamed would / was going to come / was coming with him but he came alone; g She promised she would text her parents as
Students quickly read the text and check if any of their questions from the previous activity are answered. They do not need to read the text in any great detail at this stage.
Remind students to identify the key word/s in each question and to think about the type of answer that each question requires. Then they write the answers to the questions. When everyone has finished, they can check with a partner.
Answers a secure a student paramedic position with an ambulance service trust, or attend an approved fulltime course in paramedic science at a university b work their way up with experience and additional training c English and maths d full manual driving licence e successfully complete an HCPC-approved programme in paramedic science f from two to five years g students on full-time courses in paramedic science
Unit 14: Medical care
LANGUAGE TIP
This Language Tip highlights the importance for students in recognising noun suffixes, which may help them in their understanding of new words. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
F Speaking and listening: Completing notes 1/2 Whole class, then pairs Most students will be familiar with the ICRC (the International Committee of the Red Cross/Crescent), but if this is not the case, use some pictures – including the ones in the Coursebook – as prompts. Give them a few minutes to come up with ideas in response to Activity F2.
3 Pairs Students work together to check the meaning of the words and phrases given. Some of this is quite demanding so be prepared to provide assistance if necessary.
4 Pairs Students look at the three questions a–c and predict what the answers might be. If time is an issue, or if you think some students may struggle with the questions, allocate different questions to different students and then do class feedback.
5/6/7 Alone, then pairs Students listen and check their predictions in Activity F4. Then they listen to the audio a second time and fill in the gaps, writing one or two words for each gap. Finally, students can check with a partner or refer to the audioscript in Appendix 3.
Answers a famine, b drought and other natural disasters, c economic crisis, d political instability, e ethnic, f political, g economic, h food, i water, j essential goods, k hygiene,
l
medical care,
m
before,
n
after,
o
seeds,
p
tools,
q
cholera,
r
typhoid,
s
construction,
t
engineering,
u
humanitarian work,
v
stress/pressure
CD2, Track 4 Marianna Milutinovic: Today we welcome Alvaro Solomou, one of the 1200 relief workers with the Red Cross, the ICRC, who is going to talk to us about the ICRC’s approach to giving assistance. Welcome to the programme, Alvaro. Alvaro Solomou: Hello, Marianna, and thank you for inviting me. MM: Alvaro, can you tell us about how the ICRC assists victims of famine and drought and other natural disasters? AS: Well, we should remember that, all too often, natural disasters happen in areas where there is already some other sort of problem, such as an economic crisis, or a period of political instability. Put the two together and the people involved become even more insecure and desperate. MM: I imagine that different contexts also create extra problems, don’t they? AS: Yes, geographic context, as well as ethnic, political and economic, all translate into different needs and, therefore, the response the ICRC makes must be adapted to suit the context. MM: How is that done? AS: We use what is called the ‘Assistance Pyramid’. This establishes that preference must be given in any relief situation to the foundations of the pyramid – in other words, to food, water and essential goods – before anything else is done. MM: What about healthcare? Isn’t that a priority? AS: Hygiene and medical care take second and third places in the pyramid. Obviously, if a person is starving and thirsty, it does not matter how good the healthcare is. MM: I see. Does the ICRC only assist when there is a crisis? AS: No, not at all. In fact, in recent years, it has been the policy to provide help in developing countries once a crisis has passed, or even before one has occurred. MM: How is that actually done? AS: Well, for example, the ICRC assistance programmes have been extended, so that they now include seed and tools distribution, and the provision of veterinary care. The ICRC identifies priorities in a region, in order to provide the best possible assistance. MM: Going back to the issue of water for a moment, isn’t it true that millions of people across the world have difficulties gaining access to water? What can the ICRC do about this?
101
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
AS: Oh yes, that’s absolutely true and, of course, in many places the water that is available is actually extremely unhealthy and may carry waterborne diseases, such as cholera and typhoid. The ICRC has a programme of assistance, which includes construction, engineering and providing access to water, along with hygiene and environmental protection, thus ensuring that water is clean and safe to use.
G Speaking
MM: Is it dangerous working for the ICRC?
Differentiated activities
AS: Well, in any crisis situation there are dangers, but all of us are strongly motivated by humanitarian work, and hopefully we can all cope with the stress and the pressures which are bound to exist.
Support
i
Give students some time to look back through the unit and at their notes in order to prepare for the discussion.
MM: Alvaro, thank you for giving us such an interesting insight into the work of the ICRC.
ii
Reduce the number of questions that students need to talk about.
1/2 Whole class, then pairs or small groups If you prefer, students could work together in small groups to work through the discussion questions in this section. You should briefly go over the questions first, checking that students understand what they need to do.
Challenge TOP TIP
Focus on the Top Tip before students do Activities F5–F7. This Top Tip highlights the importance of checking the number of words required, as well as using the correct grammar and part of speech when answering listening questions.
Tell students that they will need to make a written summary of their discussions after they have finished.
102
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 14.
Exam focus Listening, Exercise 5, completing notes (Extended only) Part A CD2, Track 5 The world’s transport crisis has reached such catastrophic proportions that road-traffic accidents now kill more people each year than malaria. I predict that by 2030, 2.5 million people will be killed on the roads in developing countries each year and 60 million will be injured. Even today, 3,000 are killed and 30 000 seriously injured on the world’s roads every day. These are really frightening statistics, but, of course, it isn’t only road-traffic accidents which concern me. Air
pollution from traffic claims 400 000 lives each year, mostly in developing countries, and some 1.5 billion people are exposed every day to levels of pollution well in excess of World Health Organization recommended levels. We need to be aware of this because the damage being caused to people now, and especially youngsters, will follow them through until later life, and directly affect not only their health, but also their economic potential, and the health budgets of already strained national administrations. Research shows us that the problems of the world’s poor are multiplied by the car. It’s a simple basic fact. Deaths and injuries take place mainly in developing countries and mainly to pedestrians, cyclists, bus users and children. The poor suffer disproportionately. They experience the worst air pollution and are deprived of education, health, water and sanitation programmes because the needs of the car now soak up so much national income. Advances in vehicle, engine and fuel technology are more or less irrelevant in Asian and African cities, where the growth of car and lorry numbers is dramatic and where highly polluting diesel is widespread.
Unit 14: Medical care
Fortunately, I can report that in certain places, such as in parts of South America, something is being done. Transport budgets have been reallocated to improve the quality of life of poorer citizens and the results have been staggering. Bicycle- and pedestrian-only routes were planned, and cars were banned from certain areas. Parks were built on derelict land and car-free days implemented. This policy was radical and has improved the quality of life for the poor. This needs to be repeated all over the world.
Answers The cause Road-traffic accidents are just one problem; the other is air pollution from traffic. The problem is greatest in developing countries. 1.5 billion people suffer from excess levels of pollution daily. The damage Young people’s health and also economic potential affected. Cars increase problems for poor people as deaths and injuries occur mainly to pedestrians, cyclists, bus users and children. Their levels of education, health, water and sanitation as cars take economic priority over people. The solution Reallocation of transport budgets in South America has improved lives of poorer people. Solution should be repeated all over the world.
Part B Male teenager: Didn’t that guest speaker give an interesting talk about traffic problems yesterday? It will really help us with that school project we have to do this term. Female teenager: Yes, she was very interesting and she gave me some good ideas for our project too. I’ve already done some research. MT: Since yesterday morning? Wow, that was quick! FT: Well, I found out from my aunty, who’s a police captain, that in the UK, the number of people killed in road accidents has fallen dramatically since 2000. MT: Really? By how much? Maybe we can use the data? FT: Well, in 2000, 3,409 people died, including pedestrians, cyclists, motorcyclists and all vehicle users, but last year that had dropped to less than 1800.
MT: That’s incredible! That’s nearly a 50% drop. I read somewhere that the annual death rate from road accidents in the UK is about five per 100 000. FT: So for every 100 000 people, five die? That doesn’t seem very high, even though, of course, it should be 0. I know that in some countries in Africa, it’s more than 40 per 100 000. MT: I think we could design a graph for our project – a line graph – showing how the death rate from road traffic accidents has changed over the past ten or 15 years. FT: And we need to make it clear that nearly half of people killed are pedestrians, cyclists or motorcyclists – my aunty told me they are called ‘vulnerable road users’. MT: So they are more at risk because a car or a lorry gives you more protection. And we know that in South America even more ‘vulnerable road users’ are killed … FT: … Yes, I spoke to the speaker yesterday and she told me the figure is nearer to 70%. MT: I think we could put some focus on the effectiveness of bicycle- and pedestrian-only routes, and what happens when cars and other vehicles are banned from certain roads. FT: Good idea. I know that locally more and more people are using their bikes to get to and from school and work, using the new cycle paths … MT: … and that new pedestrians-only area downtown has really increased the number of shoppers. Banning cars has to be the way ahead. FT: I agree. Well, I think we have enough to be going on with. Let’s Skype later and discuss how to proceed. Bye! MT: Great, talk later …
Answers Information about problems with traffic In the UK, death from road accidents has fallen by nearly 50% since 2000. For every 100 000 people in some countries, more than 40 people die on the roads. Deaths involve pedestrians, cyclists and motorcyclists. These are the vulnerable road users who are more at risk More emphasis needed on bicycle- and people-only paths and roads In many places, banning cars has resulted in more people going shopping.
103
Unit 15: Healthy living Focus on speaking: topic cards NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Speaking: In the Cambridge IGCSE speaking examination, students need to communicate ideas/opinions clearly, accurately and effectively (S1), develop responses and link ideas using a range of appropriate linking devices (S2), use a range of grammatical structures and vocabulary accurately and effectively (S3), show control of pronunciation and intonation patterns (S4) and engage in a conversation and contribute effectively to help move the conversation forward (S5).
Learning objectives (LOs) Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons. 104
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about healthy living. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) what the speakers say are the reasons for taking care of our health, and (b) what the speakers do to have a healthy lifestyle, and if they could improve it. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a The reasons for taking care of our health: to stop us from getting sick, to live longer, show a good example to younger people. b
Things that the students do to have a healthy lifestyle: exercise, eat a balanced diet, get enough sleep. How the students could improve their lifestyle: by eating healthier food, sports facilities being provided by their school.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about how the lifestyles of other
people influence their own. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Pairs There are 7 pictures (1–7) of people doing things. Students work together and describe what they can see in each one.
2 Alone, then pairs Each of the seven phrases can be matched with one of the pictures in B1. Students need to discuss the phrases and match them, and then add one further piece of information of their own to each picture.
Answers 6 couch potatoes 7 eat what you grow 2 high in fat and calories 3 intense aromatic flavours 4 no pain no gain 1 reduces stress and high blood pressure
3/4 Small groups, then whole class Students work in small groups to discuss the questions. There are no right or wrong answers, so encourage students to speak freely. Do not interfere unless necessary, and save any language correction until students have finished. If time permits, do some class feedback, collecting students’ ideas together and perhaps writing the most popular ones on the board for further discussion.
C Reading and speaking 1 Pairs Later in this section students are going to read about ginger and honey, two of nature’s most amazing and healthiest foods. Firstly, students need to discuss the questions (a–c), which get them to focus on and to think about the two foods. There are no right or wrong answers. You may wish to set a short time limit for each question to keep students focused and to avoid time-wasting.
Unit 15: Healthy living
2 Pairs, then whole class
v
The information (a–j) is taken from the two texts students are going to read. They need to read each piece of information and decide to which food, ginger or honey, they think the information relates, and give a reason. Do not supply any answers at this stage as students will find out for themselves when they read the texts.
4 Pairs
Various answers possible
Various answers possible
Students now work with their partner and discuss the information they found out about in the previous activities.
5 Pairs, then whole class 3 Alone, then A/B pairs a
Firstly, put students into A/B pairs. Then all the As find the text Ginger – part of nature’s pharmacy and all the Bs Honey – nature’s oldest food in Appendix 2.
b
Then students read their text and check their answers to Exercise B5. They should not speak to their partner nor look at the other text yet.
Answers to B5 GINGER a, b, e, h, i, c
The final activity in this section gives students an opportunity to further discuss ginger and honey, not only what they have read in the texts but also their own ideas. Limit the time for each question (a–d) so that students stay on task.
D Language focus: Quantifying phrases 1 Whole class
HONEY c, d, f, g, j
Students need to read their text again, this time in more detail, to answer questions (i–v).
Answers GINGER i Widely used in Ancient China, dates back to 6th century BCE, introduced to Mediterranean before 1st century CE, 1585 Jamaican ginger first oriental spice grown in new World ii Asia, China, Japan, India, South America, Africa, Mediterranean region, Middle East, New World, Europe iii Ginger plant, white and pink buds, yellow flowers, rhizome gathered and boiled and scraped to stop growth, perennial plant iv Juice from roots used as spice, root pickled in vinegar, brewed in boiling water to make tea, dry ginger root used in cooking bread, sweets and cakes, also used in medicine and healthy living
Quantifying phrases are expressions that we use before a noun to give information about quantity, and they are very common in both spoken and written language. Look at the example in the Coursebook with your students, and ask for their ideas in response to questions 1a and 1b.
HONEY Cave paintings show beekeeping in Spain 7000 BCE, honey bee fossils 150 million years old, earliest record of keeping bees 2400 BCE near Cairo, Egypt Spain, Cairo Egypt, Greece, Sicily, Roman Empire, Europe Made using nectar of flowering plants, saved inside beehive
Natural sweetener, mixed with cheese to make cheesecake, gift, ingredient in medicine, natural source of carbohydrates, boosts performance and endurance, reduces muscle fatigue
105
Possible answers 1a it is plural (fossils); 1b it agrees with the subject (fossils + date)
2 Alone, then pairs Students work alone to find the nouns in the texts and identify the quantifying phrases which precede them. Then they check with their partner.
Answers a a number of countries, b a variety of (other) luxuries, c a range of (different) uses, d The majority of studies, e A range of sweetmeats and cakes, f a variety of areas, g the amounts of vitamins and minerals
3 Pairs Students work together to think of other nouns which are commonly quantified by a pair of.
Possible answers a pair of sunglasses, trousers, socks, gloves, shorts, tights, stockings, pyjamas, slippers
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
4 Whole class You could turn this into a competition, with students working in small groups or pairs to think of as many quantifying phrases + nouns as possible.
Possible answers a bottle of vinegar, a slice of apple pie, a bar of chocolate/ soap, a jar of marmalade, a scoop of ice-cream, a kilo of potatoes, a litre of milk, a carton of juice, etc.
5 Alone, then pairs
106
the earlier ones, but it may also be the case that these give students more to talk about.
3 Alone, then pairs Students are going to listen to six different people responding to the five prompts in the topic card they have just been studying. As they listen, students decide which person matches each of the five prompts. There is one extra person speaking, who does not match any of the prompts. After listening, students work in pairs to compare their answers.
Students work alone to complete the gaps in the text using the quantifying phrases in the box. Then they check with their partner to see if there are any variations.
Answers Adam 5th prompt: the suggestion that the people who profit from the health and fitness industry are not motivated by the right reasons
Answer High intensity exercise: Can less really be more?
Hana 3rd prompt: the advantages and disadvantages of a healthy lifestyle
Could just a few minutes of exercise a week be good for your health? Apparently it can. According to a variety of/a large number of studies (as well as a large number of/a majority of fitness fanatics who can’t stop talking about it), short and intense ‘High Intensity Training’ (HIT) workouts are the way to go. Of course, not every exercise is perfect, and one of the drawbacks of HIT is that if participants increase the level of intensity of each workout too quickly, they run the risk of incurring an injury.
Mustafa X
E Listening and speaking 1 Pairs In Unit 10 students discussed effective strategies for responding to questions in the speaking examination, and looked at role-play cards on the topics of Education and Studying Abroad. For this activity, students look at the role-play card about Healthy Living, and remind themselves of what they need to do.
Suggested answers carefully read the topic, respond to all five prompts in the order given, no written notes allowed, try to develop the conversation, can introduce own related ideas, etc.
2 Alone, then pairs Students work alone and carefully read the five prompts, deciding which ones they think are the least and most challenging. They should then discuss with their partner and give reasons for their choices. Generally speaking the last couple of prompts tend to be more challenging than
Sara 2nd prompt: some people you know who try to have a healthy lifestyle and the reasons for this Miska 4th prompt: the stresses and dangers of being obsessed with health and fitness Layla 1st prompt what you do to have a healthy lifestyle
CD2, Track 6 Adam: I believe that health and fitness is a business like any other, and people have to profit from it. Hana: Obviously a healthy lifestyle makes you feel better. But in my opinion a healthy lifestyle can also be expensive. Mustafa: Healthy living is only for young people in my country, as far as I’m concerned. Sara: Some of my school friends have a healthy lifestyle. They are very keen on sports and play in different school teams. Miska: It seems to me that if you are really interested and involved in something I think it can become stressful and dangerous. Layla: To be honest, I don’t think I have a particularly healthy lifestyle nowadays. I guess that I’m too busy at school, doing homework, and helping out at home.
4 Pairs Students now think about how the five speakers’ introductory phrases could be expanded. There are six
Unit 15: Healthy living
phrases for students to look at and match to the five speakers (Mustafa has already been excluded) in E3. Students do the matching, decide which phrase does not fit, and then listen to check their answers.
Answers a Layla, b Sara,
c
Hana,
d
Miska,
e
in different school teams. They all say how much they enjoy it, and they never seem to be bored with nothing to do. Furthermore, they quite often ask me to join in, but I fear that I won’t be as good as them and make a fool of myself. c
Hana: Obviously a healthy lifestyle makes you feel better. But in my opinion a healthy lifestyle can also be expensive. I think the key is moderation. If you do the right amount, it is obviously very beneficial, but too much could cause an injury. So it’s probably not a bad idea to programme your healthy lifestyle, by firstly including both physical and mental activity, and secondly introducing a balanced diet.
d
Miska: It seems to me that if you are really interested and involved in something I think it can become stressful and dangerous. This type of lifestyle can take over everything you do, and I think that can be risky and cause you to worry. Is it worth it? I don’t think so. There’s no need to be extreme about living in a healthy way. I’m young. I want to enjoy my life!
e
Adam: I believe that health and fitness is a business like any other, and people have to profit from it. I think that when you pay for something, it’s up to you to make sure you are getting good value for money. There are cheats and people who want to make more and more everywhere, and the health and fitness scene is no different. I’m afraid there’s nothing you can do about it.
Adam
CD2, TRACK 6 Adam: I believe that health and fitness is a business like any other, and people have to profit from it. Hana: Obviously a healthy lifestyle makes you feel better. But in my opinion a healthy lifestyle can also be expensive. Sara:
Some of my school friends have a healthy lifestyle. They are very keen on sports and play in different school teams.
Miska: It seems to me that if you are really interested and involved in something I think it can become stressful and dangerous. Layla: To be honest, I don’t think I have a particularly healthy lifestyle nowadays. I guess that I’m too busy at school, doing homework, and helping out at home.
5 Alone Students are going to listen to the five speakers again, this time responding to the prompts in the correct order, and adding some extra information to their responses. During listening, students need to match the speakers to the information (a–e).
Answers a Hana, b Miska, c Adam,
d
Layla,
e
Sara
CD2, Track 7 a Layla: To be honest, I don’t think I have a particularly healthy lifestyle nowadays. I guess that that I’m too busy at school, doing homework, and helping out at home. But I know that I should do more. The longer you wait, the more difficult it gets to change. In addition, and having said that, I think my diet is pretty healthy, and I play sports at school and walk everywhere. It could be worse! b Sara: Some of my school friends have a healthy lifestyle. They are very keen on sports and play
6 Pairs Students work together to check their answers and confirm by reading the audioscript in Appendix 3.
LANGUAGE TIP
Using fillers (or fixed phrases) makes spoken language sound far more fluent and natural, so it is a good idea to highlight this importance to students and encourage them to use fillers when appropriate. Get them to re-read the audioscript in Appendix 3 to find more examples.
Suggested answers 2 Furthermore, 3 But in my opinion, So, 4 It seems to me that, I think that, is it worth it?, I don’t think so, 5 I believe that, it’s up to you, I’m afraid there’s,
107
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
7 Whole class, then pairs For the final activity in this section, students can role-play the examiner and candidate in a speaking exam, using the five follow-up questions (a–e). Go through the questions orally first, getting some possible answers from the class, then students perform the role-play. If time permits, they can exchange roles.
F Speaking TOP TIP
Students often worry about their lack of knowledge about the topic. Reassure them that this is not a history exam in which they are assessed on facts. They need to demonstrate that they can communicate effectively in English, and the topic is just a starting point for the communication. Examiners are trained to deal with students who may not feel comfortable talking about a particular topic.
1 Pairs 108
Students discuss what criteria they think are used to assess spoken language, for example vocabulary. Students will probably also think of grammar and pronunciation.
2 Alone, then pairs Do a couple of examples and then ask students to decide which area, Structure, Vocabulary, or Development and Fluency, the descriptions relate to.
Answers Structure: a, b, h, Vocabulary: e, g, i, Development and Fluency: c, d, f
G Watch, listen and talk 1 Alone, then pairs Prepare students to watch a video of a student practicing a discussion with a teacher about Healthy Living. The student is responding to the same prompts that they have already seen in Section D. Students need to decide which, if any, of the criteria from Activity E2 could apply to the student, and give their reasons.
2 Alone, then pairs Students now watch a second student responding to the same prompts and decide if they perform better or worse
than the first student, giving their reasons. They also need to decide again which, if any, of the criteria from Activity E2 could apply to the student, and give their reasons.
H Reading and writing 1 Whole class With books closed, ask students question 1a. Do not supply an answer yet. Then move on to question 1b, which will give students the answer to the first question. Encourage students to think carefully about the question and to supply reasons why gardening is good exercise. Then move on to question 1c and again get specific ideas from students.
2 Pairs Students open their books and do the matching activity.
Answers a3: Besides the exertion involved, gardening has other pluses that makes it a good form of exercise and calorie burning. b5: Gardening definitely has many health and therapeutic benefits. c2: Gardening for 30 to 45 minutes a day can burn 150 to 300 calories. d4: Gardening isn’t usually enough exercise to replace your daily walk or swim. e6: It takes at least 30 minutes of exercise several days a week, to really receive any health benefits from gardening. f1: Lifting bags, pushing wheelbarrows and shovelling all provide resistance training similar to weight lifting.
3 Alone, then pairs Remind students of the three paragraph headings a Is gardening good exercise?, b What makes gardening good exercise? and c How can I get the most exercise out of gardening?. Then they need to match each of the phrases from the previous activity to the correct paragraph heading.
Answers a B5 and C2, b A3 and F1, c E6 and D4
Unit 15: Healthy living
4 Alone, then pairs
How can I get the most out of gardening?
Students now read the text and complete the gaps (a–f) using the six sentences from Activity H2.
•
It takes at least 30 minutes of exercise several days a week, to really receive any health benefits from gardening
Answers a b5, b c2,
•
Break that 30 minutes up into shorter active periods throughout the day
•
Incorporate a little stretching before and after gardening and take things slowly in extreme heat
c
a3,
e
e6,
d
f1,
f
d4
WORD TIP
Sometimes students are familiar with using adjective form of a word, but are less confident about using the noun form. This Word Tip highlights two words which are probably more familiar to students as adjectives: intense/intensive and strong. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
5 Alone, then pairs Students now re-read the text and identify one piece of information in each paragraph that particularly surprises or interests them. They should tell their partner and decide if they agree or disagree with each other’s choices, giving their reasons.
6 Whole class, then pairs Go through the notes with the class and get them to give possible answers. Remind students that in these types of exercises there may be more answers than are actually required, i.e. while there may be three bullets, the text may contain four or five pieces of information. If this is the case, students must not try to include more than the required amount of information. After going through the notes, students on their own look at the text again and write their notes. Sample answer from an IGCSE Core student: Is gardening good exercise? •
Has many healthy and therapeutic benefits
•
Just as effective as other moderate to strenuous forms of exercise, like walking and bicycling
•
Gardening for 30 to 45 minutes a day can burn 150 to 300 calories
What makes gardening good exercise? •
Working the full range of major muscle groups: legs, buttocks, arms, shoulders, neck, back and abdomen
•
Great deal of stretching involved with gardening
•
Lifting bags, pushing wheelbarrows and shovelling all provide resistance training similar to weight lifting, which leads to healthier bones and joints
7 Alone Now students use their notes from the previous exercise to write a summary of the health benefits of gardening. Sample answer Gardening has many health and therapeutic benefits. It can be just as effective as other moderate types of exercise, because gardening for 30 to 45 minutes a day can burn from 150 to 300 calories. While gardening you are using a large number of major muscle groups and you are simultaneously stretching your body. Furthermore, all the lifting and pulling, helps develop healthier bones and joints. In order to receive health benefits, you need to garden several times a week for at least 30 minutes. It is a good idea to break up 30 minutes of gardening throughout the day and to also make sure that you stretch before you garden and not to overdo it in high temperatures. [119 words]
Differentiated activities Support
Students work in groups of three, with each student using their notes to write only one of the three paragraphs. Then they discuss each other’s paragraphs and combine the three to make one summary. Challenge
Students write their summary without using their notes, but only by referring back to the text. They can look at their notes after they have finished writing, to make sure they have included all the necessary information in their summary.
8 Small groups, then whole class Finish off the final section by putting students into small groups to discuss the questions. Encourage students to give reasons for their comments, reminding them that this is one thing that examiners listen for in speaking examinations.
109
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 15.
Exam focus Speaking, Part 2, topic cards NOTE: The exam focus is on speaking, and involves students in looking at a new topic card, and then taking on the roles of examiner and student, using the prompts on the card.
110
1/2 Pairs Students work together and look at the prompts, discussing how they might respond to each one. When they are ready, students take on the roles of examiner and interviewee, using the topic of Lifestyle Changes and the prompts on the card. Your job is to monitor and encourage where necessary, and provide any language students are struggling with. However, this should be an opportunity for students to build their confidence and fluency.
Unit 16: Social media Focus on reading: skimming and scanning and multiple matching NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 2 (multiple matching): Remember that in a multiple matching activity students need to read a continuous text divided into sections, or a number of shorter texts, and answer a series of questions testing more detailed comprehension. Candidates match the correct answer to the question. This type of activity requires more intensive reading, and students will need to understand things which are implied, but not directly stated (for example, gist, speaker’s purpose, intentions and feelings) (R4). Students also need to identify and select relevant information (R1), understand ideas, opinions and attitudes (R2) and show understanding of the connections between them (R3).
What are their reasons: to communicate with friends and family, get opinions from other people
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about the social media they use and why they choose not to use others. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Pairs
Learning objectives (LOs) Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
A Watch, listen and talk
Students are going to look at some graphic information about the global digital age, but before doing so they need to understand some key phrases. Elicit meanings from your students, prompting them using different methods (for example, concept checking, asking for or providing opposites, etc.).
111
2 Pairs The five icons appear in one of the graphics students will be looking at, but first they need to say what they think each icon represents by matching each one with an appropriate heading.
1 Whole class, then alone Explain that students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about social media. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) what the speakers understand by the term ‘social media’ and the examples they give, and (b) what social media the speakers use most and with whom, and the reasons they give. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a What the students understand by the term ‘social media’: sharing opinions/discussions with a lot of other people, interacting with people using the Internet. Examples of social media they give, any three from: Instagram, Twitter, Snapchat, Facebook, Whatsapp. b Social media they use the most: Instagram, Twitter, Snapchat.
3 Pairs, whole class Now students look at the two graphics and think about the general information that each one shows. There is no need for students to talk about specific details at this point, but they should match the two headings (i and ii) with graphics A and B.
Answers Aii, Bi
4 Pairs Allocate A/B to students in pairs. Students A looks at graphic A and student B looks at graphic B. Give students a minute to tell each other in one sentence what their graphic shows, without including any specific details. There is a suggestion in the Coursebook to help students begin their sentence. 111
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
5/6 Alone, then pairs Students now work alone to find the answers to three of the six questions (a–f), so firstly they need to decide which questions refer to their graphic. When they have answered the questions, they can share with their partner.
TOP TIP
Some examination questions may ask students to retrieve information from a graphic, rather than a text itself, and it is important to ensure students look at all the information given.
Differentiated activities Support
i
Allow students to work in pairs to give each other some support.
ii
Tell students which three of the six questions (a–f) refer to their graphic.
iii
Provide the answers to the three questions for students to match.
Challenge
112
i
Ask students to prepare two–three more questions for another student to answer.
ii
Give students the answers to all six questions, and tell them not to look at the questions. They have to write the questions themselves and then check in the Coursebook.
C Reading 1 Pairs or small groups Questions (a–d) provide an introduction to the web article students are going to read in C3. Set a time limit for students to respond to each question. If time is an issue, you could divide up the questions between pairs or groups to discuss and then give whole class feedback. As students will be referring back to these discussions in C4, tell them to make some written notes.
2 Pairs Students work together to check the meaning of the seven words and one phrase, which have been removed from the text.
Answers a 332m, b 7.395b, c total number of active social users, d increase in the number of active social media users, e number of active mobile social users, f 31%
Suggested answers abstained = did not take part in something, avid = very keen + multitaskers = people who can do more than one thing at a time, compulsively = doing something a lot because you cannot control yourself, mind-boggling = unimaginable, self-esteem = confidence in yourself, suppressed = controlled or stopped, traits = characteristics, tweens = young people aged around 10–14 years.
7 Alone, then whole class
3 Alone, then pairs
The purpose of this activity is for students to re-present the information in their graphic using a different format, such as a chart, a table or a graph. If you think students will find this challenging, provide them with an example of your own first. Obviously there are many variations possible, but make sure students include all the necessary information and details in their presentation.
Students read the text and fill the gaps using the words from C2. If you want to give some support, you could do this paragraph by paragraph, checking answers before students continue.
Answers a mind-boggling, b tweens, c avid multitaskers, d compulsively,
e
traits,
f
abstained,
g
self-esteem,
h
supressed
Unit 16: Social media
(ii) lower academic performance
4 Alone, then pairs Students look at the text in more detail to check if their ideas and anything they discussed in C1 are confirmed or not. They should have made notes during these earlier discussions, so they can refer to these as they read.
f
(ii) monitor what is happening g
light
h
regulates your sleep cycle
i
same type of light most common outdoors during daytime
WORD TIP
The word while is commonly seen and used to mean during, but it is seen less frequently when comparing two different facts. Point this out to students, and then refer them to the exercise in the Workbook.
5 Alone For this activity students focus on the number in the first three paragraphs and identify what each one refers to. When they are ready, they can share their answers with a partner.
Answers a 6.5 hours and 4.5 hours – daily time spent by teens and tweens on screen-based media for enjoyment purposes b 60% – of young people say they text while doing homework, and 75% – of young people say they listen to music while doing homework c 50% – of young people believed that using social media made, difference to the quality of their homework d 400 teens – number of teens in a study e 62% – the amount of extra information written down by students who abstained from texting during a lecture
(i) to respond to messages,
D Listening 1 Alone, then pairs Students are going to listen to part of a radio talk on the subject of social media. Before they listen, students look at the vocabulary from the listening in column A and match it with a suitable meaning in column B. Then check with a partner.
Answers A
B
sedentary
inactive
detrimental
harmful
arteries
blood-carrying tubes
profound
extremely significant
gauge
assess
precursors
indications
disc
strong material between bones
2 Pairs
6 Alone, then pairs
For this activity, students need to look at both columns of information to get a general idea of the content before they attempt to match the phrases. They will need to use common sense and logic as well as knowledge of grammar to make complete sentences, but it does not matter if they are unsure or get things wrong at this stage. Do not supply any answers as they will find out for themselves when they listen to the talk.
Students look at the text one more time and write the answers to the questions (a–i).
3 Alone
LANGUAGE TIP
This Language Tip highlights that social media is plural, not singular. There are some other words which have the plural ending –ia, but most of these are not commonly used in this way. For example: the plural of curriculum is curricula, but curriculums is also acceptable.
Students listen and check their answers.
Answers a nine hours b media used at school or for homework c half d they perform worse in tests e (i) problems sleeping,
Answers a 6, b 3, c 4, d 2, e 5, f 1 CD2, Track 8 The other unmentioned risk here has to do with the fact that media usage is often a sedentary activity. Children
113
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
spend more than 60 percent of their waking day sitting down, and by some estimates children sit for an average of 8.5 hours a day. Furthermore, activity levels are thought to decline steeply after the age of eight, especially among girls. Researchers decided to study a small group of pre-tween girls (aged seven to 10 years) to determine if sitting is as detrimental to their health as it appears to be to adults. At the start of the study, all of the girls had healthy functioning arteries. However, after sitting for three hours, playing on tablets or watching movies, there was a ‘profound’ negative change in functioning arteries by up to 33 percent in the girls. This is alarming since a 1 percent decline is known to increase heart disease risk by 13 percent in adults. Fortunately, there were also some more encouraging findings. The girls’ artery function had returned to normal a few days later when they returned to the laboratory for tests. And when the sitting time was interrupted by a gentle 10-minute cycling session, no decline was recorded. Still, no one knows what effect sitting for hours, day after day, has on kids’ health, so it is best to encourage kids to stay active.
114
Not surprisingly, researchers have found that higher cell phone use was linked to reduced physical activity and fitness. According to the authors, cell phone use may be able to gauge a person’s risk for a multitude of health issues related to an inactive lifestyle. Depending on the research you read, back problems are also a possibility. In a UK study involving ten year-olds, up to 10 percent may already have precursors to bad backs, and 9 percent of the kids showed worsening back disc problems with at least one disc. The researcher connected this to carrying heavy school books, watching TV, and playing video games, but texting may also play a significant role.
4 Alone, then pairs Before students listen again, go through the multiplechoice questions (a–d) with them, offering a chance for them to answer from memory, or from guessing. Then play the recording again for students to answer.
Answers a A b B c B d C
LANGUAGE TIP
These two useful phrases According to... and Depending on.... from the listening text can have different meanings, depending on how they are used. Go through the information with your students, and then refer them to the exercise in the Workbook.
E Language focus: -ing forms 1 Whole class -ing forms are very common and can be used in many different ways. Go through the examples with your students, pointing out that it is not necessary for them to learn and remember all the different uses. However, it is important that they are confident in using them. For each example (a–g), ask students to replace the phrase containing the underlined –ing word with an alternative, for example: a Before entering a cinema, switch off your mobile phone; b Speaking during an examination is not allowed.
2 Alone, then pairs If students are confident about the structures (i.e. the position of the –ing word in the phrase) in E1, they should be able to correctly match the examples below. Do the first one as an example and then students work alone before checking with their partner.
Answers a What is shocking, however, is just how much time they are actually spending doing this (g, e) b … such as lying about the amount of time they spend texting, difficulty in stopping the behaviour, and losing sleep to text (c, f, a, c) c students who abstained from texting during a lecture (a) d students who texted or used Facebook while doing schoolwork (a) e teens are staying up late to respond to messages and monitor what is happening (e, e)
3 Alone, then pairs Students read the audioscript in Appendix 3 and find examples of words ending in –ing, and say what their use is. Then they can compare with a partner’s examples.
Unit 16: Social media
Answers Children spend more than 60 percent of their waking day sitting down (g, c) to determine if sitting is as detrimental to their health as it appears to be to adults (b) At the start of the study, all of the girls had healthy functioning arteries. (g) However, after sitting for three hours, playing on tablets or watching movies, there was a ‘profound’ negative change in functioning arteries by up to 33 percent in the girls. (a, c, c, g)
speculate which person said each comment, and then discuss in their groups and give reasons for their choices. There is no need to give any answers as students will find out when they read.
4 Pairs, then whole class Students pair up as A/B, each one reading about two of the people, and checking their answers to F2. Then everyone shares their answers with the rest of the class.
This is alarming since a 1 percent decline is known to increase heart disease risk by 13 percent in adults. (g)
Answers a B, b D, c A,
F Reading: multiple matching
5 Alone, then pairs
1 Small groups
Students now do the multiple-matching task by reading all four paragraphs and choosing from the people A–D for questions (a–j).
Students should be familiar with these (and other) social media. Working in groups they tell each other which ones they use (if any) and what the advantages and disadvantages of each one are.
2 Small groups Students look at the information about the four people who use different social media and predict what they think each one might say about how, why and when they use their chosen social medium. There are no right or wrong answers. You could alternatively put students into groups of four, with each student thinking about one person, and then sharing their ideas with the other group members.
Answers a C, b A, c C, d C,
d
C,
g
A,
e
B,
h
C
f
C,
e
A,
i
B,
f
D,
j
D
g
D,
h
B,
6 Alone This is a writing activity to finish off the unit. Using the previous text as a model, students choose their own social medium and write about 150 words explaining why it is their favourite.
3 Alone, then small groups All the information (a–h) comes from the magazine article students are going to read in F4. Students work alone and
Reflection
Exam focus
Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 16.
Reading, Exercise 2, Multiple matching Answers a A, b C,
c D,
d B,
f C,
h A,
i D,
g B,
e C, jB
115
Unit 5 17: The environment Focus on reading Entertainment and writing: note-making and summary writing Y
NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 3 (note-making): Students need to demonstrate that they can make brief notes under supplied headings relating to an article/text (for example: from a newspaper or magazine) printed in the question paper. Specifically, students need to identify and select relevant information (R1), understand ideas, opinions and attitudes (R2) and show understanding of the connections between ideas, opinions and attitudes (R3). NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 4 (summary writing): Students need to write a 80 (Core) or 100 (Extended) word summary about an aspect or aspects of a text printed in the question paper. To do this effectively, students need to identify and select relevant information (R1), understand ideas, opinions and attitudes (R2) and show understanding of the connections between ideas, opinions and attitudes (R3). 116
Furthermore, students need to communicate information/ ideas/opinions clearly, accurately and effectively (W1), organise ideas into coherent paragraphs using a range of appropriate linking devices (W2), use a range of grammatical structures and vocabulary accurately and effectively (W3) and show control of punctuation and spelling (W4).
Learning objectives (LOs) Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about the environment and pollution. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) what the speakers think are the main causes of pollution, and (b) what the speakers say about the measures being taken in their own country to reduce or control pollution and protect the environment, and how show successful these are. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a What students think are the main causes of pollution, any three from: fossil fuels, burning rubbish, lack of government funding, emissions from factories. b The measures being taken in their own countries to reduce pollution and protect the environment: government asks factories to stop emissions for periods of time, none it is not a priority for the government.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about pollution in their country, what is being done to reduce or control it and how successful these measures are. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Pairs, then whole class In pairs, students look at the five pictures and work through questions (a–e). There are no right or wrong answers so allow students to discuss freely without too much interference. You may decide to limit the time spent on each question so that students remain focused. During class feedback, students can compare their ideas.
LANGUAGE TIP
The Language Tip focuses on commonly confused phrases which we use when describing someone, something or somewhere. Students will need to use these phrases for Activity B1f and other activities in the unit. Go through the information with your students and refer them to the exercise in the Workbook.
Students now describe the five pictures in more detail, but this time making sure that they use the phrases from the Language Tip, as well as their words from Activity B1a. Make sure you allow time for students to share their ideas, and check for accuracy when using the introductory phrases.
Unit 17: The environment
2 Pairs a
Students work with a partner and decide if the names in the box refer to a continent, a country or region, or something else.
Answers the Arctic = region, the Atlantic Ocean and the Pacific Ocean = areas of water, Europe = continent, Canada = country, Russia = country, Asia = continent, North America = continent b
Use the map in the Coursebook for students to identify where the eight places are located. If you have a projector and a screen, you could use this and select students to come to the screen and point to or stick labels on the various places.
c–f Students discuss these questions in their pairs and then share their ideas with the whole class.
C Reading and writing 1 Whole class, then pairs The newspaper article students are going to read is about a system used in Indonesia for recycling waste. Before anything else, check that students know where Indonesia is (you could ask them to show you on the map in the Coursebook), and ask them what type of waste they think might be recycled there. Then in pairs students check the meaning of the words and phrases from the article. If time is short, you could supply possible definitions for students to match. Suggested Answers shape the mindset = develop or change someone’s opinion, beverage = drink, biodegradable = able to decay naturally, consensus = agreement, a cooperative = a company owned by the people who work in it, discarded = thrown away, brooches = pieces of jewellery usually pinned to clothing, fertiliser and compost = substances used to help plants grow well, gather = collect, inorganic = without living material, a glimpse of = a quick idea about something
2 Alone, then pairs Based on the words and phrases, students consider what they are likely to read about in the text and make a list of two–three things. They then share their ideas and see if they agree.
select the most appropriate heading. Tell them not to worry about the gaps (a–k) and the words in boxes.
Answer The original article was called Earning from Waste, so for (b) Earning Money from Waste is the best answer. However, if students can make a good case for one of the other headlines, you should accept this.
4 Alone, then pairs Students read the text again, completing the gaps (a–k) with the words and phrases from C1. Give them some time to check with a partner before you do feedback.
Answers a a glimpse of, b a cooperative, c inorganic, d gather, e biodegradable, f fertiliser and compost,
g
consensus,
h
beverage,
i
discarded,
j
brooches,
k
shape the mindset
5 Pairs Working in pairs, students look at the exam-style question and discuss what they have to do. They do not need to write anything yet.
6 Pairs This activity will give students a clearer understanding of the content of each of the five paragraphs in the newspaper article. There are six possible topics, which students need to match to the five paragraphs (there is one extra topic which they do not need).
Answers a Changing attitudes [Paragraph 5], b Handicraft products [3], c How the BSM operates [1], d Paying bills [X], e Sorting, collection and delivery of waste [2], f Selling products online [4]
3 Pairs
7 Alone, then pairs
Students look at the five possible headlines for the newspaper article, checking that they understand what they mean. Then they quickly look through the text and
Students work alone to re-read the text in detail, and write two–three notes about each topic. Go through the example in the Coursebook first. When students have
117
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
finished their notes they can compare with their partner’s. Do class feedback to check if everyone agrees.
How BSM helps its members •
payments made
Possible answers 1 How the BSM operates: trash packed into bags and sacks, taken to be weighed, BSM cooperative is centre for trash collection and management 2 Sorting, collection and delivery of waste: organic and inorganic rubbish separated, organic recycled as fertiliser and compost, inorganic is non-biological, separated trash is weighed and then more sorting and packing, information sent to trash bank for payment 3 Handicraft products: umbrellas, handbags, hats, tissue holders, brooches 4 Selling products online: BSM provides advice on selling online 5 Changing attitudes: people’s attitudes about waste changing, more people aware of careless dumping of waste
•
assists with savings
•
gives training
•
advice on how to sell products
8 Pairs Students decide which of their notes from C7 they could use to answer the exam-style question in C5. 118 TOP TIP
While it may seem obvious, the number of bullet points tells students how many notes they need to write. There is one mark available for each note they write, so trying to write more information will not result in students’ obtaining any extra marks!
9 Pairs Students look at the sample answer in which a student has mixed up their notes under the wrong headings. Working together, students decide under which heading each note should appear, and give their reasons.
Answers What happens after trash collection? •
trash taken for sorting and packing
•
trash weighed
•
information sent to trash bank
Products made from recycled trash •
plastic sheets for making handicraft s
•
everyday products such as umbrellas and hats
•
jewellery: brooches
TOP TIP
Remind students that notes should always be brief and must relate to the text they have read. In other words, they cannot include their own ideas or information that does not appear in the text.
10 Alone, then pairs In some examinations, the note-making and summary writing questions might be linked, although this is no longer the case in the Cambridge IGCSE exam. This means that students use the notes they made to write their summary, without having to read and understand a second text. You can use this approach for students who need more scaffolding in order to write a successful summary. Students read the exam-style question carefully and identify at least three important things that the question asks them to do.
Suggested answers i use notes, ii write a summary, iii 100 words, iv own words, v 6 + 6 marks available
11 Alone Students write their summary using the notes they made in C9.
Possible Answer The BSM trash bank in Java, Indonesia, encourages local people to collect all their rubbish, and then take it for sorting and packing. The collected trash is then weighed and the information is sent to BSM so that it can make financial payments. Recycled trash is turned into plastic sheets, and is then used to make everyday products such as umbrellas and hats, but also for making jewellery items, for example brooches. The BSM trash bank not only gives local people training in and advice on how to sell their recycled
Unit 17: The environment
products online, but also helps them with their savings after they have received payments for their trash. [108 words]
D Language focus: Referring words 1 Whole class Go through the information together with your students, pointing out that the phrases in red and green show how connections are made within a text using referring words and phrases.
2 Pairs Students go back to the text and look at the boxed words in paragraphs 2–5. For each boxed word or words, students need to say which word or words it is referring back to. If you are short of time, you could allocate the four paragraphs to different pairs or groups of students to work on, and then allow some time for them to share their answers.
Answers [2] The members of the BSM cooperative are from community units and school groups, as well as individuals1, who (d) ___ and sort trash from their 1 homes and workplaces, separating organic2 and inorganic3 rubbish. The former 2 is (e) ___ and can be processed in the presence of oxygen, and can be recycled as (f) ___ later on, while the latter 3 is any waste of non-biological origin, of industrial origin or some another non-natural process, for example: plastics and synthetic fabrics. Group members4 take their 4 separated trash for weighing to a local leader, while individual members5 send their 5 trash directly to the central BSM location. Trash delivery time is based on a (g) ___ for groups, and once a month for individuals. The trash6 is collected by dump trucks and taken for further sorting, packing and weighing by warehouse workers, and information is then sent to the trash bank where calculations are made about its 6 value, and payments are made to individuals’ or groups’ bank accounts. Members7 who strictly sort their 7 rubbish according to the 70 categories for inorganic trash can earn a lot more money, and information is readily available for them 7 on how to do this. [3] Used plastic8 (h) ___ bottles8 are directly processed into plastic chips after being separated from their 8 labels and caps and grouped by colour. (i) ___ plastic bags, paper, iron and bottle caps are packed and sent to factories in Malang and Subabaya, where some of what was once seen as trash will return to the central BSM in the form of plastic sheets for
making handicraft s. Plastic packaging for food, soap, detergent, shampoo and coffee, among others, is also recycled into various everyday products, including umbrellas, handbags, hats, tissue holders and jewellery such as (j) ___. [4] As a BSM member, each person9 receives training and learns skills in how to make handicraft s using recycled materials. They 9 are also advised about how to sell their 9 products online. Not all of the money earned through the trash bank can be distributed freely, especially for group members, as some of the earnings are spent on environmental development, such as a park construction or tree planting. Additionally, BSM assists members10 with their 10 savings which can be exchanged for basic necessities, electricity bill payments and health insurance. [5] So far, only inorganic waste is handled by the BSM, leaving wet garbage to the Supit Urang landfill as the trash bank’s land area is too small for a wormbreeding and compost-making site. However, BSM11 feels it 11 has provided a solution for the problem of inorganic waste, and believes that its11 efforts will gradually (k) ___ of locals12 so that they 12 avoid carelessly and unnecessarily dumping waste.
E Speaking and vocabulary 1 Pairs Students work together and, after reading the four phrases, they should decide what they think the text will be about. Give them freedom to speculate – they will find out when they read the text.
2 Pairs, then whole class Based on their ideas from Activity E1, students make a list of words and phrases that they think might appear in the text. Allow time for the whole class to share and compare their ideas.
3 Small groups The words and phrases in the box all appear in the text. Students can use different reference sources to check the meanings if they cannot agree.
F Reading and writing 1 Alone Students work alone and skim read the text, checking if their predictions in Activities E1 and E2 were correct. Tell them not to worry about the gaps in the text at this stage.
119
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
j
2 Alone, then pairs For this activity students need to read the text in more detail, and complete the gaps (a–e) with the correct word from the list. If the Coursebook text for F1 has the headline ‘Report’, please download a revised version from: education.cambridge.org/9781316636558. If the headline reads ‘Climate Report’ you have the correct text. When they have finished they should check with their partner.
Answers a it, b its,
c
many,
d
their
e
they,
damage to societies, the environment, future prosperity
5 Pairs Students read the exam-style question carefully and decide exactly what they have to do. Make sure they are aware that the summary is about the impacts of climate change in Europe. Also, check the number of words required (100) and point out that students should use their own words as far as possible, as marks are awarded for language (up to 8) as well as content (up to 8).
6 Alone, then pairs WORD TIP
These two words , effect and affect, are commonly misused, misspelled and even mispronounced. Go through the information and then refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
120
Students now re-read the text and locate the relevant information. There is some in paragraphs 1 and 6, but the main information students need to use can be found in paragraphs 2, 3, 4 and 5.
Answers Their brief notes should include the following:
3 Alone, then pairs
•
Students work alone and look at gaps (f–j) in the text. For each gap, they need to supply a suitable referring word. When they are ready, they should check their answers together.
countries in Europe being affected by climate change, environments and economies at risk
•
Lithuania – birds dying because not migrating due to mild winters/warm weather
•
low-lying areas, Nordic Europe at risk of flooding
•
North Sea countries also at risk of flooding
•
50% of Danes worried about safety of their homes
•
ski tourism industry in French Alps and Pyrenees depressed, snow loss and more possibility of avalanches
•
some ski resorts may shut down
Answers f their, g its,
h
this,
i
our,
j
we
4 Alone, then pairs Students write the answers to the questions. Before they begin, remind them to find the key word/s in each question and to think about the type of answer each question requires. After they have finished, students can give their answers to a partner for checking.
Answers a they are already suffering from the impact of climate change b affects our daily lives c [Students’ own answers] d mild winters stop them migrating to warmer climates e because they are low-lying f significant snow loss, greater chance of avalanches g
the areas worst affected by flooding due to rising sea levels
h
due to combination of geographical and economic factors
i
EU will adopt ambitious targets for reducing carbon emissions
7 Alone, then pairs Students should now be well prepared to write their summary. They should use the notes they have just written and can refer back to the text if necessary. Remind students that they need to check the accuracy of their language, as well as the content. When they have finished, students exchange their summaries and check each other’s answers.
TOP TIP
The Top Tip reminds students that summary questions usually direct students to a specific part or parts of a text to summarise.
Unit 17: The environment
G Speaking 1 Small groups, then whole class This activity asks students to discuss the topic of water in some detail, and questions a–f are designed to support them through the discussion. Briefly run through the questions, helping with any difficult vocabulary and making sure students know what they have to do at each
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 17.
Exam focus Reading and Writing, Exercise 3, note-making and Exercise 4, summary writing 1 Sample answer i Core Results of hyponatraemia •
apathy and lethargy
•
dizziness and mental confusion
•
lapse into coma and die
Advice about drinking water •
cut back how much water you drink
•
prolonged drinking without ingesting salts
•
drinking excessive water without eating
People at risk •
People who exercise for prolonged time
•
very young or very old
•
heat and humidity increase susceptibility
stage. When they have finished their group discussions (allow plenty of time for this), open up the discussion to the whole class, making sure each group gets a chance to contribute. Your role is to monitor and not to interfere unless students specifically ask for your help. Be ready to provide positive feedback, as well as to comment on any language areas that you feel need attention.
2 Here are two sample summary writing answers from (i) an IGCSE Core student, and (ii) an IGCSE Extended student. Both answers would probably score in the top band for both content and language. i
Core
The report says how extreme weather is becoming normal across Europe. The report has a region-by-region analysis, showing how it affects each country. It explains how the developing world still remains the most vulnerable to climate changes. Europe must play a part in the discussion as the impact of it is already here. The EU released its targets for climate change for 2030 which recommends, a reduction by 45%. Lastly, the report says how important it is for Europe to meet targets as the damage to the planet is going to get worse if no measures are taken. [98 words] ii Extended A study carried out by the Climate Action Network campaign group reveals the effects that climate change is already having on Europe. An analysis of each region in different countries of Europe showed the impact that the warmer weather is having across the continent. Also, not only are climates affected, but many geographical and economic factors as well. Wendel Trio, director of CAN Europe believes that the European Union can create targets in order to reduce the effects of emissions. Furthermore, he thinks we need to focus on helping the climate from within Europe. Europe can be the one to set an example and take on more targets for the reductions of greenhouse gas emissions by 2020. [117 words]
121
Unit 18: Hunger Focus on writing NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Reading and Writing Exercise 6: Students need to demonstrate that they can write a report, a review or an article in response to a short stimulus. This may take the form of pictures and/or short prompts. The question includes information on the purpose, format and audience, as well as the word count and how the marks are allocated. Specifically, students need to show that they can communicate information/ideas/opinions clearly, accurately and effectively (W1), organise ideas into coherent paragraphs using a range of appropriate linking devices (W2), use a range of grammatical structures and vocabulary accurately and effectively (W3), show control of punctuation and spelling (W4) and use appropriate register and style/format for the given purpose and audience (W5).
122
Learning objectives (LOs) Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about whether they agree with what the students say. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Small groups, then whole class Quickly check that students know some chewing gumrelated words and phrases, for example chew, stick, piece/ stick/packet of gum, make a mess, blow bubbles, then put them in small groups to discuss questions a–g. Set a time limit for each question to keep students focused and to avoid time-wasting. Students can compare their ideas during class feedback.
2 Small groups There is some challenging vocabulary in some of these statements, so make sure students understand everything before doing the task.
Differentiated activities
A Watch, listen and talk
Support
1 Whole class, then alone
i
Provide definitions for some of the more challenging vocabulary, such as consumption, ingredients.
ii
Divide the information between students so the amount of information they need to work with is reduced.
Explain that students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about hunger. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) what the speakers think are the main causes of global hunger, and (b) what opinions the students have about global hunger. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a The main causes of global hunger, any three from: funding from developed countries to poorer ones, the country doesn’t have enough natural resources to feed the population, soil erosion, the government is not helping. b
What opinions do they have about global hunger: it’s a serious problem, it’s unfair, we should help people that we see in need, governments should get more involved.
Challenge
i
Remove the dates and numbers from a, b, c, d and f. Then give students the dates and numbers and they decide which one completes the information.
ii
When you allocate students to groups, challenge one student by asking them to teach and guide the others.
3 Small groups, then whole class Students continue in their groups and discuss questions (a–d). Give them the freedom to express themselves – monitor but do not interfere. Make sure
Unit 18: Hunger
you give positive class feedback when the group discussions are over.
me in the studio Dr Maria Bealing, a dental expert. Hello, Dr Bealing. Dr Bealing: Hello, Thomas, and thank you for inviting me.
4 Whole class Ask students if they think chewing gum can be classified as a food, and get their reasons. They may for example say that it is not a food because it does not contain anything healthy, but accept all their reasons without criticism.
5 Whole class, then small groups – Optional The graph shows the daily percentage confectionery intake of teenagers in Asia. Focus on the graph first and check students understand the information it is showing. Students refer to the graph and discuss the points in the task.
6/7 Alone, then pairs Students use the information from the previous section to write a ‘fact file’ about chewing gum. They do not need to include all the information, only facts that they feel are important or particularly interesting. Make sure they do not exceed the 100-word limit (some students may want to write more). When they have finished, students exchange their writing and see if they included the same or different information as others in their class.
TS: Dr Bealing, people have been chewing gum since the ancient Greeks used the bark from mastic trees as a breath freshener. And today, gum is chewed for many more reasons, such as when we feel hungry, or to get a nicotine hit if you’re trying to give up cigarettes. But is chewing a stick of gum actually harmful to the body? DB: Well, the moment a person unwraps a piece of gum and tosses it into their mouth, the brain is alerted that the digestive process is about to begin, and bells start ringing up there! During what’s called the cephalic stage … TS: Sorry, the what? DB: The cephalic stage … c-e-p-h-a-l-i-c … this is when the body anticipates the arrival of food and … TS: Sorry to interrupt again but how does the brain know that food is on its way? DB: Through the senses: we either see the food, in a cupboard or in the supermarket fridge, or smell it in a restaurant, or hear someone chopping it up in the kitchen, or hear a gum wrapper being opened, and so on. TS: OK, I understand.
C Listening 1 Pairs Prepare students for the listening activity by checking that they understand who (a dental expert: Dr Bealing, and Thomas) and what (an interview about chewing gum) they are going to listen to. Before students listen they work in pairs and decide on the meaning of six words and phrases.
Answers bark = the hard outer covering of a tree; mastic = another word for gum; nicotine = poisonous chemical in tobacco; hit = sensation; saliva = liquid produced in the mouth to keep it wet; stave off = stop something from happening; hunger = the feeling when you need to eat; weight gain = increase how much someone weighs; cognitive = connected with thinking; function = the purpose of something
2 Alone, then pairs Students listen and answer questions a and b then check with their partner.
CD2, Track 9 Thomas Sampson: Welcome to our weekly programme on health issues for young people. Today I have with
DB: And then the brain releases saliva to help us chew whatever is coming. TS: That’s why we use the expression ‘mouth-watering’? It means that our saliva, the juices in our mouth, is ready to receive food? DB: Exactly. And this gets our stomach juices excited too. But because no real substance is ever delivered, some people argue that gum chewing tricks the brain, which upsets the stomach. TS: I’ve heard that people can lose weight through gumchewing. Is that correct? DB: Scientific studies haven’t successfully proven that gum can stave off hunger and lead to weight loss. Chewing gum jump-starts the digestive process and so it may, in fact, increase hunger, and this may, in turn, lead to weight gain. TS: So are there any benefits in gum chewing? DB: Well, researchers have found a benefit. Recent studies have shown that chewing gum during a task can increase cognitive function. In other words, chewing while doing can help some people concentrate. TS: I must admit that I’m a bit of a gum-chewer, so should I stop, or can I carry on?
123
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
DB: My advice, if you really want to chew, is to try sugarless gum, but only after a meal. The saliva it helps to produce will clean your teeth and the minty or fruity flavour of the gum will sweeten your breath and possibly satisfy a sweet tooth. TS: Thank you Doctor, that sounds very sensible to me!
Answer (b) if you really want to chew, try sugarless gum, but only after a meal
3/4 Alone, then pairs Go through the notes with your students, checking that they understand everything and reminding them that they can only write one or two words in each gap. Some students may be able to remember some information from the first listening. Students listen and complete the notes, then work with a partner to check their answers. They can refer to the audioscript in Appendix 3.
Answers • Ancient Greeks chewed bark as breath freshener •
Someone trying to give up smoking may need a nicotine hit
•
Chewing gum alerts the brain that digestive process is starting
•
In cephalic stage brain alerts body to arrival of food
•
Brain uses senses to see, smell or hear food
•
Saliva released to prepare mouth for chewing and stomach juices also prepare to receive food
•
No proof that gum-chewing help to lose weight
•
One benefit: chewing can increase cognitive function, the ability to concentrate during a task
124
2 Pairs Students look at the introductory paragraph and match the underlined words with the correct definition (a–g).
Answers Biotechnology e / Dynamic b / innovative f / crop a / alleviating c / invent g / starvation d
3 Alone, then pairs Student work alone to complete the gaps in the table and then share their answers.
Answers Noun
alleviation
Verb
alleviate
Adjective
Alleviated/alleviating
innovation/innovator innovate
innovative
Invention/inventor
invent
inventive
starvation
starve
starving
4 Whole class, then pairs Check that students understand the underlying idea in the question, i.e. that it might be possible to invent something (a machine?) which could produce enough food so that starvation would no longer be a problem. Then in pairs students discuss this and give their reasons in feedback.
5 Pairs Students look at the eight ideas and discuss which six they think will appear in the text. When they are ready, give them the answers because in the next exercise they need to complete the gaps in the text using the six correct ideas.
Answers d and f do not appear in the text
5 Whole class Ask students to refer back to question B1c: Do you think chewing gum is good for you? Why/not? Has their opinion changed in any way, and why?
6 Alone then pairs
D Reading
Answers Paragraph 1 g, 2 b, 3 a, 4 h, 5 e, 6 c
1 Pairs, then whole class In the listening text students heard Dr Bealing say that ‘scientific studies haven’t successfully proven that gum can stave off hunger’. Now students talk about what they do when they feel hungry. Give them a couple of minutes to discuss and then do whole class feedback to find out what everyone does.
Students quickly read the text and complete the gaps in each paragraph using the ideas from D5.
7 Pairs or groups of three Now students need to read the text in more detail to answer the questions about the content of each of the six paragraphs. Put students into pairs or groups of three and allocate three/two sets of questions to each student
Unit 18: Hunger
to answer. When they have found the answers, they can discuss and share these with each other.
Answers Paragraph [1] i
get=obtain,
ii
production=creation,
iii
eat=consume,
iv
world=global
1 Pairs, then whole class Students read the exam-style question carefully and decide exactly what they have to do. Make sure they are aware that they do not have to use the ideas given, and they should include some of their own ideas (as long as they stick to the topic). When students have discussed questions (a–c), do class feedback to check that everyone understands how to approach this type of writing question.
2 Pairs
Paragraph [2] Noun
Verb
Adjective
population
populate
populated
revolution
revolt
revolutionary
introduction
introduce
introductory
irrigation
irrigate
irrigated
billion
X
X
Paragraph [3] i
assumed=thought,
ii
conquered=beaten,
iii
aid=help,
iv
spike=peak
Paragraph [4] Various possible answers Paragraph [5] Various possible answers Paragraph [6] i
in helping to produce vast quantities of biotech seeds in thirty countries during the past twenty years
ii
1 less fuel needed, 2 level of soil pollution
E Writing
Students look at the choices given for introductory sentences, then decide which they think are the most and least effective, and why. Suggested answer b is probably the most effective introduction as it restates information from the question
3 Whole class, then alone Students now think of at least two ideas to follow on from the introductory sentence: The visit to the biotechnology laboratory provided us with an enormous amount of information about scientific food production. Do this orally first with the whole class to help them generate some ideas, and encourage them to use their notes and ideas from previous activities. Then students do their writing – there are many possible answers. Possible answer The visit to the biotechnology laboratory provided us with an enormous amount of information about scientific food production. Before the visit I did not like the idea of science producing food for us to eat, but now I’ve learned so much and I understand that science is the only solution to produce more food. [54 words]
TOP TIP
The Top Tip reminds students that an introduction should be brief and to the point, but at the same time capturing the reader’s attention.
TOP TIP
The Top Tip refers to opinion-writing questions and shows students that they will usually be given some prompts – either as pictures or a list of ideas – as a way of helping them.
4 Pairs Students look at the choices given for concluding sentences, then decide which they think are the most and least effective, and why.
125
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Suggested answer a is probably the most effective conclusion as it clearly states the writer’s opinion.
5 Whole class, then alone Students now think of at least two ideas to follow on from the concluding sentence: In conclusion, and taking into consideration all the different arguments, my firm belief is that we should thank science. Do this orally first with the whole class to help them generate some ideas, and encourage them to use their notes and ideas from previous activities. Then students do their writing – there are many possible answers. Possible answer In conclusion, and taking into consideration all the different arguments, my firm belief is that we should thank science. Without it, the problem of starvation would be much bigger than it currently is, and we would not be in a position to solve the problem. [45 words]
F Reading and speaking 1 Pairs, then whole class Students work together to discuss questions (a–d). You could ask them to write notes and discuss their ideas with other students during class feedback.
2 Whole class, then pairs Quickly go through the list of food types, checking that students understand what each one is. Then, with a partner, students answer questions a and b. You can check their answers during class feedback.
3 Whole class, then pairs There are six phrases from the text, which students need to match with three of the food types in Activity F2 (two phrases for each food type). Read through each phrase, checking for understanding, and then students in pairs discuss which phrase goes with which food type, giving their reasons. Do not give students any answers as they will find out in the next activity.
TOP TIP 126
Remind students that it is an effective technique to restate their opinion in the conclusion.
6 Pairs Working in pairs, students read their partner’s two paragraphs and give each other feedback.
7 Alone Now students need to complete the main part of their article. This is often referred to as the ‘body’. Check with students about how many paragraphs they need to write. While there is no set number, they will probably need to write two or three more paragraphs, making four or five in total (including the introduction and conclusion).
LANGUAGE TIP
Remind students to use sequence/discourse markers in their writing, as this will make it feel more natural and fluent.
4 Alone, then whole class Students work on their own and read the text in order to complete the gaps using the phrases from Activity F3. They will also be able to check their answers to the previous activity. When students are ready, let them work with a partner to check their answers.
Answers F3 a and c = sugar, d and f = fast food, b and e = rice F4: i c, ii a, iii d, iv f, v b, vi e
5 Groups of three Each student in a group chooses one of the three food types they have just been reading about: sugar, fast food and rice. They should research their chosen food type, using different reference sources. In the final part of the activity, they report back to the group and when all three group members have reported back, the group decides who found out the most interesting facts. You could then extend this to the whole class, if time permits.
8 Whole class Let students read as many as possible of their friends’ articles, as they can learn a lot from each other. Do not focus on the ‘best’ piece of writing, as this can demotivate students who need more support in writing.
6 Whole class Round off the section with a whole class discussion, prompting students with the questions in F6.
Unit 18: Hunger
G Language focus: Word building 1 Pairs Get students to produce a table, similar to the ones they have already seen in this unit, giving the different parts of speech for the–ion words. Then they share with their partner and check each other’s answers.
Challenge
i
Remove the part of speech information at the end of each line;
ii
When students have written their answers for 3(ii), ask them to choose four of their words from 3(i) and write sentences which include the words.
3 Alone, then pairs
Answers Noun
Verb
Adjective
exploitation (thing)
exploit
exploited
realisation
realise
X
creation (thing)
create
creative
exploiter (person)
H Writing
creator (person)
1/2 Alone, then pairs
2a Alone, then pairs Students work alone on task 2, and then check with their partner.
Possible answers growth = noun, grow = verb / requirement = noun, require = verb, required = adjective / ill = adjective, illness = noun / negation = noun, negate = verb, negative = adjective, negatively = adverb / plentiful = adjective, plentifully = adverb / wasteful = adjective, wastefully = adverb, waste = verb / entirety = noun, entire = adjective, entirely = adverb
2b Alone For task 2b, students complete the gaps in sentences (i–viii) using words from the previous activity. Point out that the required part of speech is given in brackets at the end of each line.
Answers a grow, b plentiful, c excess, d negative,
Students work alone to write their own sentences, using the words given (a–e). For each word they should write two sentences, with the second sentence using a different form (part of speech) of the word. To support students, reduce the number of sentences they need to write.
e
waste,
f
illness,
g h
Give students some time to read the exam-style question carefully and to think about the important instructions that they must follow, for example word length, report style, try to include own ideas. This question asks students to write a report, whereas the previous one asked for an article.
3 Whole class Talk through the information with your students, making it clear that there is not one particular type of report style that students have to learn and use. However, as it says in the Coursebook, there are some general sections that should be included in all reports. Ask students to think about the general sections with you, but they do not need to write anything yet. Possible answers i A suitable title might be: How food products affects the environment. ii
The purpose of this report is to show how food production impacts on the environment.
entire,
iii
Probably three, for each of the prompts in the question.
requires
iv
Reasons for carrying out the research, The most interesting information, Further action.
Differentiated activities Support
4/5/6 Alone
i
Instead of students doing 2a, supply them with the answers and they can use these in order to complete 2b;
ii
Inform students which word to use in each gap (i–viii), and then they change it to the correct part of speech.
Now students work alone and follow the guidance for writing their answer to the question. They should use the ideas they discussed with you in the previous activity as much as possible.
127
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
7 Alone Advise students to count how many words they have written so far, and to calculate how many more they need to write. Remind them that the word limits are Core 100–150 and Extended 150–200.
8 Whole class, then alone Give students some useful words and phrases to use in a conclusion: in fact, in conclusion, for these reasons, as a
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 18.
Exam focus 128
Writing, Exercise 6 i
Core
Scientific research now plays an important role in making sure that humanity has enough food to eat and that many of the crops that are now grown worldwide are resistant to many diseases, creating more produce at a cheaper price. Lower costs and more food seem like a great idea but many scientists still debate about whether or not food that has been scientifically researched and genetically modified is safe to eat. I personally understand the importance of scientific research and how science can help many people worldwide but I do not feel safe consuming such products. I believe science should not meddle with nature. I do not think that science has yet reached a level where it can compete with nature.
result of, to sum up, overall, ultimately, consequently. Then they work alone to write their concluding paragraph, basing it on the content of what they have written in the earlier paragraphs.
TOP TIP
The Top Tip stresses the importance of good planning as the basis for an effective answer to a writing question.
Scientific research does help humanity with its research into disease and sickness but I would rather it stayed away from food that humans consume. [146 words] ii Extended We live in a world of excess, where everything has to be bigger, more attractive and exist in large quantities. In developed countries, food is one of the main things that we have in excess, and scientific research is one of the main causes for this. Due to this, I believe that scientific research needs to take a step back from the food industry. It has come to the point, that we have so much food, a huge percentage of it goes to waste and is thrown away. Moreover, this excessiveness in food has led to people being able to buy food whenever and from wherever they want, something that in recent years has led to a rise in obesity. Furthermore, as the food industry tries to keep up with the high demand for products, they are finding new and unnatural ways to make fruits, vegetables, grains, etc. grow faster. Chemicals are injected into the produce to make it bigger and more attractive. For the above reasons, I believe we must control scientific research in the food industry and reduce the amount of food that is produced, in order to avoid further problems. [193 words]
Unit 19: Fashions Focus on listening: Questions 1–8 NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Listening: Students need to demonstrate that they can identify and select relevant information (L1), understand ideas, opinions and attitudes (L2), show understanding of the connections between ideas, opinions and attitudes (L3) and understand what is implied but not directly stated, e.g. gist, speaker’s purpose, intention and feelings (L4).
much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1/2 Pairs, then small groups
Learning objectives (LOs) Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about fashions. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) what the speakers think fashion means, and (b) if the speakers believe that fashion affects them in a positive or negative way, and their examples and reasons. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a What does ‘fashion’ mean: trends, following celebrities, it’s individual to a person. b
How fashion affect the students in a positive or negative way: It doesn’t, because fashion is just about shoes. What examples and reasons do they give: the students have their own style that they’re comfortable with; as long as you like [what you wear], it doesn’t matter what other people think or what is costs.
Activities A1 and A2 provide prompts for students to discuss various aspects of fashion. As this is the penultimate unit in the Coursebook, students should be in a strong position for their speaking assessment, with the language skills and vocabulary to carry out this discussion with confidence. In the first activity, students work in pairs, using the four pictures and four statements to give them some initial ideas. For the second activity, change the interaction and put students into small groups. Obviously there are no right or wrong answers, and students should have the freedom to express their ideas without interruption. Monitor but do not interfere. Give support if necessary and offer positive feedback at the end.
129
Differentiated activities Support
Reduce the number of questions that students need to answer and/or remove the need for them to provide reasons for every answer that they give. Challenge
Tell students to prepare an oral summary of their discussions, which they can present to the rest of the class.
C Reading 1 Whole class, then pairs Firstly, check what students think the phrases fast fashion and ethical fashion in the headline mean. Then in pairs they predict three things that they think they might find in the text, giving their reasons.
2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then talk to each other about what fashion means to them and what they consider fashionable. Do not interfere too
2 Groups of three A/B/C Put students into groups of three for this activity, with student A in each group looking at phrases a–c, student B 129
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
looking at phrases d–f, and student C looking at phrases g–i. As an alternative, you could have all the As working together, all the Bs and all the Cs, so that they can support each other while checking the meanings of their three phrases. Students can use different reference sources for help, and you can provide some vocabulary support if necessary. Students may recognise certain words, but in these particular phrases the words may have a different meaning, or some words may just be unfamiliar. For example: a crop = group of people or things with something in common, b rich = containing a lot of something good or useful, f tapping into = getting or making use of something, h drawn = caused a reaction, i weave = to make cloth, looms = equipment for making cloth. If you decided to put all the As together in one group (and the Bs and Cs in their own groups), once they have checked the meaning of their phrases, they can go back to their original A/B/C groups to share their answers.
3 Alone, then groups of three A/B/C
130
Students quickly read the first two paragraphs and do three things (a–c) on their own. Then they discuss their answers in their group of three.
Answers C 1 Made in Vietnam, 2 Tradition, tradition
4 Groups of three A/B/C Still working in their groups, students look at the phrases in the box and speculate about which ones they think they will read in the rest of the article, giving their reasons. You could turn this into a ‘word auction’, asking groups of students to ‘bid’ for particular phrases, using a points system. Allocate 100 points, or IGCSE dollars, or paper clips, to each group, and then then ask students to ‘bid’ for any words or phrases in the box that they want. The highest bidding group ‘wins’ that particular phrase, and points (or IGCSE dollars or paper clips) are deducted from their total. You will need to preteach relevant vocabulary, for example: bid, bidder, auction, auctioneer. You do not need to reveal which phrases appear in the text yet, as students will find out in C6.
5 Alone, then pairs Students now work alone and look at the words and phrases in either column A or B, using reference sources to find out what they mean. Then they share their answers.
6 Alone Students read the text and check their answers, and find out if they bid for the correct phrases in C4.
Answers C4 All the phrases appear in the text, apart from: London and Paris, and teaching traditional woodworkers
WORD TIP
These two words may seem interchangeable, but global is an adjective, whereas world is a noun. Refer students to the exercise in the Workbook.
7 Alone, then pairs Refer students back to the list of possible paragraph headings in C3 to choose suitable headings for paragraphs 3–5.
Answers 3 It’s all about colour, 4 Natural is best, 5 Changing skills
8 Alone, then pairs For the final activity in this section, students read the text in detail to find and write answers to questions (a–j), and then share with a partner.
Answers a save the country’s rich ethnic heritage b (i) maximise benefit to communities, (ii) minimise environmental harm. c learns techniques from them d hand looms e fashion capitals (like Berlin and New York) f they were shocked g they are made with natural dyes and textiles h money i helping them to market their skills j Various answers possible: financial knowledge, managing people, marketing, etc.
Unit 19: Fashions
6 Alone TOP TIP
Questions which require students to identify people’s feelings and attitudes, or to ‘read between the lines’ (to infer), can be quite challenging for some students. Question C8j is an example of where the answer is not actually in the text.
Now students listen and answer the exam-style question. They can then check with a partner and refer to the audioscript in Appendix 3 for anything they are not sure about.
Answers 1A, 2F, 3E, 4C, 5B, 6D CD2, Track 10 Speaker 1 male teenager
D Speaking and listening 1 Pairs Students look at phrases a–h and speculate about which ones might appear in a discussion about fashion. Make sure they offer reasons for their decisions.
2 Pairs Now students try to match the six pictures with the words and phrases from Activity D1. It does not matter if they are not sure, and there are no right or wrong answers, but encourage them to speculate and give reasons for their ideas.
3 Pairs Once again, students need to speculate about which person from Activity D2 may have said each of the six comments. Giving logical, supporting reasons is far more important than anything else in this activity. Point out that there is one extra comment which students do not need to use (G).
I’ve never been a really big fan of current fashion trends. Money of course is an obstacle for someone like me, so even if I want to be fashionable, I can’t necessarily pay the prices that are demanded. So I think we should just wear what we feel happy in, and not worry so much about having all the latest gear. In any case, something fashionable today is out of fashion tomorrow, and clothes from the past often become popular again. Who can keep up with it? Speaker 2 female young adult For me the word fashion is a nightmare word! It makes me think of so many negative things. The way fashion controls people’s lives is awful, and of course nowadays fashion is not just about clothes, but about the latest Ferrari or Lamborghini and watches and restaurants and even pets and the latest pair of trainers! People who only care about how much something costs, and how good they look, rather than anything else in life, are not in my circle of friends. Speaker 3 male young adult
4 A/B pairs Students work in A/B pairs. Firstly, each student chooses three different people from the six in the previous activities, and then on their own writes down two words or phrases that they believe each person might think or say. This will give a total of six words or phrases. Then, in 4b, students A/B take it in turns to read out their words and phrases for each person, with the other student guessing and giving reasons.
I don’t understand all the negativity about trying to be fashionable. What’s wrong with wanting to look and feel and smell great? Of course you need money, but tell me something that doesn’t need money in today’s world. I’m still studying right now and don’t have a job yet and not much money, so I’m not in a position to buy the latest sunglasses and all the other things that I want. But as soon as I get my first wages after a couple of years, I’m going straight to the shopping mall!
5 Pairs
Speaker 4 female adult
Students need to read the exam-style question carefully and then answer the questions (a–g) with their partner.
Something I learned at art college was that fashion is an incredibly complex subject, which is very difficult to define and really understand. Of course fashion has different meanings for different people, but fashion ultimately is a joining of not just art but also building design and engineering and even in many cases science and having an understanding of how the world works. Now in my job
Answers a six,
d
in the box,
b
fashion,
e
once,
c
seven,
f
nothing,
g
six
131
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
I’m seeing that anything can be fashionable: it depends on how people view whatever it might be.
4 Alone Students listen to the talk and check their answers.
Speaker 5 male young adult Fashion is not an option for me, it’s an absolute must, and being ‘in’ is probably the most important thing that I think about every day. I don’t care about the cost – I will find a way to buy whatever it is that I need in order to look my best. Cars and watches and trendy restaurants and furniture do nothing for me, but clothes and hair styles are the things that drive me every day. Work is great, but how I look and feel come first. Speaker 6 female adult Personally I have no interest whatsoever in fashion and alternative styles of clothes and so on. But my kids do and their demands can be very difficult to deal with, from the financial side. It’s so difficult to say no when children ask for something that all their friends have or are wearing. Obviously there has to be a limit, but big businesses and advertisers are incredibly clever at making people and especially children feel inferior if we don’t have something that others do. 132
E Listening 1 Pairs Working with a partner, students discuss questions 1a–c. If necessary, for 1a, prompt them with some pictures of people wearing uniforms, or refer them back to the pictures of people in Unit 7 Jobs to give them some ideas. For 1b and c, encourage students to discuss freely as there are no right or wrong answers.
2 Pairs, then whole class Either have all the pairs working on all the words and phrases, or distribute them randomly to different pairs. Students can use different reference sources for help. As students will need all the words and phrases for E3, make sure that you do whole class feedback so that everyone understands everything.
3 Alone, then pairs Now students complete the phrases (a–h) from the talk they are going to hear using the vocabulary from E2. Then before they listen in E4, let them share and compare their answers. There is no need to confirm anything yet, as in the next activity they are going to listen to the talk about school uniforms.
Answers i an atmosphere of pride, loyalty and equality, ii distractions, iii sweeping the nation, iv erase their individuality, v the latest peer-pleasing designs, vi merchandise, vii avoid ridicule, embarrassment or abuse, viii confrontation, ix mandatory CD2, Track 11 The introduction of school uniforms in state schools is not a new subject. Schools have a long history of using school uniforms to create an atmosphere of pride, loyalty and equality among the student population. There has always been an image of professionalism associated with having students wear a uniform. It provides for a more businesslike approach to learning, removing some of the distractions normally encountered when children feel they should possess the latest designer fashions, or follow the latest trend sweeping the nation at any given time. School uniforms also tend to involve students more and make them part of a ‘team’ at the school. This is not so as to erase their individuality, but to include everyone on the same level, as far as image and dress are concerned. Another important factor in the use of school uniforms has been cost. With fashions constantly changing from year to year, and even from season to season, parents have always felt the pressure from their children to provide them with the latest peer-pleasing designs. Uniforms reduce the cost of keeping up, since they remain the same – day after day, year after year. And their cost, in relation to fashion merchandise, is very appealing over the long term. Wearing a uniform at school, as opposed to wearing the latest fashions, may also help the child avoid ridicule, embarrassment or abuse from others that can be caused when the ‘have-nots’ are compared with the ‘haves’. Uniforms assist in avoiding such conflicts by removing the chance for confrontation over clothing, at least during the child’s time at school. The debate will continue. But more and more people in education – students, parents, teachers and administrators – are convinced that mandatory school
Unit 19: Fashions
uniforms lead to success. They point out that pupils in private schools, who achieve impressive academic results, have traditionally worn uniforms. As a result, most state schools have also adopted a school-uniform policy – and the trend seems set to continue.
5 Alone, then pairs Students listen again and make a list of the reasons given to support wearing a school uniform. For example: to create an atmosphere of pride, loyalty and equality among the student population. After the second listening, give students some time to check their answers with a partner, and to refer to the audioscript in Appendix 3.
Answers image of professionalism, more businesslike approach to learning, removing some of the distractions normally encountered when children feel they should possess the latest designer fashions, tend to involve students more, make them part of a ‘team’ at the school, include everyone on the same level, uniforms reduce the cost of keeping up with fashions, wearing a uniform at school may also help the child avoid ridicule, embarrassment or abuse, uniforms assist by removing the chance for confrontation over clothing, private schools, who achieve impressive academic results, have traditionally worn uniforms.
6/7 Alone, then pairs Before students listen, go through the task with them, highlighting that they can only write one or two words in each gap. Get students to give their ideas orally, and then play the audio. They can share with a partner and look at the audioscript in Appendix 3 to check their answers.
Answers Discussion about school uniforms: ‘Uniform’ means the same so nobody worries about their appearance. Giving students guidelines would be better than forcing them to wear uniforms. Problem for teachers checking what is acceptable and what isn’t. Bullying, fights and confrontation may occur over fashion clothes. Being in uniform makes people part of school community and increases pride in school and badge. School uniforms can improve academic results.
CD2, Track 12 Jan (teenage male): I don’t have a problem wearing school uniform. At least when I get home I can take it off and change into something more comfortable. Cheryl (teenage female): Fair enough, but don’t you think we look like penguins at school, everyone wearing the same clothes? J: But that’s the whole point, isn’t it? ‘Uniform’ means the same, so at school there is no difference between us. Don’t you know anyone whose parents can’t afford to dress them in fashionable clothes at school? With school uniform, nobody has to worry if they look different. C: But why should we be forced into wearing clothes that we don’t like? Why don’t they just give us some guidelines about what we can and can’t wear? Wouldn’t that be better? For example, no jeans, or everyone has to wear a white shirt or blouse? J: Come on! You know as well as I do that everyone would soon find a way round the guidelines, and the teachers would find it impossible to know what is acceptable and what isn’t. C: Yes, I suppose you’re right. On the other hand, if they treat us like penguins then they shouldn’t be surprised if we behave like one! I think we’re old enough to know what is acceptable and what isn’t, in terms of school clothes. J: Maybe, but that brings me back to my original point. What about those kids who are just going to show off in their new fashions, and the kids who can’t really keep up? You know it will happen. Then we may get bullying and kids laughing at each other just because of their clothes. C: Well, we certainly don’t want any fights or confrontation over something like our clothes. Maybe the school should allow us all to vote and make a decision? J: No way would we agree to wearing a uniform! But I would certainly vote for it. In any case, it makes me feel part of the school community, and I’m actually very proud of my school and my badge. Aren’t you? C: I guess so, but not wearing a uniform doesn’t make me less proud than you, does it? J: No, but we should feel proud to show off which school we go to, and one way to do that is by wearing a uniform. And another thing I’ve heard … C: What’s that?
133
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
J:
C:
Well, in schools where students have to wear a uniform, there’s evidence that they achieve better academic standards! Well, in that case …
F Language development: position of adjectives 1 Whole class Look at the two example sentences and talk through questions (a–c) with the class.
Answers a different, hand-spun; b hand-spun cotton; c they look different Point out that adjectives usually appear before a noun, and in some cases after certain verbs: be, seem, look, become, appear, sound, taste, feel, get. Ask students what happens in their own language, and in any other languages they know. 134
2 Whole class, then alone Go through the instructions with your students, checking that they understand what they need to do, and do the first part of the task (identifying the adjective in each phrase) together.
Answers (adjectives underlined) a
fermented indigo leaves
b
contemporary touch
c
traditional wooden houses
d
complex subject
e
alternative styles of clothes
f
business-like approach
g
mandatory school uniforms
h
fashionable clothes
Possible answers for sentences a The indigo-coloured leaves had been fermented b Her touch appeared contemporary c The houses were made in a traditional wooden style d The subject is getting complex e The styles of clothing appear more alternative f Their approach has become more business–like g The wearing of school uniforms is mandatory h Those clothes look very fashionable
G Speaking 1 Small groups For this final activity, students discuss the question prompts (a–g) in small groups. To keep students on task, give a short time limit for each question. You might also think about allocating questions (a–e) to different groups of students. All the questions could also be used very effectively in a debate activity. As with all speaking activities, allow your students to speak freely and without interference from you, but always provide feedback at the end.
Unit 19: Fashions
Reflection Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 19.
Exam focus Listening, Exercise 1, short extracts Question 1 CD2, Track 13 V1 Good morning. May I help you? V2 Yes, please. I need to buy this book for history at college. V1 Do you want the book with or without the answer key? V2 Well, the version without the answer key, please, as I think it’ll be cheaper? V1 Yes, it is cheaper. And we’ll give you a free promotional history magazine with it as well. V2 Ah, okay thank you … and since we weren’t told about the book with the answer key, I definitely won’t take it, thank you. Question 2 V1 Excuse me! I’m trying to find my way to the restaurant. Which floor is it on? V2 Actually there are two in this store. It depends if you want to just have a coffee or sit and have a meal? V1 Hmmm, I’m not sure. Maybe I should look for my friend in both. V2 Well then, you need to go to the third floor if you arranged to eat a meal or on the ground floor for the café. The escalator is there on your left and you should find both of them without any problem. Question 3 V1 Do you keep going to the same old places for coffee with your friends? Are you bored of the same old faces, the same old flavours of coffee? Yes? Then why not try ‘Coffee Cup’, a new place to go, with fresh new coffee flavours and a large outdoor seating area where you can relax with friends? Try our new promotional coffees with coffee beans from as far away as Jamaica and Cuba! The coffee beans are specially selected for you, because we know what you like best!
Question 4 Ok children, listen to the schedule for today because we don’t want any of you getting lost or being late like last time. The bus will be here in about 60 minutes to take us to the sports centre. When we get there you can choose your programme: either activities in the swimming pool or in the gym. But remember you’re not allowed to play on the outdoor playing fields. We’ll have about four hours at the gym with a break mid-way when we can go to the café for something to eat and drink. The bus to go back will be here at about two o’clock, just in time for your parents to meet you at school.
Answers 1a history b (i) version without the answer key, (ii) free promotional history magazine 2a friend b third floor and ground floor 3a fresh new flavours b outdoor seating area 4a sports centre b play on outdoor playing fields
Listening, Exercise 2, note-making Question 5
CD2, Track 14 Good morning everyone. Today we’re going to talk about one of my favourite topics: cats, or at least the domesticated cat, which is the one many of us have living in our homes and gardens. We now know that the domesticated cat has been a part of human lives for about 12 000 years. Archeologists found the skeleton of a cat on the eastern Mediterranean island of Cyprus in an area that is now named the Near East, but was formerly known as Mesopotamia. This particular cat had been deliberately buried alongside a human, most probably its owner, and would suggest that a special bond had existed between the human and the animal, many thousands of years ago. Studies have shown that the domesticated cat descended from the African wildcat, and it shares its ancestry with lions and tigers from about 10–15 million years ago. These
135
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
large cats in their turn have their ancestors from the region around west Asia. Domesticated cats became an important addition to society when humans began to settle down, around 10 000 years ago, when more permanent living settlements were built. Because humans were not moving around so much, searching for food, crops like wheat and barley needed to be stored, and where there are crops, there are mice. So the cat became more of a friend when humans realised how the cat could control the mice which were eating the crops. The cat gradually became invaluable domestically due to its hunting skills, and since it was now living in close proximity with humans, it started adapting its characteristics to its new environment. It started to fit in: living with and appealing to humans, and so the process of domestication began.
136
One country where the cat has played a dominant role and where initially it was thought they originated from, is Egypt. But the domestic cat has actually only been part of Egyptian culture and tradition for the past 4,000 years or so. Egyptian culture was famous for its admiration of the cat through various humans during history commonly portrayed as a cat, or a woman with a cat’s head. The word ‘cat’ itself comes originally from a North African word ‘quattah’. This word was then adapted by most European countries in various different forms such as ‘katze’ in German, ‘gatto’ in Spanish and of course ‘cat’ in English. Today, not surprisingly, the cat is the most popular pet in the world for both men and women. Studies have shown that neither gender has a greater preference for cats. In the United States alone there are about 90 million domesticated cats and that accounts for 34 percent of Americans having a pet cat lying around somewhere in their home. The worldwide population of cats exceeds 500 million although unfortunately not all of them live the comfortable life of a pet. However, the cat has made a place for itself in our hearts.
Answers a Talk about cats and how they became part of our lives. First domesticated cat found by archeologists about 12 000 years ago. Lived on Mediterranean island of Cyprus. [1] b Cat buried next to its owner in an area now known as the Near East although formerly named Mesopotamia. [1/2 + ½]
c
Studies show domesticated cats descended from African wildcat. Ancestors were lions and tigers from about 10–15 million years ago. Originally from west Asia. [1/2 + ½]
d
Domesticated cats settled down, around 10 000 years ago, when humans built permanent settlements, storing crops, for example: wheat and barley. [1/2 + ½]
e
Mice attracted to these crops, so cats became important friends to humans. [1/2 + ½]
f
Domestic cat only in Egyptian culture and tradition for around 4,000 years. The word ‘cat’ originally from North African word ‘quattah’. Adapted by European countries, so ‘katze’ in German, ‘gatto’ in Spanish and ‘cat’ in English. [1/2 + ½]
g
Cat most popular pet in world with men and women. In the United States about 90 million domesticated cats and the worldwide population is more than 500 million. [1/2 + ½]
h
Not all cats have comfortable lives as pets. [1]
Listening, Exercise 4, multiple-choice questions Question 1
Answers a A, b B, c A d C
e
B
f
A
g
B
h
C
CD2, Track 15 Alfonso Fiore: Today I have the great honour of speaking to writer and fashion expert, Valentina Santini, winner of three World Fashion awards so far. Valentina has four homes, but we are meeting in her home in Florence, the only one located in Europe, to find out what the word fashion means to her. Is it just the shoes and clothes that we see in magazines, or is it something else, something difficult to define? Judging by the look of your home Valentina, you most definitely have an eye for everything that is tasteful and fashionable. It’s a real pleasure to meet you! Valentina Santini: The pleasure is all mine. I’m a great fan of your magazine, and of course of your writing. AF: Thank you! To begin with, can you explain to us what fashion actually means?
Unit 19: Fashions
VS: Well, as someone once said: ‘Fashion fades, only style remains the same’. I think the most important thing to remember when talking about fashion, whether you’re referring to clothes, furniture, accessories or even food, is that it is constantly evolving and changing, just like the sea. This is how it differs to style, which is more personal, individual, more like a pond which doesn’t move. AF: So, when we use the word fashion, we don’t just mean the clothes that start off on the runways of fashion houses and which eventually end up in clothes shops? VS: Absolutely not. Of course, the fashion industry, as you yourself know, is massive, and the major sector is indeed the clothing industry. But we mustn’t forget aspects of it such as makeup, hair trends and furniture, which are just as important. AF: I see. Since we’re talking about furniture, would you say that the pieces you currently have in your home are in fashion? VS: As with clothes, there isn’t just one or ten or even one hundred fashion styles for furniture, nor indeed for interior design in general. In fact, there are hundreds, going back thousands of years, and from all over the world. The list is endless! I would say this house is quite fashionable at the moment, and I feel very comfortable in my surroundings. AF: I would expect that from a fashion expert such as yourself. Can you tell me a little about fashion and makeup? VS: Social media is probably one of the main reasons that makeup today is so huge in our society. I mean, if you visit Pinterest, Instagram, YouTube, or any other social medium, you can find thousands of makeup tutorials, methods, makeup trends, and so on. It’s come to the point where if you want to be fashionable, then you need to be able to keep up with this whole online bubble which is the fashion world.
AF: What would you say defines something as fashionable? VS: As I said before, fashion is constantly changing. What makes it change are the great fashion houses whose job it is to design new and wonderful items. The reason that high-end fashion brands are the inspiration for the fashion world is not just because of the quality they offer and their celebrity status, but it’s also because they are constantly raising the stakes. They are creating items that change every season, they create fashion, and everyone else just follows: celebrities, music and film stars. Everyone. For something to be considered ‘fashionable’ in today’s society, it needs to follow the guidelines exhibited by these fashion houses. AF: Do you agree with this? If that’s the case, then we would be buying new furniture every few months just so we can consider ourselves to be in fashion. VS: Perhaps that’s a little extreme, but I have met people who do this. It’s a vicious circle, I won’t deny it, but it isn’t all bad. In fact, I know for certain that the shirt you are currently wearing is from a very high-end and expensive fashion house! AF: Guilty as charged! VS: It’s not a crime to love fashion, whether that love is for a pair of trainers or a designer sofa or a fast car. The best thing to remember is that if you love fashion, let it guide you, but not control you. A truly fashionconscious person knows that you take fashion and you make it your own. In that way, it is you who defines fashion, and you don’t let yourself be defined by it. AF: I absolutely agree with you and really, it’s been wonderful speaking to you Valentina; a real eyeopener! Thank you so much for your time! VS: It’s my pleasure.
137
Unit 5 20: Technology Entertainment Focus on speaking: topic cards Y
NOTE on Assessment Objectives (AOs) for Speaking: In the Cambridge IGCSE speaking examination, students need to communicate ideas/opinions clearly, accurately and effectively (S1), develop responses and link ideas using a range of appropriate linking devices (S2), use a range of grammatical structures and vocabulary accurately and effectively (S3), show control of pronunciation and intonation patterns (S4) and engage in a conversation and contribute effectively to help move the conversation forward (S5).
Learning objectives (LOs) Suggested activity: Start the unit by focusing for a few minutes on the LOs box, making sure that students understand what they are going to be doing. Using the first LO as an example, ask students to identify where in the unit they can find the activities for the other four LOs. Get students to say which of the activities appeal to them the most, and ask them for their reasons.
talk to each other about the technology they would like to see and use in the future. Do not interfere too much, but make sure you get feedback from the class so that they know their efforts have been worthwhile. If time permits, you could write their ideas on the board and rank them according to your students’ preferences.
B Speaking and vocabulary 1 Whole class or small groups If you are able to display the four images on a screen, this first task can be done as a whole class activity, with students calling out their ideas about each of the four technologies. Otherwise, students work in small groups and discuss each of the four pictures in the Coursebook. Whichever approach you use, remember that you want students to speculate and express their ideas, and there are no right or wrong answers.
138
A Watch, listen and talk 1 Whole class, then alone Explain that students are going to watch and listen to some IGCSE students talking about technology. As your students watch and listen, they should make a note of (a) what the speakers say about how technology has changed and developed, and (b) what technology the speakers could never give up, and their reasons. Play the video a second time so that students can check or add to their notes.
Answers a How technology has changed and developed: it has changed quickly, technology has got a lot smaller but more powerful, technology has replaced some people’s jobs. b
What technology could the students never give up: the Internet, mobile phones, medical machines.
Reasons they give: lack of communication, there are no international companies, it would leave the student helpless in an emergency.
2 Small groups Deal with any vocabulary and then students discuss the information (a–h) and decide which piece of information could match each picture in B1, giving their reasons. There are two for each picture. There is no need to supply any answers yet as students will find out for themselves when they read the text.
3 Small groups More speculation is needed for this activity. Students think about the four technologies in more detail and discuss and agree on at least three more words or phrases that they believe might appear in the texts. Encourage them, as always, to supply reasons for their choices.
4 Small groups It may be the case that the questions in this activity have already been answered in previous discussion. If so, you can skip this and move on to B5; if not, students discuss and give reasons.
5 Groups of four 2 Pairs or small groups Depending on the size of your class, put students into pairs or small groups. They can discuss their notes and then
There are four texts, one for each of the four technologies, and each student in the group is going to read one text. Before reading, ask students to decide which of the six
Unit 20: Technology
headings (a–f) could fit each technology. There are two extra headings which they do not need to use.
Answers a The problem solvers [iv] b Hot new tech [X] c Smart kitchen knows what’s in the fridge [iii] d A clean solution to energy needs [ii] e The perfect thing for anyone going at a rate of knots [i] f Oceans on distant planets [X]
C Reading and speaking
c
How is power provided to the trainers? [A] by an internal battery
d
How much power can six megawatts provide? [B] enough energy for six thousand average households for a year
e
What advantage do offshore turbines have over onshore turbines? [B] bigger and produce more energy
f
What help is available for people who do not want to go shopping? [C] an app to help place a supermarket order
g
What information does oven technology give? [C] what is inside the oven and how to cook it
h
What is the NCC compared to? [D] NASA’s Mission Control
i
Where are the turbine components built? [B] France
j
Where can you find ‘connected food’ technology? [C] fridges and ovens
k
Which screen provides information about aircraft positions? [D] the second one
l
Who is most likely to buy the product? [A] athletes
1 Groups of four a
b
Students decide who is going to read each of the four texts, and then go to the correct page to find it. The texts are on different pages so that students only read their own text. Students read their text and find the answers to B2 and B3, without saying anything to their partners in their group.
Answers a every single movement of its fleet [iv] b sharpening their wearer’s concentration [i] c from the supermarket aisle [iii] d a 747 Jumbo jet’s 60m wingspan [ii] e the best possible repair solution [iv] f the future is beyond the horizon [ii] g thousands of recipes [iii] h automatically tightens the shoe [i] Students take it in turns to give feedback to each other about B2 and B3.
2/3 Alone Firstly, students look at the 12 questions (a–l) and select the three which they think they can answer from reading their text. Then they need to re-read their text and write the answers to their three questions. Finally, they should identify at least two things in their text that they find particularly interesting.
Answers a How can someone adjust the settings? [A] Hold down one of the buttons b How can the NCC teams predict a flight’s arrival time? [D] latest radar technology
WORD TIP
These two words, internal and inside, are probably not often confused, but internal may not be a word that students commonly use. Refer them to the exercise in the Workbook.
4 Groups of four Students re-join their original group of four and discuss the answers to their questions, and tell each other what they found interesting in the text. They should do this without referring to the text, to avoid simply reading something for the others to listen to.
5 Groups of four Students decide which of the other three texts they would most like to read, based on what they now know.
D Language focus: Compound subjects 1 Whole class Read through the information with the whole class and ask them to answer questions a–d. If you can put the four sentences on the screen, you will be able to more easily highlight the compound subject and main verb in each one.
139
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Answers a The sporting purpose of the neon blue light on the shoe’s instep is unknown … b … some aerial wind turbines are much smaller … c … the new, brightly-coloured, hands-on appliances with embedded Wifi are too amazing to resist. d NASA’s Mission Control monitors all aspects of its space exploration …
5
2/3 Alone Depending on how challenging students find this, you could skip D3, so that students only need to read one more text of the four in this unit. As they read, they need to find examples of compound subjects with a main verb. In order to assist students, specify that the compound subject must include at least two words (before the main verb). Possible answers STUDENT A: The perfect thing for anyone going at a rate of knots 1 140
2
Self-lacing trainers have arrived, not long after Marty McFly wore a pair in Back to the Future Part II. Nike has unveiled the HyperAdapt 1.0 trainer, featuring an ‘adaptive lacing’ system that automatically tightens the shoe the moment its wearer steps in. The trainers are powered by an internal* battery that lasts for about two weeks between charges. The sporting purpose of the neon blue light on the shoe’s instep is unknown, but it looks a bit like the one from the Nike Mag trainers worn by Marty McFly in the 1989 film. McFly, who was played by Michael J Fox, put on a pair of self-tightening Nike Mag trainers after travelling forward in time.
3
Nike has pitched the trainers squarely at athletes, promising that they would reduce slippage caused by loose laces, thereby sharpening their wearer’s concentration. Senior executives did not dare to suggest that their target market was actually people who could not be bothered to tie up their shoelaces.
4
The self-tightening system is activated when the wearer’s heel hits a sensor inside* the shoe, which instantly measures their weight and foot position. A series of motorised pulleys then pull together a mesh of filaments around the foot, tighter or looser where required. Plus and minus buttons on the side of the shoe allow the wearer to tighten and loosen their fit. Holding down the minus button for more than two seconds fully loosens the shoe so that it can be removed.
A study by scientists has found that we are hard-wired to be lazy, or at least, to conserve energy, as our caveman ancestors had to do. The research found that over time participants strapped into leg braces that caused them to strain would unconsciously adapt their walking gait to the most economic possible. Nike said that the HyperAdapt 1.0 trainers would learn the best fit for their owners’ feet after being worn two or three times. After a while they would gather biometric data that would be relayed to other “smart” clothing and wearable technology.
*See Word Tip in Section C [Adapted from: http://www.thetimes.co.uk/tto/ technology/article4715973.ece?shareToken=3595c3268d6e 9848eed6f90193938fe6 21/03/16] STUDENT B: A clean solution to energy needs 1
The future is definitely beyond the horizon, with massive wind turbines out at sea and even airborne wind turbines above the clouds providing a clean solution to the world’s energy needs. While Europe has always been at the forefront of wind energy technology, the United States has finally joined the party.
2
Deep-water turbines are extremely large, and each one alone can generate six megawatts of power – that’s enough energy for six thousand average households for a year. Their height is twice as high as the Statue of Liberty, with a diameter that doubles the size of a 747 Jumbo jet’s 60m wingspan. On the other hand, some aerial wind turbines are much smaller, with a diameter of around 12 metres.
3
The clean energy company Deepwater Wind is building a wind farm of fifteen mega turbines to the south of Rhode Island in the state of New England, USA. Eventually, there could be as many as 200 such turbines, providing a significant proportion of southern New England’s electricity needs. The turbine parts are manufactured in France and assembled on site, with great attention being given to ensure that clean energy is beneficial for everyone and everything, including the whales which inhabit the waters around Rhode Island.
4
Underwater noise is being controlled and all noiseproducing activities will cease during the spring when the whales are present in the Rhode Island area. Furthermore, company boats will travel more slowly to create as little noise as possible. There has been worry among the fishing community, but the
Unit 20: Technology
Deepwater Wind’s turbines will be up to 1.6 kilometres apart, providing plenty of room for fishing boats. Birds, too, are likely to be unaffected by the offshore turbines as studies show that migratory birds tend to fly near the coast and not out at sea where the turbines would be. 5
Offshore wind turbines have the advantage over onshore turbines in that they can be much bigger and therefore produce more energy. Transporting turbine parts over land to onshore sights is complex, involving high costs and time, whereas offshore turbine components can be transported on barges out to sea. This is a much cheaper and time-efficient solution.
[Adapted from: Down to business: The future is beyond the horizon in Royal Wings, Royal Jordanian inflight magazine, May/June 2016] STUDENT C: Smart kitchen knows what’s in the fridge 1 The experience is familiar to anyone who regularly cooks at home: you’re at the supermarket buying everything you need for the next meal, but you can’t remember if you have butter at home. So what do you do? To buy or not to buy? And now that you think about it, you did buy butter the last time you were at the supermarket, didn’t you? And once you get home and look for the butter, you find out that you haven’t got any. 2
But what if you could actually see the contents of your fridge from the supermarket aisle? Wouldn’t that be something? In fact the technology is already here in the form of kitchen appliances with ‘connected food’ technology built in to fridges and ovens. There are even some options to ‘upgrade’ non-Wifi equipped fridges and ovens, but the new, brightly-coloured, hands-on appliances with embedded Wifi are too amazing to resist.
3
Once you have the appropriate app downloaded into your smart phone, you will receive a live feed from inside your fridge. Apart from showing what is already there, the technology will tell you what you can make with those ingredients by pulling data from an online store of thousands of recipes. The app will even help you to place an order for missing items, just in case you cannot be bothered to make the trip to the supermarket yourself.
4
The oven technology can ‘sense’ what is inside the oven and tell you how to cook it. It provides information on the correct cooking time and the right temperature, depending on the food’s weight, the oven model and even the altitude of the place where the kitchen is located. There is even technology which
allows family members or friends to gather round a screen, choose a recipe and then make it together. 5
And for those who want some non-human company, you can install cameras in your kitchen ceiling, and the technology will enable you to watch yourself putting carrots on a cutting board. The app will tell you that yes, those are carrots, and will play back a video of you chopping the carrots while also giving you carrot recipes from the online store.
[Adapted from: Smart kitchen knows what’s in fridge, in Gulf News, 31 May 2016] STUDENT D: The problem solvers 1 When you have 200 000 passengers travelling an average of 530 daily flights through the Emirates hub in Dubai, keeping the network in perfect running order is not an easy task. That’s where the NCC, Emirates’ Network Control Centre, and the beating heart of the airline’s entire operation, comes into play, playing a crucial role in the smooth running of the airline. 2
In much the same way as NASA’s Mission Control monitors all aspects of its space exploration, the NCC manages every flight, every departure, every arrival, and every single movement of its fleet. Inside the airline’s nerve centre is a 60+ strong team of highly specialised individuals, all monitoring, coordinating and problem-solving on a daily basis. Made up of 15 different departments, each has its own distinct area of specialism. For example, there are crew scheduling teams who focus timetabling crew for different flights, while the team of flight despatchers arrange flight plans and choose the best routes on any given day. A team of engineers, each trained on specific aircraft types, is able to recommend the best possible repair solution.
3
But despite the need for different departments, nothing is achieved in isolation, with all the teams working together, using their different skillsets to develop the best approach to each situation. It is the responsibility of everyone to ensure that flights stick to schedules as closely as possible, no matter what happens.
4
The NCC relies on a number of key pieces of technology to help ensure that flights operate on time. For example, using the latest radar technology, the teams can predict the exact time an aircraft will land, taking into consideration wind speed, the flight path and even the aircraft’s optimal speed.
5
The focal point for the entire department is the giant floor-to-ceiling radar screen, which shows vital information such as aircraft holding patterns and
141
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
which runways are in use. A second screen shows all current aircraft positions, delivering a complete picture of the entire Emirates network at any given moment in time, and ensuring the highest level of connectivity for its passengers. [Adapted from: The problem solvers, in Open Skies, Emirates in-flight magazine, May 2016]
4/5 Whole class, then alone Talk through the information with the class, highlighting the use of and and joining phrases. Then students work alone to choose the correct form of the verb in sentences (a–i). Notice that there is also an exercise in the Workbook.
142
Answers a Eating, sleeping and reading is/are enjoyable activities. b Chocolate and strawberry is/are my favourite flavours of ice cream. c Neither the president nor her assistant have/has replied to my question. d Mum as well as Sharon enjoys/enjoy chocolate ice cream. e Either the boots by the door or the flip-flops in the living room is/are John’s. f Neither Marcos nor Carole lives/live in that house. g Wind and rain as well as snow cause/causes problems at airports. h Either you or your brother are/is going to go first. i Either the chicken or the fish in the freezer needs/ need to be thawed for dinner tonight.
E Listening and speaking 1 Alone, then pairs Students work alone and carefully read the five prompts, deciding which ones they think are the least and most challenging. They should then discuss with their partner and give reasons for their choices. Generally speaking, the last couple of prompts tend to be more challenging than the earlier ones, but it may also be the case that these give students more to talk about.
2 Alone, then pairs Students are going to listen to six different people responding to the five prompts in the topic card they have just been studying. As they listen, students decide which person matches each of the five prompts. There is one extra person
speaking, who does not match any of the prompts. After listening, students work in pairs to compare their answers.
Answers Olaf positive and negative effects of technological advances on our lives Aisha the suggestion that technology destroys privacy. Tom skills you need to use technology effectively Mari Pedro technology you could not live without Maryam what you think the greatest technological development is, and why CD2, Track 16 Olaf: I can’t think of any negatives! Technology is only positive. Aisha: I don’t have a problem if people know about me. I’ve nothing to hide anyway Tom: My age group was born with technology and we’ve grown up with it, so we don’t need special skills. Pedro: My phone. No need to even think about it. Maryam: There are so many amazing technologies, but for me all the smart apps take my breath away.
3 Alone Students now think about how the five speakers’ introductory phrases could be expanded. There are six phrases (a–f) for students to look at and match to the five speakers (Mari has already been excluded) in E2. Students do the matching, decide which phrase does not fit, and then listen to check their answers.
Answers a Aisha, b Maryam, c Olaf,
d
Tom,
e
X,
f
Pedro
4/5 Alone Students listen again and answer questions (a–e). Then they can share with their partner and check the audioscript in Appendix 3.
Answers a believes that all information is open to everyone? Aisha b can only see the positive side of technology? Olaf
Unit 20: Technology
c
thinks that new technology is not difficult to understand? Tom
d
welcomes recommendations from friends? Maryam
e
would find it difficult to live their daily life? Pedro
CD2, Track 17 Pedro: My phone. No need to even think about it. We all have one, in fact we’ve all had one for so long that we probably can’t remember life without one. It’s just normal to have one. If you took my phone away from me, I just wouldn’t be able to operate normally. Life would be meaningless! Tom: My age group was born with technology and we’ve grown up with it, so we don’t need special skills. Of course, if a new technology comes along then perhaps we need to learn how to use it. But I believe that we can easily transfer our skills from one technology to another – we’re not stupid, are we? Maryam: There are so many amazing technologies, but for me all the smart apps take my breath away. It seems like there’s an app for everything and anything you might want to do. And the great thing is that every day a new app comes along, or friends make you aware of an app that they’ve tried and enjoy using. Olaf: I can’t think of any negatives! Technology is only positive. Just think of how we use it every day. What’s not to like about technology? The point nowadays is that everything involves technology to some extent, so it’s impossible for life to continue without it. Aisha: I don’t have a problem if people know about me. I’ve nothing to hide anyway. I think the only people who worry about privacy are criminals. I don’t even think we have any idea of who knows what about us because nothing is secret in the 21st century.
6 Pairs Students work together to discuss possible responses to the follow-up questions. Then they can role-play, and try to use expressions from this Language Tip and those in other units.
F Speaking 1/2 Pairs Students think back to Section F in Unit 15 to remember how spoken language is assessed in the Cambridge IGCSE examination. Then they complete the gaps in the criteria (a–f) using the words in the box.
Answers a The candidate uses a range of [structures] accurately and consistently. b The candidate uses [simple] structures securely. c Shades of [meaning] are achieved and some sophisticated [ideas] are communicated. d The candidate uses a restricted range of [vocabulary]. e Pronunciation and [intonation] are generally clear. f The candidate makes an attempt to respond to [questions] and prompts.
G Watch, listen and talk 1 Alone, then pairs Prepare students to watch a video of a student practicing a discussion with a teacher about Technology. The student is responding to the same prompts that they have already seen in Section E. Students need to decide which, if any, of the criteria from Activity F2 could apply to the student, and give their reasons.
2 Alone, then pairs Students now watch a second student responding to the same prompts and decide if they perform better or worse than the first student, giving their reasons. They also need to decide again which, if any, of the criteria from Activity F2 could apply to the student, and give their reasons.
LANGUAGE TIP
There have been several examples in the Coursebook of introductory phrases and fillers for students to use in their spoken language. In this final unit, the focus is on introductory phrases for giving opinion.
TOP TIP
This Top Tip reminds students that they should respond to the prompts in the same order as they appear on the topic card.
143
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
H Reading and writing 1 Pairs, then whole class The five pictures show technologies which were groundbreaking when they were first invented. Students work together to answer questions (a–d), and then do whole class feedback so they can share their ideas together. There are no right or wrong answers here.
2 Pairs Before students match the words, ask them to say what they consider to be today’s greatest technological inventions. Then they work together to find the ones in the table. When they have done the matching, ask them to answer the questions (a–f) below.
Answers 1 f, 2 a, 3 d, 4 h, 5 j, 6 e, 7 b, 8 g, 9 c, 10 i
144
Communication Activity For questions H2c and H2d tell students that they are working on a committee which has to select what they think are the top three most useful technological inventions from the list of ten. So, they need to discuss how to reduce the list.
is not usually about the whole text, but about a specific part or parts of it. Here are some sample summary writing answers from (i) an IGCSE Core and (ii) an IGCSE Extended students. Both answers would probably score in the top bands for both content and language. i
Core
Technology developed a lot over the centuries. Today our communication is made easier by mobile telephones, not only for phone calls but also for internet access. Food has been made easier and faster to cook with the invention of the microwave. GPS makes it almost impossible for a person to get lost and nowadays they are installed in most smartphones. The PC with the internet changed the face of the whole world and the mouse makes it easier to use. Digital music has reduced waste and remote controls make it easier to control appliances. We can immediately share photos from phones and have face-to-face conversations. [107 words] ii Extended
In question H2f students are asked to read an article about technological inventions, and then write a summary of the ways in which technology has made our lives easier and more convenient. As a variation, divide the paragraphs between different pairs and get each pair to read their paragraph (or paragraphs) and note down two-three important points in it. Then in whole class feedback students find out about all the other paragraphs, and then write their summary. Remind students that a summary
The article discusses technology’s greatest inventions and begins explaining how technology continues to evolve throughout the ages, changing the way we live and work. It then mentions examples that have altered our lives such as the mobile phone, the microwave, the GPS and possibly the greatest of them all, the PC. The article also refers to the internet which is described as still being in its ‘infancy’. It then goes on to mention inventions such as the remotecontrol which make our lives much easier. It ends with a reference to the idea of video-conferencing that would have been considered science-fiction-like 100 years ago. So many inventions and yet more and more technological inventions appear every day. [116 words]
Reflection
1 Pairs
Use the Reflection to remind students of what they have achieved in the unit. Students should set themselves a personal goal based on their scores for Unit 20.
Exam focus Speaking, Part 2, topic card NOTE: The exam focus is on speaking, and involves students in looking at a new topic card, and then taking on the roles of examiner and student, using the prompts on the card.
Students work together and look at the prompts, discussing how they might respond to each one. When they are ready, students take on the roles of examiner and interviewee, using the topic of Life in 100 years’ time and the prompts on the card. Your job is to monitor and encourage where necessary, and provide any language students are struggling with. However, this should be an opportunity for students to build their confidence and fluency.
Workbook answers Unit 1: Free time
Exercise A5 a
You should drink about three litres (l) of water each day.
b
This USB stick has only got 19 gigabytes (GB) left, so you need to buy a new one.
c
The speed limit on motorways in many countries is 100 kilometres per hour (kph).
d
A bag of sugar normally weighs one kilo (k).
e
Temperatures rise to about 45° Celcius (C) in our country in the summer – it’s very hot.
f
A key on a lap-top normally measures about one centimetre (cm).
g
My daughter is going to run a marathon, so she runs about five kilometres (kms) every day to prepare.
h
The shop is only about 100 metres (m) away, I’m sure you can walk it!!
i
On the map a millimetre (ml) doesn’t look very far, but in reality it can be a very long distance.
Exercise A1 a
free time
f
resistance training
b
shopping centre
g
creative story
c
discount price
h
board game
d
online puzzles
i
loyalty scheme
e
amazing app
Exercise A2 a
creative story
e
amazing app
b
resistance training
f
shopping centre
c
board game
g
loyalty scheme
d
online puzzles
h
discount price
Exercise A3 a General and sports injury. All others are methods to improve fitness.
Exercise A6
b App. A technical term and soft ware but others give information in a traditional way.
a
original
d
original
b
original
e
unique
c
unique
f
unique
c Amaze is a verb. The others are adjectives. d Announced is not a compound noun (a noun made up of two parts). e Swimming is a sport that does not use a ball. f
Children – the plural is not formed by adding an ‘s’.
g Stalls because it is an individual place (plural here) but the others are group words.
Exercise A4
Exercise B1 No set answers
Exercise B2 Adjective + Noun box
b football
Sizeable family / delicious meat / nutritious milk / amazing speed / exciting sport / numerous date trees / sandy tracks
c funny
Olympic-sized pool / young boy / empty pool / large dinner
a shopping mall
145
d adults e stalls f
Exercise B3 (possible answers)
announced
g delightful h app
Cyprus / tavli (backgammon) / older / younger / skilful / competitive / outside / cold / challenging / fun, trendy 145
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Exercise B4
Exercise C4
a
warmth
e
fascination
a
exercise, read, take classes, volunteer, hobbies, friends and family.
b
efficiency
f
enthusiasm
c
stranger
g
firmness
b
half an hour a day.
d
delight
h
impression
c
fiction and non-fiction.
d
institutions and the internet.
e
clean up the highway or work in a soup kitchen.
f
stresses you out and prevents you from developing other skills.
g
friends and family.
h
no, only some of them.
Exercise C1 a
true
b
true
c
false – the main ideas and key words
d
false – sometimes only one word is required
e
true
f
true
g
true
Exercise C2
146
a
What are the six ways that can help a person become successful?
b
What is the minimum recommended daily exercise?
c
What kind of books will improve your skill of reading?
Exercise C5 a
physical
b
confidence
c
institution
d
underestimate
e
neglect
f
incorporate
d
Other than at school and colleges, where are good places to learn?
Exercise D1
e
What two examples are given in how you can help other people?
Core
f
Why is it not healthy to only focus on your studies?
g
What people should you always give priority to in your life?
h
Is it important to include all of the points listed in order to be successful? Why/not?
Exercise C3 a
six words or phrases
b
a number
c
two types
d
name of a type of place
e
two types of activities
f
a reason
g
nouns
h
yes / no answer
It’s always a good idea to have another focus other than work, to have fun and stimulate the mind and body. Taking classes or reading means that you’re always learning something new. Furthermore, exercising is always a good way to enjoy yourself and get fit, while with volunteering you’re using your free time to help others. I believe the best way to enjoy these activities is to do them with friends. That way you are enjoying yourself in the company of a person you like (85 words)
Extended It is always good to have another focus other than work, whether that be physical or mental activities. In order for you free time to be productive and enjoyable, you need to find activities which you like and are willing to sacrifice time for. Physical activity doesn’t have to take place in a gym environment; you might prefer dancing or taking long walks. If you don’t like reading, try volunteering or learning to
Workbook answers
make pottery. I also believe that adopting a pet can be very beneficial, as you’re dedicating time to an animal that needs you. Furthermore, it gives you somebody to love and can be lots of fun. (109 words)
Unit 2: Television
Exercise B1 a
beautifully
e
fashionably
b
completely
f
generously
c
doubtfully
g
hungrily
d
eventually
h
incorrectly
Exercise B2
Exercise A1 a
v
d
ii
g
ix
a
incorrectly
e
doubtfully
b
viii
e
iv
eventually
f
fashionably
vii
f
iii
i vi
b
c
h i
c
hungrily
g
generously
d
completely
h
beautifully
Exercise A2
Exercise B3
No set answers
No set answers
Exercise A3 Mobile
phones
Exercise C1
Voluntary
work
a
v
d
ii
g
iv
Social
media
b
vii
e
i
h
vi
Television
programme
c
iii
f
viii
Living
standards
Information
leaflet
Exercise C2
Sound
system
a
True – in fact 79%.
Smart
phones
b
True – that milestone involved the adoption of digital TV.
Pocket
money
c
False – more people worldwide now pay for their TV than get it over-the-air.
d
False – in Africa in particular, fewer than a third of the households own a TV set.
e
True – nonetheless, many retailers worldwide have low expectations as shipments of TV sets continue to decline.
f
True – we have to remember that the actual definition of television is rapidly changing.
g
True – one thing is certain though; for the foreseeable future, television will continue to dominate how the world’s population gets its information and entertainment.
a
pocket money
b
smartphones / mobile phones
c
voluntary work
d
mobile phones / smartphones
e
sound system
f
living standards
g
social media
h
Information leaflets
Exercise A4 a
obviously
c
obviously
b
apparently
d
apparently
147
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Exercise C3 Core Dear Sir/ Madam,
Exercise A1
After thinking for quite a while, I have chosen two television programmes and I hope you agree with and like the ones I have picked.
Possible answers Apple
Noodles
Baked beans
Ostrich meat
Cake
Pasta
Dates
Quinoa
Eggs
Rice
Fish
Salami
Gnocchi
Tuna
Honey
Upside down cake
Ice cream
Veal
Sincerely,
Juniper berries
Waldorf salad
Jamie Brown
Ketchup
Xigua
Lasagne
Yoghurt
Dear Sir/ Madam,
Milkshake
Courgettes
I was greatly honoured to be chosen to select two programmes of my choice to be aired on national television. I very much hope that you will appreciate my choices.
Exercise A2
My first choice, is the Great British Bake- Off, a reality television show, which I think should be aired at seven o’clock in the evening. It’s a very entertaining baking competition, which I believe can be watched and enjoyed by all the family, both adults and children. My second choice, is the crime series Silent Witness. This choice, is an adult programme which I believe should be aired at either ten or eleven o’clock at night, as there are some scenes which are disturbing for children. It is a good programme though for adults and teenagers.
Extended 148
Unit 3: Food
The first programme I selected, is a current affairs programme called Panorama, which investigates a wide range of current subjects which take place around the world. I think it would be wise to air this programme at around eight or nine o’clock in the evening. Although it is not inappropriate in any way, some of the subjects discussed are quite complicated and would not be understood by children and neither perhaps by young teenagers.
Possible answers Fast food
Traditional food
Neither
Ice cream
Baked beans
Apple
Ketchup
Cake
Juniper berries
Milkshake
Dates
Ostrich meat
Noodles
Eggs
Quinoa
Fish
Tuna
The second programme I chose, is Horrible Histories. It is a series of children’s documentaries which focuses on the more gruesome facts of history that are not taught in school. It is of course very light-hearted, comical and enjoyable for children and young teenagers, and I believe it would be good if it were aired around five in the afternoon, after school.
Gnocchi
Upside down cake
Honey
Veal
Lasagne
Waldorf salad
Rice
Xigua
Salami
Courgettes
I hope that you have enjoyed my suggestions, and thank you again for this opportunity.
Pasta
Sincerely, Anastas Petrov
Yoghurt
Workbook answers
Exercise A3
Exercise B2 B
r
A
T
c
h
S U P
p
o
s
c
A
B
I
n
e
t
R
S
R
e
G
i
s
T
E
E
g
I
s
t
E
R
t
a
R G E
T
i
n
S
I
S
T
I
N C
R
e
a
L
E
T
e
d
N
e
g
C
i
s
n
g
e
a
Does it take longer to cook brown rice than white rice?
b
How long does it take you to write an essay?
c
What time do you get up to have breakfast?
d
Where do you like to study each day?
e
When do you sit down to watch television with your family?
f
Why do we have to study grammar?
Exercise B3 No set answers
Exercise A4
Exercise C1
a
donate
e
neglected
a
Health dangers of obesity
b
targets
f
cabinet
b
Worldwide trends
c
insist
g
registers
c
Shoppers’ habits
d
increase
h
supposing
d
Statistics on the sales of fattening foods
e
Sales of healthier products
f
Not just what you eat
Exercise A5 a
insist
d
insist
b
insist
e
insist
Exercise C2
c
persists
f
persist
a
Peer pressure
b
Being overweight and obese
c
Men (74 percent were overweight or obese)
d
Advertising to young people. It has no effect (children are just as overweight there)
e
By what shoppers are buying
f
Fatty foods and fizzy drinks
g
Sales of fruits and vegetables have risen, cafes and restaurants have an increase in healthy eating and sales of salads increasing
Exercise B1 a
Supposing they don’t come,
then we’ll have to go without them.
b
We’ll leave the house
as soon as they come so we’re not late.
c
We should get there on time,
providing that there’s not too much traffic.
d
As soon as they told me,
I knew they didn’t want to come with us.
e
I think we’ve taken the right clothes,
but that’s supposing the weather is good.
f
We’ll definitely go and celebrate
providing you pass your driving test.
g
The child will be sick,
if he eats all those sweets.
Exercise D1 Core Dear fellow students, I recently contacted four major companies in the food industry, to find out about the contents of their products. I contacted two major fast food companies, a diet cereal brand and a health food company.
149
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
I’m hoping to compare the content of the fast food products with the healthy food products. This way, I believe we can start understanding more about what we eat and become more careful about the food we choose to put into our bodies. I would love to hear more ideas from you because we can really work as a school to promote healthy lifestyle and I would like everybody to be involved with the process. In order to make our school a healthier place, we need to work together, so, I’m expecting plenty of ideas from all of you.
If any of you have got any ideas about how we can promote healthy eating, please contact me! I think it would be great if could all get involved in this campaign and show that we care about living healthy and nutritious lives.
Thanks,
Extended
Zoe Menelaou (140 words)
The local product I have chosen is the lemon, which grows everywhere here in Cyprus. Lemons are so abundant that people pick them up off the streets. Lemons are famous for their nutritional value as they contain high levels of vitamin C, far more than oranges and grapefruits. They contain fewer calories per 100g and no saturated fats or cholesterol. Because of the citric acid in lemons (up to 8%) they are excellent as a natural food preservative, but also as an aid to human digestion. So lemons benefit us both as a food and a natural medicine.
Extended Dear friends and fellow students, I’ve recently contacted four companies in the food industry, to find out what they put in the food that we eat.
150
I sent letters to a major fast food company in our area, a company which focuses on food for diets, an organic farm and a company which produces and sells cold cuts. I want to find out if the things they claim about their companies are true, and what ingredients actually go into the things that we so easily put into our mouths. Once we get this information, I’m planning to carry out a survey to see how many of us actually know what we are eating, whether it’s healthy or not, and if the information we receive from the companies adds up to our own views. This way, I hope that we can all be enlightened and understand better about eating healthily.
Yours, Delmy Rodriguez (195 words)
Exercise D2
A popular imported product in Cyprus is breakfast cereal, which, because we eat it with milk, is supposed to be healthy. However, there is a lot of sugar and flavourings in packet cereals from the shops. Also, because there is very little protein in them, cereals do not make you feel full for a long period of time. Many people add sugar or honey to their morning bowl of cereals, and this risks making you put on weight. Stick with natural products and stay healthy! [185 words]
Workbook answers
Exercise A4
Unit 4: Transport Exercise A1 U C
F
B
K
F
B D Q W P
Z
K
Y
M
Y
J
L
F
Q
I
E
L
O H A
X
P
Y
I
X
R G
L
C
Y
F
D
E
C N
I
A
R
T
K
E
R
Y
E M E
K
V
A W X
P Q
F
V
I
C
E
S
L
I
Z
Z O U K
E
J
Y
B
L
H U F
B
T
E
X
C H M H A
X
R B
R
C G K
E O B
A
I
Z M Q
F
J
D O O A
E
E
J
L
P
T
E
R O P
L
X
I
The roads are so badly potholed that they are damaging my car.
b
The river swelled to dangerous levels that night after the rain.
c
It’s not always possible to compare people’s livelihoods as so many factors are involved.
d
A lot of strain was put on the family after the divorce.
e
There were many fatalities after the accident on the motorway.
f
Women have campaigned for equal rights in many countries.
g
If you use your initiative, imagination and common sense, then you should be fine.
h
There was a surprisingly high number of participants for the marathon.
I A
T
L
A
M O A
D B
L
N C
P
C
A
R G
M K
S
O W D
S
B
E
F
D W O B M O D M B
A
W
I
D W G N N A
X
A W V W Q K
Exercise B1
F
A
P
Y
V
Example answers
M V
T
A
A H G
a
F
R H G P
Q G H Q S
T
R G D
A N E Y
C
U C
L
U G Q S
I
O
J
C
S W
A M Q U B
a
I’ve always avoided talking to strangers – present perfect simple
Exercise A2
b
Last month I travelled to Uganda – past simple
a
ferry
c
The taxi wasn’t waiting – present continuous
b
car
d
I will write my many stories – future simple
c
bicycle
d
coach
Exercise B2
e
balloon
Noun
Verb
Noun
Verb
f
bus
Decision
Decide
Protection
Protect
g
motorbike
Expression
Express
Examination
Examine
h
train
Admission
Admit
Suggestion
Suggest
i
aeroplane
Cancellation
Cancel
Subtraction
Subtract
j
boda boda
Education
Educate
Graduation
Graduate
Exercise A3 a
disaster
b
disasters
c
catastrophic
d
disaster
e
catastrophes
f
catastrophe
Exercise B3 No set answer
Exercises C1 and C2 1
(i) Information Have accidents.
151
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
(ii) 2 pieces of information A trained driver and wear a crash helmet. 2
complex
j
endemic
k
actually
snow-capped
(i) A piece of information Because he was frightened. (ii) A place
Exercise A2 Across:
Home from the hospital. 3
i
(i) Reason He was recommended
2
complex
9
5
paramount
10 thrilling
6
freshwater
(ii) A place. The countryside. 4
(i) Information Surprise because people trust so much. (ii) Three nouns Potholes, animals and children and puddles.
Exercise D1
Down: 1 volcano
7
actually
3
popular
8
endemic
4
professional
11 husky
Exercise A3 a
stationery
d
stationary
e
stationary
a
Segway
d
battery
b
stationery
b
balancing
e
American
c
stationery
c
police
Exercise A4
152
Exercise D2
a
needy – the others describe having money
No set answers
b
satisfied – the others describe wanting/needing food
c
calm – the others describe noise
Exercise D3
d
idle – the others describe doing something
e
lacking – the others describe wholeness
a
The gondola
f
insignificant – the others describe importance/size
b
Because Venetians stand
c
Travelling with a Tangah
d
It’s not fast
e
Electric generator engine
f
Bumpy and only grass mat to sit on
g
Fast way of getting down the hill
h
Two drivers dressed in traditional white outfits
Exercise A5
Unit 5: Holidays Exercise A1 a
snow-capped
e
thrilling
b
paramount
f
volcano
c
husky
g
freshwater
d
popular
h
professional
a
calm
d
lacking
b
insignificant
e
idle
c
needy
f
satisfied
Exercises B1 All the husky dogs had chocolate-coloured fur which showed up against the snow-white beauty of the freshly fallen snow. The dogs had to climb from the lush green fields of the lower hills to the peaks of the snow-capped mountains. On their paws they wore shock-absorbing, specially made leather boots, due to the pounding their legs would receive from the constant trekking. The dogs were used to an easier life; living at ground-level on the plains and rolling in the white sands of the freshwater lakes near their homes.
Workbook answers
Exercise B2 a
I live in an English-speaking country.
b
Shakespeare is an author who is very well known.
c
She never cooks and only buys ready-made food.
d
He lives in a flat in a 20-storey building.
e
It’s a two-year-old cat and already it’s fat.
f
It’s a very brightly lit room – I don’t like it.
g
She is a part-time worker because of the children.
g
h
Pronunciation •
They are not expecting you to speak like a native speaker
•
Speak clearly so you’re understood
Mistakes •
You would be penalised particularly if difficult to understand
Exercise D1
Exercise C1
•
Search likely sections of the text
•
Read the questions
Actually / well / to be honest / hmm / let me think
•
Underline the key word/s
•
Ask yourself what information is the question asking for
Exercise C2 Let me think (2) To be honest (3) Well (3) Hmm (2)
Exercise D2 a
How many methods of transport are available to reach the Isles of Scilly?
b
What is Scillonian III?
Actually
c
Name four ‘treasures’ of the islands.
Exercise C3
d
Which other part of the world are the islands compared with?
a
Worrying doesn’t help
e
How many people live on the Isles of Scilly?
•
f
What do you need to do before travelling between any of the islands?
g
On which island is the Old Wesleyan Chapel?
h
Where can you find the second-oldest lighthouse in Britain?
b
• The questions are not there to challenge you The question in Part 1 •
c
d
e
f
You can prepare because the questions you will be asked are personal
The examiner is there to help and guide you
• It’s not assessed Using your own language
Exercise D3
•
a
isles
d
treasures
b
chapel
e
Isles of Scilly
c
lighthouse
f
transport
Don’t use your own language
• Tell the examiner you don’t understand Phrases to show you don’t understand •
‘I’m sorry but I don’t understand what you mean’
•
‘Could you repeat that please?’
Exercise D4
• ‘Could you say that more slowly please?’ Not having enough to say
a
two
d
the Tropics
•
b
a cruiser
e
2000
c
exotic plants, wild f flowers, ancient cairns, g crumbling castles, h sparkling white sands and azure seas
Keep speaking
• Examiner will help you out The topic •
Not being tested on your knowledge
•
Tell the examiner but then talk about a related topic that you’re more comfortable with
check times and tides St Mary’s St Agnus
153
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Unit 6: Learning
Exercise B1 a
The dog tried to befriend the boy in the park.
Exercise A1
b
Because she misunderstood the instructions, she did the activity incorrectly.
c
The exercise was uncomplicated and so she finished quickly.
a
graph
g
primary
b
grammar
h
programme
c
guide
i
pronunciation
d
They wanted to revisit the area, as it was so beautiful.
d
college
j
facilities
e
e
counselling
k
findings
He missed the bus because he overslept again after a late night.
f
career
l
fees
f
She looked at him in disbelief because of the lies he was telling.
g
If you cooperate better then you will finish the project quickly.
h
Because the country’s currency was devalued, prices rose drastically.
i
She was transformed when she had her hair restyled.
j
They did not foresee that the house would be destroyed during the hurricane.
Exercise A2 a
fees
d
grammar
b
pronunciation
e
guide
c
career
f
facilities
Exercise A3 154
a
The students often go to the cafeteria to relax and have a break.
Exercise B2
b
You should go to accommodation and welfare, if there’s a problem with your flat.
Across
c
There are good banking facilities at the college, with ATMs everywhere.
2
transform
9
4
disbelief
10 befriend
d
I felt very depressed about exams, so I went to the counselling service and they really helped me.
7
uncomplicated
e
I go every day to the sports centre to play table tennis.
f
You’re not allowed to talk in the LMRC because people study there.
g
We are always busy at the weekends as the social and leisure programme is excellent and full of great activities.
Exercise A4
predict
Down 1
revisit
6
cooperate
3
oversleep
8
devalue
5
misunderstand
Exercise B3 a
availability
e
happiness
b
cheaper
f
imagination
a
practise
e
practice
c
excitement
g
luxuriously
b
practise
f
d
guidance
h
loving
c
practice
Practice! Practice! Practice!
d
practise
Exercise B4 a
carelessly
d
beautiful
g
worthless
b
grateful
e
harmless
h
useless
c
homeless
f
colourful
Workbook answers
Exercise C1
Extended Dear Leila,
a
infested with hostile creatures
b
on the verge of
c
do physical damage
d
gaming addiction
e
can be so extreme
f
more likely to suffer
g
for hours on end
h
to eat properly
i
in poor physical condition
Exercise C2
I’m sure you have to deal with this too, but our parents are constantly complaining that we sit at our computers all day and now they are threatening to restrict our computers at school. We’ve decided that we should campaign for physical and computer activities. That way, we can be more active and get exercise like adults want us to, but we also get to spend the time we want on the computers. They think that we only use computers for fun, but on the most part, we need them for research and for school projects. So much of the information we learn is from the internet, so restricting our access will only make it complicated for us. I believe that we should be allowed a certain amount of leisure time on the school computers after we have finished our work, rather than completely controlling what we do and how we do it! Adults should respect our needs. What are your thoughts on this matter?
a
creatures
b
to another place
c
that your back aches, getting a migraine and realise that you haven’t had anything to eat or drink
d
when the main nerve between the forearm and the hand is squeezed or pressed
e
migraines
f
being seated in the same position
Unit 7: Jobs
g
because they don’t want to take the time to prepare anything
Exercise A1
h
those already in poor physical condition
a
Surgeon – Many years at university are necessary to do this job, which can be very challenging and demanding. They play a very important role in our society in looking after people and making them well.
b
Teacher – Again, a university education is very important for this job. They play a very important role in our development as an adult and we learn many interesting things from them.
c
Police officer – Maintain peace and security in our cities and wear a uniform so that they can be easily identified. Men and women are both necessary in this job.
d
Engineer – They do many different jobs in the building and construction of a city. Again, a university degree is extremely important as there are so many areas to learn about.
Lots of love, George (171 words)
Exercise D1 Core Dear Antonis, Our parents are threatening to control how and for what we use our computers at school. We are going to suggest dedicating time for both physical and computer activities, because they are always complaining that we use our computers instead of being active. We don’t only play games on the computers, we also use them for research and for a lot of school work, like projects. I think the best solution would be for us students to promise to use the school computers only for homework purposes, and we can use our computers at home for fun. Do you have the same problems as us at your school? Love to everyone, Maria (114 words)
Exercise A2 a
also
d
sometimes
b
in addition
e
furthermore
c
besides
f
consequently
155
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Exercise A3
Exercise C1a
Make clear – namely / accordingly
ii
They are normally jobs that other people do not want to do.
iii
People get their clothes and bodies dirty.
Contrast / difference – however / in spite of Detail – specifically / in this case Result / consequence – consequently / as a result Example – for example / such as
Exercise C1b No set answer
Summary – in other words / for this reason
Exercise C2
Exercise A4
a
host
h
spin off
a
in other words
e
as a result
b
duties
i
graphic
b
specifically
f
in this case
c
alongside
j
inundated
c
in spite of
g
consequently
d
pilot
k
commissioned
d
namely
h
such as
e
juxtaposition
l
concept
f
wit
m
honour
g
hazards
Exercise A5
156
a
accept
e
except
b
accepted
f
accept / except
Exercise C3
c
except
g
except
a
dirty jobs
h
the cameraman
d
accept
h
accepted
b
discovery
i
the crew
c
November 2003
j
dangerous
d
169
k
disgusting
If I were you, I’d visit the doctor soon to check that cough.
e
2012
l
respect
f
the situations
m
admiration
b
I think it would be better if you came later, as I won’t be ready.
g
c
It might be a good idea to read the book before seeing the film.
colourful personalities n of the men and women o who do the jobs
d
Why don’t we take the dog for a walk now, before it rains?
Exercise C4
e
I don’t think she should buy that car, as it’s too expensive.
No set answer
Exercise B1 / B2 a
Exercise B3 1
b
4
i
7
d
2
f
5
c
8
h
3
a
6
g
9
e
Exercise B4 No set answers
father ‘Somebody’s Gotta Do It’
Exercise D1 Baggage handler tasks
What makes it a dirty job?
Someone who likes working outside.
Can be hot and sweaty
Someone who is physically strong.
Luggage travelled many places
Someone who can work at night.
The vehicles they use
Workbook answers
Exercise D2
Exercise A2
Core
a
63 064
f
314 000%
Three baggage handlers needed at Airport Terminal 1. Salary ranges from $10 to $17 per hour. The job offer is part-time or temporary, starting on the 31st of May. It is suitable for students as the work hours are 10 to 15 a week including weekends. Although we do not need academic achievements, we will show preference to applicants with IGCSEs in English and Mathematics. A uniform will be provided due to working conditions being in all types of weather. (80 words)
b
13th
g
1/5
c
680 kilograms
h
10 centimetres
d
492
i
100s
e
1 million
j
13–19
Extended At Airport Terminal 1, three baggage handlers are needed for part-time or temporary employment. The payment ranges from $10 to $17 an hour, depending on shift hours, experience and age. It is a job suitable for students due to the working hours being only 10 to 15 hours a week including weekends and nights. All applicants must be fit and healthy due to the lifting and carrying that is involved. No academic qualifications are required, but it is possible preference may be shown to applicants with IGCSEs in English and Mathematics. A uniform will be provided for all weather conditions. (102 words)
Unit 8: Communication
Exercise A3 faucet – tap
sidewalk – pavement
check – bill
truck – lorry
janitor – caretaker
restroom – bathroom
diaper – nappy
fall – autumn
license plate – number plate
résumé–CV
cookie – biscuit
zucchini – courgette
gas – petrol
zip code – post code
trashcan – dustbin
Exercise A4 a
157
license plate/number plate
d
fall/autumn
e
faucet/tap
b
résumé/CV
f
zucchini/courgette
c
zip code/post code
Exercise B1
Exercise A1
a
true
e
true
b
true
f
true
a
hundreds – 100s
c
true
g
false
b
one-fifth – 1/5
d
false
c
six hundred and eighty – 680
d
three hundred and fourteen thousand per cent – 314 000%
e
thirteenth – 13th
f
thirteen to nineteen – 13–19
g
one million – 1 000 000
h
four hundred and ninety-two – 492
i j
Exercise B2 a
The world’s first known printed book is developed.
b
The first demonstration of an electric telegraph is given by the US inventor Morse.
c
The first personal computer known as ‘Apple’ is designed.
sixty-three thousand and sixty-four – 63 064
d
Homing pigeons are used as postmen in Baghdad.
ten – 10
e
A kind of paper made from bamboo is developed by the Chinese.
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
f
The first postage stamp is introduced in Britain, called the Penny Black.
c
manipulated – controlled or influenced
d
relentlessly – never ending
g
The telephone is invented by an Italian called Marconi.
e
dozen – twelve
h
The use of the first television is demonstrated in London.
f
potential – leading to success
g
solitude – being alone
i
Writing is developed on clay tablets by the Sumerians.
h
exemplary – excellent
Exercise B3
158
a
It has been reported that the fire is out of control.
b
It is thought that saving money is better than spending it.
c
That ugly modern building was built for hundreds of thousands of euros (by the municipality).
d
Different public holidays are celebrated around the world (by countries).
Exercise C2 a
true – I realised it had been months
b
false – what surprised me was the anger
c
true – in the hands that we adults should be holding
Exercise C3 a
dozen
e
manipulated
e
Another satellite for the weather has been sent up (by NASA).
b
engrossed
f
exemplary
f
The film The Lord of the Rings was also enjoyed by people who loved the book.
c
abandoned
g
potential
d
relentlessly
h
solitude
Exercise B4 a
3100 BC … Writing is developed on clay tablets by the Sumerians.
b
1500 BC … A kind of paper made from bamboo is developed by the Chinese.
c
865 … The world’s first known printed book is developed.
d
1050 … Homing pigeons are used as postmen in Baghdad.
Exercise C4 a
Because they were engrossed with their own private screen.
b
Because the eyes of the parents are also fixed on their own devices.
c
Nursery colours and baby names.
d
Hit by commercialisation.
e
To become a consumer.
f
Through imitation and role models.
e
1838 … The first demonstration of an electric telegraph is given by the US inventor Morse.
Exercise C5
f
1840 … The first postage stamp is introduced in Britain, called the Penny Black.
Core
g
1871… The telephone is invented by an Italian called Marconi.
h
1926 … The use of the first television is demonstrated in London.
i
1976 … The first personal computer known as ‘Apple’ is designed.
Exercise C1 a
abandoned – left alone
b
engrossed – very interested in
Dear Editor, A great deal has changed since our parents’ generation were children, but I believe one of the main advances has been in communication. The telephone has developed into smartphones which have internet access, GPS; they have become mini computers. Furthermore, because of our unlimited access to the internet, social media has become a hub for us to communicate with friends and family, share our experiences and connect with people all around the globe. Our parents had none of this. They had to wait days for a letter or a postcard from a loved one, phone calls were ridiculously
Workbook answers
expensive and the only way they could communicate away from home, was through payphones. There aren’t that many differences between the two generations, but communication is definitely something that has developed gigantically over the years, and it will continue to do so.
Exercise A2 a
fault
d
drawbacks
b
drawback
e
drawback
c
faults
f
fault
Exercise A3
Yours respectfully, Marie Moreau (146 words)
Doer
Recipient
Extended
Employer
Employee
Dear Editor,
Interviewer
Interviewee
Although there is not such a large generation gap between us and our parents, on the topic of communication, I believe that things have changed a great deal over recent years.
Trainer
Trainee
Payer
Payee
Nominator
Nominee
Advisor
Advisee
My generation has had the luxury of growing up in a time when the development of communications technology has radically evolved within a number of years. Take for example the mobile phone; we are able to communicate today with somebody within seconds through the use of a phone call, a text message, and now with smartphones, even through the internet. Our parents on the other hand, although they had telephones, they could not communicate with someone as they walked down the street or sat on the bus. Nowadays, we have emails, and social media. We can catch up with anything and anyone within seconds. We no longer have the need for telegrams or letters like our parents did. Our friends and family don’t have to wait days in order to receive a postcard from us telling them about our holidays, they can learn about it within an instant because of photos we posted only seconds ago. Everything has become easier, quicker and more widespread. Yours respectfully,
Exercise A4 a
trainer, trainees
d
employer
b
interviewee(s)/ interviewer
e
nominee
f
advisor
c
payee
Exercise A5 a
CV
b c
d
Referees
g
Name
Qualifications e
Skill
h
Hobbies
Interview
Education
f
Exercise B1 Function
Marco Verdi (201 words)
Unit 9: Interviews Exercise A1 a
date
g
leave
b
watch
h
stress
c
referee
i
notice
d
order
j
check
e
point
k
refuse
f
fan
l
minute
m
strike
159
Example
A direct order
Come here!
To give instructions
Turn the pages slowly
To make an invitation
Come for dinner
On a sign or notice
Keep out!
To give friendly formal advice
Have a quiet word with her about it
Give a warning
Careful
Make an offer
Hello. Have a seat
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Exercise B2 a
Don’t wear
f
Be careful
b
Be smart
g
Make sure, tidy up
c
Don’t shake
h
Take
d
Try
i
Be polite
e
Look interested
j
Accept
Exercise B3 (Other variations possible)
Unit 10: Education Exercise A1 concentrate
diminishes
prepare
recognition
ignore
recollection
support
retention
a
Don’t say that you’ve got no experience.
b
Thank them at the end of the application.
c
Do type it rather than write it.
d
Read the instructions carefully.
understand
interact
e
Write clearly and not in pencil.
examination
concept
f
Complete all sections of the form.
homework
formulate
technique
topic
dedicated
cosmopolitan
Exercise C1 Speaker 1 – B 160
But my passion is painting, and whenever I have free time, which is not very often, I like to paint buildings. We are lucky because Italy has so many beautiful old buildings and I love to record them in my paintings. [152 words]
overwhelming
Speaker 2 – E Speaker 3 – C
Exercise A2
Speaker 4 – A
a
dedicated
f
concentrate
Speaker 5 – F
b
diminishes
g
overwhelming
c
technique
h
interact
d
recollection
i
cosmopolitan
e
support
Speaker – D
Exercise D1 I am 16-years old and live at home with my parents and twin sisters in a small village near Firenze in Italy. I am currently studying for my IGCSEs at an international school in Firenze. Because my mum is German, and I grew up learning German at home, I took my German IGCSE a few years ago. For the past two years I’ve been helping my dad every Saturday in his workshop in the village. He’s a craftsman who designs and builds special furniture. I enjoy working with him, it’s like a hobby for me, but I do not want to do the same thing. I’m much more interested in sport.
Exercise A3 a
engaged
d
concentrate
b
concentrate
e
concentrate
c
engaged
f
engage
lecture
Exercise A4 Across: 3
study
8
7
examination
10 homework
Workbook answers
Down
e
to begin with – initially
1
college
5
school
f
add – contribute
2
education
6
teacher
g
good name – reputation
4
uniform
9
notes
h
person who has a university degree – graduate
i
rely – depend
Exercise B1/B2
Exercise C2
a
present simple/imperative (iv)
b
modal + infinitive/ present simple (ii)
c
present simple/will future (vi)
d
present simple/present continuous (v)
Exercise C5
e
present continuous/ modal + infinitive (iii)
a
false
e
true
f
imperative/present simple (i)
b
false
f
false
c
true
g
true
d
true
h
false
Exercise B3 a
If they don’t have time during the week, they’ll go to the cinema on Saturday.
b
If we leave now and quietly, then nobody will notice ….
c
If we had known about your money issues, we would’ve helped you.
d
If I were you, I would not buy those tight trousers.
e
We would’ve arrived earlier if we had not missed the train.
c
not included in a group
Unit 11: Achievements 161
Exercise A1 a
achievement
f
prevent
If I didn’t have a mobile phone, my life wouldn’t be the same.
b
ballet
g
collect
c
equipment
h
strangest
g
That’s no problem, I’ll get the food if you buy the drinks.
d
event
i
memorabilia
e
record
j
walking stick
h
If I told you something, you would be sure not to tell anybody.
i
She would’ve gone out with you if you had invited her along.
f
j
I wouldn’t have read your notes, if you hadn’t hidden them in such an obvious place.
Exercise B4
Exercise A2 a
dissuade
f
blizzard
b
explorer
g
stumbled
c
inhalation
h
legible
d
alternative
i
rations
e
irresponsible
j
struggled
No set answers
Exercise C1
Exercise A3 a
62.71 kilograms
e
5.78 seconds
a
connected to education – academic
b
123
f
14 410
b
money you earn – salary
c
60 000
g
23 410
c
not enough – short
d
56.7 °C
h
33 333
d
costs – expenses
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Exercise A4
Exercise B3a
a
8 hours and 50 minutes
f
8.1 cigarettes a day
b
1 166 000 tonnes
g
157, 348 000
c
$21 787, 000
h
162 minutes per day
d
86.2 years
i
$150 per square foot
e
150 million
j
56.3% of seats
Exercise B3b
Exercise A6
i
The box of chocolates weighed 500 grams, but most of that was packaging. (noun)
clambering
ii
It was a one-thousand-year-old building. (adjective)
climbing
iii
The watch cost more than 500 dollars and it’s made of platinum. (noun)
iv
That’s a 50-gram piece of gold, but I have no idea of its value. (adjective)
v
He’s only 16 years old, but he’s already got a place in the first team. (noun)
vi
It was only a 50-dollar ticket, but the service was excellent. (adjective)
a
clamber
d
climbed
b
clambering
e
c
climb
f
Exercise B1
162
In the first part of the sentence the word kilometre is being used as an adjective before the word races – in other words, it is describing races. In the second part, the word is being used as a noun, which is why it is plural kilometres after the number 20.
a
That’s the saddest film I’ve ever seen.
b
Is that the tallest building in the world?
c
It’s the fastest animal in the world.
d
That’s the furthest I’ve ever run before.
e
Which dress is the most expensive?
f
I think English breakfast tea is the tastiest.
g
Would you carry the heaviest bags please?
h
I think that is the most beautiful painting.
Exercise C1 a
Jean-Francois Champollion – ii linguist
b
Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart–viii Composed classical music
c
Nadia Comaneci – v Olympic gymnast
d
Malala Yousafzai – i Campaigns for girls’ education
e
Mary Shelley–iii / vii Author
f
Louis Braille–iv Developed reading system for the blind
g
J.R.R. Tolkien–vii / iii Author
h
Florence Nightingale – vi Pioneer and nurse
Exercise B2 a
When she went out to the cinema, she had already done her homework.
b
The cat ate all the chicken that my mum had just cooked.
c
He hadn’t been to the countryside before last year.
d
When she arrived at the theatre, the play had already started.
e
They had lived in Italy before they moved to France for good.
f
If you had listened to me you would have got that job.
g
My brother had got home by the time I arrived.
h
She got really upset when she realised she’d left her laptop on the bus.
Exercise C6
i
The children were really hungry because they hadn’t eaten for ages.
a
Louis Braille
d
Malala Yousafzai
j
The children hadn’t forgotten their teacher’s birthday and bought her flowers.
b
J.R.R. Tolkien
e
Nadia Comaneci
c
Jean-Francois Champollion
f
Mozart
g
Louis Braille
Exercise C2 / C3 / C4 / C5 No set answer
Workbook answers
h
Florence Nightingale
i
Mary Shelley
j
J.R. R. Tolkien
i
location
k
programme
j
environment
l
organisation
Exercise C7
Exercise A3
I really think that Florence Nightingale made the greatest achievements out of all the people listed above. Without her, modern nursing would not be what it is today as she managed to pioneer the way nursing operates today and changed the professional nursing industry for women. Furthermore, in the year of 1860, Florence Nightingale established the first professional nursing school at St Thomas’ Hospital in London. This nursing school was the first one of its kind worldwide and it is now part of King’s College London. (85 words)
a
location
d
destination
b
location
e
destination
c
destinations
f
location
Exercise A4
Unit 12: Organisations
a
bean
e
quest
i
land
b
arch
f
organ
j
sphere
c
rated
g
now
d
ant
h
act
Exercise B1 Remember: A non-defining relative clause provides extra information about someone or something. If we remove the non-defining relative clause from a sentence, the sentence will still make sense.
Exercise A1
163
c
s
l
g
y
n
a
f
i
a
d
y
n
s
o
o
r
o
k
r
l
y
u
c
e
s
q
h
n
r
n
e
c
c
l
l
z
u
s
i
s
c
i
o
g
t
g
a
a
z
q
u
t
e
e
y
w g
i
a
i
a
t
f
y
w
i
r
i
h
f
w q
t
n
n
n
i
n
z
n
u
c
h
o
r
z
c
i
i
e
e
o
u
a
t
n
d
o
r
m b
x
d
s
n
e
n
e
n
v
i
r
o
n m e
n
t
a
t
t
i
e
g
r
q
n
h
r
p
c
l
p
t
s
o
v
r
r
i
r
j
c
u
l
e
v
x
i
n
d
e
x
p
l
o
r
a
t
i
o
n
e
o
a m e
r
e
h
p
s
i
m e
h
h
z
n
e
p
r
o
g
r
a m m e
k
r
o
d
j
y
r
k
x
j
l
g
j
h
x
e
t
a
j
f
j
f
d
t
u
k
r
c
e
a m a
q
Exercise A2
Exercise B2 a
They had to put feed the poor cat, which stole the little boy’s dinner.
b
Do you still go to that restaurant, the one which we went to last year?
c
There is the woman, who owns the bread shop, but she’s obviously not working today.
d
To get to Alberto’s house, take the road that has lots of tall trees down it.
e
The lady who lives next door has offered to look after my house while I’m away.
f
Nektarios, who offered to lend me some money, is a great friend.
h
g
I’m looking for the person whose car is blocking mine.
b
h
He received very bad grades for his essays, which he finished quickly.
Exercise B3
a
hemisphere
e
exploration
b
continents
f
destination
c
adventure
g
teenagers
d
expedition
h
emergencies
a
Keeping fit, which should be done regularly, is a very important way to keep healthy.
b
Michael went to university in London, where he went to study English Literature.
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
c
Michael, who was too poor to pay the fees, had to leave the university.
Exercise C3
d
My grandmother, who goes swimming every day in the lake, is 75.
a
To change people’s attitudes and perceptions about animals.
e
The car, which can reach speeds of up to 300kph, costs $150 000.
b
On a business trip in Mexico.
c
Circuses, zoos and homes.
These trousers, which are a lovely dark blue colour, only cost me $15.
d
Birds and dogs.
e
i. Reproduce
f
ii. Make people fall in love with them
Exercise B4
iii. Repopulate areas
Incorrect – Neither Sara nor Emily does as they are told.
b
Correct
f
To change laws to protect local species.
c
Incorrect – Either the dogs or the cat have to go.
g
They will be regained.
d
Incorrect – Hassan could find the key neither on nor under the mat. / Hassan couldn’t find the key either on or under the mat.
h
If they can be released into the wild.
i
They live together whatever the breed.
e
Correct
Exercise C4
f
Correct
No set answers
Exercise B5 164
iv. Reintroduce the animals into the wild
a
Writing
a
either / or
d
neither / nor
b
either / or
e
either / or
c
neither / nor
f
neither / nor
Exercise C1 a
Black panther – ii
c
Ocelots – iv
b
Jaguars – iii
d
Oncillas – i
Exercise C2 Rescue – We aim to save as many animals in need from sad circumstances, like circuses, captivity and pets. Raise awareness – To educate people worldwide about these animals and to learn to love and respect them and their environments. Mexican government – To work with the authorities to keep changing laws in order to protect all species of animals. Endangered birds – As with our avian project, we aim to release the animals into the wild with the help of our supporters and the government.
Extended Recently I had a two-day visit to the Black Jaguar – White TigerTM Foundation, an organisation which is a leader in wildlife conservation and is passionate about wild animals and their long-term survival. The foundation also rescues animals from many different difficult situations, where they are in danger. During my visit I learned that we should try to let animals live in places that are similar to their own natural environments, like jungles and forest, instead of keeping them in zoos and circuses where they will be unhappy. Also humans should not interfere too much in animals’ lives because we can causes an imbalance in the way the animals live. They are animals not humans. I think that I would enjoy telling my family and friends about my experience at the foundation and I am planning to do a presentation at my school so that my friends can learn more. Also I am going to write an article with photos for my school website. They need to understand about loving and respecting all living things, and not to treat them like toys. (182 words)
Workbook answers
Unit 13: Famous people Exercise A1
Exercise A6 a
prolific
b
bewildering
independence
ambition
dedication
selfishness
optimism
determination
skill
dominance
Exercise A8
fearlessness
strength
sociability
a b c
a
self-assured – confident
b
loyal – dedication
c
stubborn – determination
d
cheerful – optimism
e
courageous – fearlessness
f
self-reliant – independence
g
self-centred – selfishness
h
controlling – dominance
i
experienced – skill
j
tough – strength
k
determined (to succeed) – ambition
l
friendly – sociability
Exercise A3
e
renowned
d
obstacles
e
problem
f
obstacle
No set answer
problem obstacle obstacles
Exercise B1 a
It is a really expensive holiday; nonetheless they are going for a week.
b
They were both invited to the exhibition yet only one of them is going.
c
He was very careful with carrying the plates but still he broke five of them.
d
The book was really difficult to read; however, she finished it in a week.
e
She had just eaten her dinner; nevertheless she also managed to eat a cake.
f
On the one hand, she sat and revised for the exam all night, but then she failed.
g
Even though she goes to the gym most days, she has put on so much weight.
h
The price for local apples has fallen but the fact is that people are buying imported ones.
i
She doesn’t like cats very much but anyway they’ve adopted two kittens.
No set answer
Exercise A4
accessible ferocious
Exercise A7
confidence
Exercise A2
c d
No set answer
Exercise A5
Exercise B2
a
ferocious – very strong
a
aimlessly – adverb
f
lively – adjective
b
bewildering – overwhelming / very great in amount
b
difficulty – noun
g
supply – noun
c
prolific – plentiful
c
comply – verb
h
elderly – adjective
d
accessible – easily reached or understood
d
apply – verb
i
nastily – adverb
e
renowned – well- known
e
architecturally – adverb
165
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Exercise C1
Exercise C5
Felix Baumgartner
a
A former military parachutist.
The sound barrier
b
‘before leaping into the record books’, because he leaped physically from the capsule and then broke records to take first place in the record books
Exercise C2
c
… four times the height of a cruising passenger airline.
d
Joe Kittinger. Mr Kittinger, who set his record in 1960,
e
… the 65th anniversary of US test pilot Chuck Yeager’s successful attempt to become the first man to
a
Austrian
e
space
b
skydiver
f
extreme
c
sound barrier
g
capsule
d
dangerous
h
helium balloon
Exercise C3 a
166
sound barrier (vii) A sudden increase in air resistance to something nearing the speed of sound.
b
helium (viii) A gas that is lighter than air.
c
capsule (ix) A small part of a spacecraft.
d
daredevil (iii) A reckless and very daring person.
e
towed (iv) Pulled.
f
freefall (x) A fast or continuing drop.
g
launch (vi) To send something into outer space or the air.
h
weeping (ii) Crying.
i
famed (xi) Famous, well known.
j
incidents (xii) Events or occurrences.
k l
officially break the sound barrier aboard an aeroplane. f
Broke the record for the highest manned balloon flight.
g
It ended in tragedy.
h
It means ‘go’ (as in a green light).
Exercise D1 Home and Education •
born in Austria
•
43 years old
•
former military parachutist
Achievements • broke the world’s free-fall record •
broke the sound barrier
coincidentally (i) The occurrence of two or more unplanned things at the same time.
•
during the fall, he managed to travel at an average speed of 1357.64 km/h
feat (v) An act or achievement that shows courage, strength or skill.
Family
Exercise C4 a
cruising passenger airline
b
per hour
c
he broke
d
online
e
Europe
f
three
•
mother and father were with him in New Mexico
•
parents have never travelled outside of Europe
•
his mother was seen weeping
Character •
daredevil
Core The topic which today’s article will discuss is about a man called Felix Baumgartner. Maybe one should not call him a ‘man’ but a ‘superman’.
Workbook answers
Felix Baumgartner is a 43-year-old Austrian, former military parachutist who managed to break the world record for free-fall and break the barrier of sound. This incredible species of man who is described as a daredevil managed to reach a speed of 1357.64 kilometres per hour while falling. While doing this amazing feat however he was not alone. Safe on the stable Earth beneath him were both his parents who travelled all the way to New Mexico with him in order to support him. His mother was seen crying as her son completed this amazing jump.
Unit 14: Medical care Exercise A1 Across 2
accident
9
5
medication
10 treatment
7
ambulance
It is not every day that a human manages to break the barrier of sound and face up to other people’s wildest fears. What an incredible man! (150 words)
Down
Extended Today’s article will be all about amazing feats of achievement that humanity has managed to conquer. Take a moment to yourself and try to think of the most amazing thing you have ever done in your life. Whatever it is, I am sure that it cannot compare to the recent achievements of Felix Baumgartner! Felix Baumgartner, an Austrian former military parachutist, has incredibly managed to break the world’s free-fall record and also managed, to break the sound barrier. One might think that such achievements are only for the young and fearless but no, incredibly, Felix is 43 years old! During the fall, this daredevil man managed to reach speeds averaging around 1357.64 kilometres per hour. To put this speed into perspective, a car can usually reach about 180 kilometres per hour. Achievements like these usually require a lot of support and Felix’s family supported him throughout this extraordinary fall. They travelled with him to New Mexico, where the jump was taking place even though they had never travelled outside of Europe before. His mother was also seen weeping with worry as this jump was considered a very dangerous one. Do you think you could ever achieve something like this? I know I could not! (204 words)
injury
1
paramedic
6
emergency
3
patient
8
casualty
4
hospital
Exercise A2 a
b
c
d
e
f
4 10 7 14 11 3
g
h
i
j
k
l
m n
o
6 12 5 15 8
2
9 13 1 167
Exercise A3 a
waterborne
f
mature
b
pedestrians
g
foundations
c
insecure
h
banning
d
academic
i
hygiene
e
priority
j
drought
Exercise A4 a
injuries
d
injured
b
wound
e
wound
c
wound
f
injuries
Exercise B1 The use of would as the past tense of will is often referred to as ‘future in the past’. It is used to express the idea that in the past you thought that something else would happen in the future. It does not matter if you are correct or not. Both was/were going to and the past continuous can be used to express the future in the past.
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Exercise B2
Exercise D2
a
a specialised d rewarding g experience
b
When the doctors heard that Florence Nightingale was going to work (2) with them, they felt threatened (1). The doctors felt threatened (1) when they knew she was soon coming (2) to work with them.
Exercise B3 a
were about to
e
was planning
b
were going
f
was supposed to send
c
arrived
g
would not be
d
would go
h
would pass
Exercise B4
168
a
practise
d
practice
b
practice
e
practice
c
practise
f
practise
b mental health e community
c cultural f orthopaedic
Exercise D3 1
C
4
B
7
B
2
A
5
C
8
C
3
A
6
A
Unit 15: Healthy living Exercise A1
Exercise B5
a
A cluster of flowers
i
Honey and ginger
b
Nervous system
j
Dietary supplements
c
Egyptian hieroglyphs
k
d
Couch potatoes
Intense aromatic flavours Perennial plant
a
advise
d
advised
e
Reduces stress
l
b
advice
e
advise
f
No pain no gain
m Mineral content
c
advice
f
advice
g
Aesthetic appeal
n
Nature’s pharmacy
h
High blood pressure
o
Seventeenth century
Exercise C1 a
i
f
i
k
ii
Exercise A2
b
iii
g
iii
l
iii
a
perennial plants
f
reducing stress
c
iv
h
iii
m
iv
b
dietary supplements
g
a cluster of flowers
d
i
i
ii
n
iii
c
no pain no gain
h
nature’s pharmacy
e
ii
j
iii
o
iv
d
Egyptian hieroglyphs
i
aesthetic appeal
e
couch potatoes
j
intense aromatic flavours
Exercise D1 community nurse – nurse who works in a local area cultural – to do with the ideas and traditions of a society specialised in – to focus on a particular subject experience – knowledge rewarding – providing satisfaction orthopaedic – to do with the bones and muscles mental health – a person’s emotional well–being
Exercise A3 a
correct
g
incorrect
b
correct
h
correct
c
correct
i
correct
d
incorrect
j
incorrect
e
incorrect
f
correct
Workbook answers
Speaker 5 a I believe / I think
Exercise A4 a
intensity
d
strength
b
intensity
e
intensity
c
strength
f
strength
Exercise B1
b
I’m afraid
Exercise C1 a
Asthma is a respiratory condition.
b
Triggers are things that start or set off an illness or condition.
a
a variety of
g
a lot of
b
a little
h
a couple of
c
a number of
i
plenty of
Exercise C2
d
a minority of
j
a pair of
a
Asthma x 14
e
a mix of
k
several
b
Triggers x 14
f
a great deal
l
the majority of
Exercise C3 Exercise B2
a
They are breathing tubes in the lungs.
No set answers
b
A problem with breathing
c
People have different triggers.
d
One, two or a dozen.
e
Talk to parent or doctor about getting allergy testing.
Exercise B3 Speaker 1 a Admitting the fact that her diet is not very healthy.
f
Take medication or have injections.
g
Males 0 – 14.
b
She’s not so sure that her lifestyle isn’t healthy.
h
They can affect people who don’t have allergies.
c
Too busy – I guess.
i
Switch to unscented or non-aerosol version.
d
That her lifestyle is not so bad as she exercises.
j
i
Keep your room clean and dust free.
ii
Wash sheets weekly.
Speaker 2
iii Get rid of carpets and curtains.
a
Because of their various activities.
iv Put stuff away to avoid collecting dust.
b
Furthermore ...
Speaker 3 a a factual one b
disagreeing
c
accepting
Speaker 4 a an opinion b
himself
Exercise D1 a
Caroline
e
Both
b
Caroline
f
George
c
Both
g
Caroline
d
George
169
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Unit 16: Social media
Exercise B1 chatting
shocking
Exercise A1
texting
spending
a
send or receive text messages
taking
stopping
b
keep track of appointments
using
c
play games
d
send emails
e
store contact information
f
download information from the Internet
g
Exercise B2 chat
stop
watch TV
lie
use
h
use the built-in calculator
take
i
take pictures
j
get apps
k
make videos
l
save reminders
Exercise B3 a
As a verb after a preposition – After having a shower, I went to bed.
b
As sentence subject – Cooking is one of her favourite hobbies.
No set answers
c
To list activities – Sewing, knitting, reading – they’re all her hobbies.
Exercise A3
d
To add information in a clause – She wandered off, speaking on her phone.
e
In continuous tenses – They are waiting for the bus in the rain.
f
After certain verbs – They like watching films at home together.
Exercise A2 170
a
abstained
g
traits
b
compulsively
h
sedentary
c
avid multitaskers
i
detrimental
d
mind boggling
j
profound
e
self-esteem
k
gauge
f
suppressed
l
precursors
Exercise B4 No set answers
Exercise A4 a
sedentary
e
compulsively
Exercise C1 and C2
b
abstained
f
detrimental
No set answers
c
gauge
g
precursors
d
mind-boggling
h
multitaskers
Exercise A5
Exercise C3 a
It is currently the most successful. A
b
It does not appeal as much to young people. B
c
About twelve months ago it was favoured by young people. B
a
depending on
f
depending on
b
according to
g
depending on
c
while
h
while
d
Presently it is almost equal in popularity. D
d
while
i
depending on
e
e
according to
Increased use by older people has made it less trendy. B
Workbook answers
f
An alternative and more recent social media. C
e
have a glimpse
g
consensus
g
It still hasn’t reached the level of its main competitor. A
f
curtailed
h
biodegradable
h
It is connected to one of the main forms of social media. D
Exercise A3
i
This suits a specific market and is becoming popular. C
j
It had never been the owner’s intention for it to be hip. B
a
true
c
b
true
d
a
effect
e
affect
b
affect
f
effect
true
c
affect
g
effect
true
d
effect
h
affects
f g h i
it looks as though it looks like it looks as if It looks like
Exercise B1
Exercise C4 a
influential
d
obsessed
b
outdone
e
concur
c
garnered
f
tool
Exercise C5
a b c d e
it seems as though seems it seems as if it seems like looks
a
23 – while this year only 23% rated it as the most influential.
Exercise B2
b
26 – Twitter was rated by 26% of teens as their ‘most important’ social media site.
No set answers
c
23 (again) – Facebook-owned Instagram also garnered 23% of votes
d
12 – up from 12% last year.
Unit 17: The environment
Exercise B3 a
hyponatraemia (literally ‘low salt’), a condition also known as ‘water intoxication’
b
the doctor
c
old and very young
d
people who run for a hobby
e
nausea, apathy, lethargy, dizziness and mental confusion; sufferers can lapse into a coma and die
f
people in nightclubs
g
in the nightclubs
h
the young woman
i
the drinks
Exercise A1 a
beverage
g
consensus
b
biodegradable
h
have a glimpse
c
discarded
i
curtailed
d
exotic
j
vulnerable
e
ecology
k
future prosperity
f
bloc
l
fertiliser
Exercise C1 No set answers
Exercise A2 a
fertilisers
c
vulnerable
b
exotic
d
discarded
Exercise C2 No set answers
171
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Exercise C3
172
•
what efforts (if any) are being made to improve the environment in my country
•
planting of trees preservation and protection of natural landscapes
a
France – uses a French word and talks about the Seine, a river in Paris
b
Peru – the Andean mountains / use of a Spanish word huaico / the city of Trujillo
•
c
India – mentions Asia / the Western Ghats, a mountain range in India
•
public is taking matters into their own hands as the government is not doing enough
d
Africa and Kigali
•
volunteers are cleaning up beaches and forests
Other
Exercise C4
Pollution and deforestation in Cyprus are the two main environmental issues in my country.
a
true
b
false – it’s interesting that a lot of youngsters in … either in universities or doing art on the street, want to make a change, but feel stopped by the national government
Today many green areas are being destroyed in order to create land to build houses and many forests are being destroyed by fires.
c
false – Africa is one of the most vulnerable continents to climate change
d
true
Exercise C5 a
That it is high.
b
Industrialised nations should be setting an example.
c
It used to be dry and hot.
d
Because they’re against the government.
e
Number of rainy days.
f
Evidence to make people work together.
g
Because Africa only makes a small impact.
h
Pollution.
Some efforts are being made to improve the environment, like planting trees and protecting natural landscapes, but it is not enough. So, people are beginning to take matters into their own hands. People are angry but now they are taking action and so they are planting trees, while volunteers offer to clean beaches and forests from all the rubbish. [97 words]
Unit 18: Hunger Exercise A1 c
c
o n
S u m p t
o n f
e c
T i
o n e r
n n o v
A t
i
i
d i
o n y
e
s
c
a
R d e d
a l
l
e
V i
d y
n
A m i
c
b i
o
T e c
h n o l
I n v
e s
p
O s
e
m a
N i
p u l
Exercise C6 No set answer
d i
Exercise D1 Main environmental issues in my country
v
i
s
a t
i
n g o g y
t a t
e d
•
pollution
Exercise A2
•
deforestation
a
alleviating
f
confectionery
b
discarded
g
innovative
How the environment has changed in my country
c
manipulated
h
dynamic
•
many forests being used as land to build houses
d
invent
i
biotechnology
•
forests being destroyed by fires
e
consumption
j
dispose
Workbook answers
Exercise A3
Exercise B2
inventive
concentrated
starve
starvation
prepared
invent
alleviate
alleviation
innovative
The municipality is going to plan a children’s playground in an urban area but by way of contrast we’re going to plan a rural one as well. The board agreed to all of the architect’s concerns about the playgrounds, but nevertheless still think that he’s being very demanding.
alleviated
preparation
starving
concentrate
Consequently, we’ve decided that the situation, where we will use his assistance and guidance, can only be temporary and we’ll use our own professionals in the future.
inventor
innovator
prepare
innovate
concentration Noun
Verb
Adjective
starvation
starve
starving
preparation
prepare
prepared
Inventor
invent
inventive
alleviation
alleviate
alleviated
concentration
concentrate
concentrated
innovator
innovate
innovative
And in addition, we’ve agreed with our colleagues at the municipality that finances will have to be controlled now as the architect is very expensive. Similarly, his control of labour and who does what will now have to be checked by us for the same reasons. So this is what we’re going to do: To begin with we’ll decide who will manage the project furthermore…
Exercise B3 (left – right)
Exercise A4
Row 1: c, b, a, e
a
prepared
e
invent
b
concentration
f
innovative
c
alleviate
g
preparation
d
starvation
h
starving
Exercise A5 a
breath
e
breath
b
breathe
f
breath, breathe
c
breathe
g
breathe
d
breath
h
breath
Row 2: d, g, f
Exercise B4 Variations possible To begin with you weigh the ingredients, i.e. flour, yeast, water, etc. First you mix the ingredients well until they form a dough. Secondly leave the dough to sit until it has doubled in size. Thirdly work the dough again and put onto a baking tray. Next leave the bread for about 40 minutes for a second rise. After that put the dough into a hot oven and bake for about 40 minutes and finally remove from the oven and cool.
Exercise B1 a
iii
d
i
Exercise C1
b
ii
e
vi
a
getting them to our shops and kitchens
c
iv
f
v
b
eleven
c
tropical ecosystems near the equator
d
use of water and chemicals
173
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
e
global warming
f
fish
g
more than half the world’s population
h
irrigation
I believe school is a place where children come to gain knowledge. Knowledge does not only mean learning how to solve mathematical equations and learning a foreign language. Knowledge is also learning about social skills such as making friends and learning how to control your anger and disappointment in difficult situations. Knowledge also means knowing how to live independently from your parents and I believe cookery skills can offer us this.
Exercise C2 No set answers
Exercise C3 a
in favour
d
not in favour
b
not in favour
e
in favour
c
not in favour
f
not in favour
Being able to cook a few meals is an excellent skill. Providing opportunities such as these also offer enjoyment to children who prefer practical lessons where they are able to use their hands as well as their brains. It is important not to forget that not all children wish to go to university to study an academic degree. What would the world be like without chefs? Once again, I think it is an excellent idea! Best wishes,
Exercise C4
Peter Petroviko (195 words)
a
4
c
2
e
3
b
5
d
6
f
1
Exercise D1 174
Unit 19: Fashions Exercise A1
Core
a
weave
h
market
Dear Sir / Madam,
b
crop
i
current
I have recently heard about your idea to start cookery lessons at school. I do not believe this is a good idea and it is one I disagree with. I feel this way because I come to school in order to learn things that I would not be able to learn at home.
c
platform
j
trainer
d
scratch
k
gear
e
shade
l
pet
f
leaves
m
uniform
g
orange
If I wish to learn how to cook, I will ask my mother or my grandmother. My parents cannot teach me Maths or Physics or foreign languages. School is a place where I come to understand things that will allow me to later go to university or get a degree. I feel that cookery lessons would be wasting the little precious time I have in order to learn the many things I need and that cookery will not help me in any way.
Exercise A2 a
ethnic minority groups
b
ethical fashions
c
alternative styles
Best wishes,
d
design and engineering
Marios Genakritos (144 words)
e
latest gear
f
avoid ridicule
g
an atmosphere of pride
h
erase their individuality
i
sweeping the mation
j
the latest peer-pleasing designs
k
designer fashions
l
academic results
Extended Dear Sir / Madam, I recently heard about your idea to introduce cookery lessons to our weekly school schedule and I wish to express my opinion of this. I think it is an excellent idea and I will happily support you with this new lesson.
Workbook answers
Exercise A3
Exercise B3
a
an atmosphere of pride
Variations are possible
b
ethnic minority groups
Adjectives before a noun:
c
avoid ridicule
d
academic results
e
alternative styles
f
ethical fashion
g
design and engineering
Adjectives after verbs:
h
latest gear
d
The cake smells good.
i
erase their individuality
e
Your hair looks great.
j
sweeping the nation
f
Your car is very nice.
k
designer fashion
l
peer-pleasing design concept
a
latest fashion
b
exam-style questions
c
second listening
Exercise B4 No set answers
Exercise A4 a
global
c
world
e
global
b
global
d
world
f
world
Exercise B1
Exercise C1 a
fibre – a thread from which textile is formed
b
spin – turn or whirl round quickly
c
thread – a long, thin strand of fibre
a
domesticated
g
global
d
weave – form fabric by interlacing thread
b
mandatory
h
fermented
e
cloth – a fabric made from wool or cotton
c
alternative
i
personal
d
fashionable
j
businesslike
e
hand-spun
k
traditional
f
complex
l
contemporary
Exercise C2 hood
Exercise B2 b
a mandatory decision
c
alternative choice
d
fashionable clothes
e
hand-spun textile
f
a complex crossword
g
a global problem
h
fermented juice
i
a personal issue
j
businesslike approach
k
traditional practices
l
contemporary art
collar
pocket flap
175
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Exercise C3
b
Technical clothing to be produced by GHK Electrics and the Jeane Company, range of technical clothing designed by Giovanni Conte, and soon available in shops.
Variations possible
176
a
What has changed about clothing over the years? A description
c
Jackets will have phones with voice recognition technology, microphone and earphones in hood or collar.
b
How many basic stages are there in the clothesmaking process? List of stages
A keypad controls everything, hidden under pocket flap.
c
What roles do the three partners have? Description
d e f
d
Where in the new jackets will the earphones be? Location
g
Future designs could include cameras for facerecognition with technology submerged in the fabric, and therefore invisible.
h
Clothes will still be fashionable and will not look like clothes from space.
e
What will happen when the phone rings? Event
f
How are the phone and the MP3 player controlled? Information about gadget
If dirty, jacket can be washed in machine. Conte gets ideas from all over the world, has in excess of 50 000 items in his Bologna studio, which inspire his designs.
g
Where does Conte get the ideas for his clothes from? Place or event details
h
What type of garments form the majority of Conte’s collection? Description
i
What does Conte hope to include in his future designs? Description
Exercise A1 / A2
j
What would be the two benefits of face-recognition cameras? Information
a
mobile phone – talking face-to-face
b
internet connectivity – instantaneous and untethered communication
c
lobal positioning system – you will never get lost again
d
personal computer – a 30-ton monster
e
computer mouse – tail-like cord and round body
f
digital camera – information dissemination and communication
g
remote control – wirelessly change the TV channel
h
microwave oven – modernised the way we eat
i
digital music – sound quality and sharing ability
j
video camera – news dissemination and recording history
k
Why do you think the interviewer asks if Conte’s designs will look fashionable? Reply
Exercise C4 a
fibres
b
four
c
to produce a range of technical clothing
d
built into the hood or collar
e
the MP3 player automatically cuts out
f
via a hidden keypad
g
collected clothes
h
military
i
face-recognition camera
j
information about a person and parents watch their children
k
because of all the technology included
Exercise C5 Technology tomorrow – the clothes industry
a
Clothes fibres have changed, but clothes-making process is same: spinning, weaving, cutting and sewing.
Unit 20: Technology
Exercise A3 self-lacing trainers
aerial wind turbines
smart fridges
tightens the shoe
electricity
connected latest radar food technology
reduce slippage
clean solution
technology highest level of connectivity
sharpen off shore and brightly concentration underwater coloured best fit
wind farms
recipes
airport control centres
operate on time
Workbook answers
Exercise A4
Exercise B2
a
a team of engineers = text (iv)
Variations possible
b
above the clouds = text (ii)
a
c
battery that lasts for about two weeks = text (i)
Even the most advanced technology in the world will have faults in it.
d
biometric data = text (i)
b
e
correct cooking time = (iii)
Several hundred years in the distant past people had simpler lives.
f
embedded wifi = text (iii)
c
g
floor-to-ceiling radar screen = text (iv)
Once you and your family members used to live without any technology.
h
plus and minus buttons on the side = text (i)
d
i
six megawatts = text (ii)
In many different ways our lifestyles are more complex now.
j
the supermarket aisle – text (iii)
e
Thanks to the great inventors of the past and present, our lives have improved immensely.
k
underwater noise – text (ii)
f
The whole concept of life on other planets is an exciting one.
Exercise A5
Exercise B3
Variations possible
Variations possible
Text i I can’t imagine how much it would cost to buy a pair of shoes like this. I wonder how long they would last compared to a normal pair of trainers, including the battery, which you have to buy every two weeks. I think shoes like this are unnecessary and how long will the buttons on the side last? Text ii These sound great as a clean solution but what really worries me, and I think we haven’t been told the whole story, is the impact on the environment. These wind turbines are huge and stretch above the clouds and downwards, so animals are going to be affected by them in some way.
Exercise A6
a
Both Chas and Audrey will be coming tonight.
b
Honey as well as ginger are excellent for your health.
c
Neither mobile phones nor digital cameras will ever be that cheap.
d
Either the manager or the team leader will have to attend the meeting.
e
Neither video conferencing nor internet connectivity will replace human contact.
f
Either mobile phones or tablets will not exist in the future.
Exercise B4 a
I don’t have a problem if
b
I don’t even think that
c
But I believe that
d
And the great thing is
a
internal
e
internally
e
What’s not to like about
b
inside
f
inside
f
The point nowadays is that
c
inside
g
inside
g
I can’t think of
d
internal
h
internal
Exercise C1 Exercise B1
a
App 8
f
App 9
a
tightens
e
are
b
App 6
g
App 1
b
loosens
f
will tell
c
App 3
h
App 5
c
is building
g
is
d
App 4
i
App 10
d
tend
h
monitors
e
App 2
j
App 7
177
Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language
Exercise C2 and C3 a
3
e
10
i
2
b
5
f
9
j
1
c
8
g
4
d
7
h
6
Exercise D1 Hakan: Istanbul Maps and Walks and /or Streetdust / Grand Bazaar Gamze: Trafi Turkiye and BiTakis
Exercise E1 Variations possible The app I would like is one which knows where my cat is when she goes out at night and what she does and the places she visits. It has to be small, so she could wear it on her neck, in a pretty colour and cheap as I don’t have much money. I would call it ‘ZoeFinder’ after the name of my cat. 178
Exercise E2 Core Hi Alexandra, Last week my classmates and I went to Limassol for a school trip that was based around using new technology in order to get to know your city better. The point of the trip was to use a new app called ‘Find your city’ which lets you visit all the places tourists wouldn’t normally get to see. It was great!
The app works by letting people who already live in the city post places that you wouldn’t necessarily find in guidebooks. They put up all their favourite restaurants and bars, as well as things like unknown museums and little parks that are hidden away in the backstreets. Next time we go somewhere new together we have to make sure that we use it. It’s such a great idea and I loved using it! Hope to speak to you soon, Alekka. (142 words) Extended Hi Michalis, We recently visited a castle in the town where I went with the school. The castle was the biggest I’ve ever been to and I was so excited to go there. Because not many of us wanted to visit the castle, we were given some money where we could download an app at the castle in our language. This app spoke to us over our mobile phone on loudspeaker and took us all over the inside of the castle to the beautiful rooms and into the gardens explaining all the different things and places there. It was great and I felt that I learnt so much. The good thing was, we could take our time and go to the places that we wanted; so if there were a lot of people in one place, we went back there later and found a quieter place instead. Even when we had lunch we were told about the sort of food people ate in those days and how it was cooked. It was great and I would love to spend another day there going to the places I didn’t have time to visit. Want to come with me next time? See you around. (202 words)
Acknowledgements We are grateful to the CATS School, Cambridge and Cambridge International School for granting permission to film.
179
179
protected by copyright and all other applicable intellectual-property laws and international treaties.
Terms and conditions of use This is a legal agreement between ‘You’ (which means the individual customer or the Educational Institution and its authorised users) and Cambridge University Press (‘the Licensor’) for Cambridge IGCSE English as a Second Language Teacher’s Resource. By placing this DVD in the DVD-ROM drive of your computer, You agree to the terms of this licence.
b
You may not copy the DVD-ROM except for making one copy of the DVD-ROM solely for backup or archival purposes. You may not alter, remove or destroy any copyright notice or other material placed on or with this DVD-ROM.
3 Liability and Indemnification 1 Limited licence a
You are purchasing only the right to use the DVD-ROM and are acquiring no rights, express or implied, to it, other than those rights granted in this limited licence for notfor-profit educational use only.
b
The Licensor grants You the licence to use one copy of this DVD-ROM.
c
You shall not: (i) copy or authorise copying of the DVDROM, (ii) translate the DVD-ROM,(iii) reverse-engineer, alter, adapt, disassemble or decompile the DVD-ROM, (iv) transfer, sell, lease, lend, profit from, assign or otherwise convey all or any portion of the DVD-ROM or (v) operate the DVD-ROM from a mainframe system, except as provided in these terms and conditions.
d
Permission is explicitly granted for use of the DVDROM on a data projector, interactive whiteboard or other public display in the context of classroom teaching at a purchasing institution.
e
If You are an Educational Institution, once a teacher ceases to be a member of the Educational Institution, all copies of the material on the DVDROM stored on his/her personal computer must be destroyed and the DVD-ROM returned to the Educational Institution.
f
You are permitted to print reasonable copies of the printable resources on the DVD-ROM. These must be used solely for use within the context of classroom teaching at a purchasing institution.
a
The DVD-ROM is supplied ‘as is’ with no express guarantee as to its suitability. To the extent permitted by applicable law, the Licensor is not liable for costs of procurement of substitute products, damages or losses of any kind whatsoever resulting from the use of this product, or errors or faults in the DVD-ROM, and in every case the Licensor’s liability shall be limited to the suggested list price or the amount actually paid by You for the product, whichever is lower.
b
You accept that the Licensor is not responsible for the availability of any links within or outside the DVD-ROM and that the Licensor is not responsible or liable for any content available from sources outside the DVDROM to which such links are made.
c
Where, through use of the original material, You infringe the copyright of the Licensor, You undertake to indemnify and keep indemnified the Licensor from and against any loss, cost, damage or expense (including without limitation damages paid to a third party and any reasonable legal costs) incurred by the Licensor as a result of such infringement.
4 Termination Without prejudice to any other rights, the Licensor may terminate this licence if You fail to comply with the terms and conditions of the licence. In such an event, You must destroy all copies of the DVD-ROM.
5 Governing law 2 Copyright a
All original content is provided as part of the DVDROM (including text, images and ancillary material) and is the copyright of the Licensor or has been licensed to the Licensor for use in the DVD-ROM,
This agreement is governed by the laws of England, without regard to its ‘conflict of laws’ provision, and each party irrevocably submits to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts. The parties disclaim the application of the United Nations Convention of the International Sale of Goods.